1611103 - master copy - engineering & sustainability ...€¦ · 1611103 - master copy -...

1611103 - Master Copy - Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE) - 4. MDCS

1

Engineering & Sustainability Requirements (ENSURE)4. Monash Design and Construction Standards (MDCS) Revision 7 (August 2016)

Monash input field Have you created your own filter view for this tab yet?Design Team input field Go to the "Data" menu > Hover over "Filter views" > Select "Save as filter view" > In the top left corner, rename the filter to your name

> Use this filter whenever you use this tab of ENSURE.

Relevant discipline Section Heading Category Space type

specific Item no. Requirement Resource directory reference (* = contained within MDCS)

Acknowledged (Section A only)

Compliance response Non-compliance explanation Completed

byDate completed Comments Monash authorisation Monash feedback Feedback by Date of

feedback

All A - Introduction Introduction Purpose A 01.01

The purpose of the Monash Design and Construction Standards (MDCS) is to establish consistent minimum design, construction and performance standards for built works at all of Monash’s Australasian Campuses. The MDCS is divided into sections for ease of use but must be considered in its entirety, regardless of specific discipline or responsibilities.

The MDCS is to be utilised by all parties associated with: - Project briefing, - Design, development and preparation of project specifications, - Project management, - Delivery of projects, and - Maintenance activities.

Extracts from the MDCS may be incorporated in specifications, however it must remain the consultant's responsibility to fully investigate the needs of the University and produce designs and documents that are entirely ‘fit for purpose’ and which meet the ‘intent’ of the project brief. The MDCS must not negate or reduce the requirement for all parties to fully comply with current editions of relevant Australian Standards, the Building Code of Australia, Disability Discrimination Act (DDA), Accessibility Aspiration Design Factors and local council and authority requirements.

All A - Introduction Introduction Structure of

Document A 01.02The MDCS is divided into disciplinary based sections, each setting out the design principles which include minimum sustainability and performance requirements. Referenced Schedules also form the MDCS which nominates University standardised systems or products.

All A - Introduction Introduction Related

documents A 01.03The MDCS and its requirements are to be read in conjunction with other relevant University documents as listed in the Resource Directory, imbedded in this Tool.

Resource Directory

All A - Introduction Introduction Variance from

Requirements A 01.04

Approval to depart from the requirements of this document can only be issued by the Executive Director, Buildings & Property Division or representative after careful consideration as to the best interests of the University. Those seeking departure approvals will do so in writing using the Design Dispensation (from MDCS) form. Else, non-compliance must be declared for all relevant requirements in the MDCS.

Design Dispensation (from MDCS)

All A - Introduction Introduction Revision Log A 01.05

Current Issue: August 2016: Revision 07 - Monash Design & Construction Standards (MDCS)

Previous Issues:March 2015: Revision 06 - Monash Design & Construction Standards (MDCS) - SupersededMay 2014: Revision 05 - Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards (MLDCS) - SupersededApril 2014: Revision 04 - Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards (MLDCS) - SupersededFebruary 2013: Revision 03 - Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards (MLDCS) - SupersededAugust 2011: Revision 02 - Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards (MLDCS) - SupersededMarch 2010: Revision 01 - Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards (MLDCS) - SupersededMarch 2005: Minimum Level Design & Construction Standards (MLDCS) - SupersededSpecifications:Sept 2003: Monash Project Design and Management Guidelines – SupersededApril 2003: Standard Specification for use with Minor Works and Refurbishment of Existing Building Infrastructure - Superseded

All A - Introduction Introduction Revision

Management A 01.06 It is envisaged that revisions to this document will be undertaken at intervals of not more than three (3) years.

All A - Introduction Introduction Endorsement body A 01.07 Executive Management Group, Buildings and Property Division

All A - Introduction Introduction Owner A 01.08 Executive Director, Buildings and Property Division

All A - Introduction Introduction Author(s) A 01.09

PlanningProjectsSecurity andOHS

All A - Introduction Introduction Contact Person A 01.10 Manager, Engineering and Sustainability

All A - Introduction Explanatory A 02

The MDCS has been prepared by the Buildings and Property Division of Monash University to guide staff, consultants and contractors involved in the project design and procurement process. The Standards were intended to establish minimum requirements for Monash projects. The Standards are not intended to explain all matters associated with projects, or to call up all specific contractual or detailed design requirements, these things being covered more properly by the individual project brief and contract documents.

Where references to applicable codes, laws and regulations and other matters or things which must already be known by qualified staff, consultants and contractors are superseded, the newer version must apply. The work must be carried out strictly in accordance with the latest relevant Australian Standards, Codes and Practices and associated published specifications. The version of Standards referenced must be the current version upon the date of works. Where Standards referenced are superseded by other Australian Standards, the newer standard must apply.


2









feedback

All A - Introduction Explanatory Objectives A 02.01

The objectives of the MDCS are: - To explain the University’s preferred systems, elements and components in simple terms. - To help achieve project outcomes which support the University’s core business of innovative teaching and research of international quality. - To ensure the University develops sustainably and delivers environmentally sustainable outcomes as per the University Masterplan. - To standardise systems and building elements for consistency, operation and maintainability across all campuses.

All A - Introduction Explanatory Application A 02.02

This MDCS describes generic requirements. Requirements specific to a particular project, campus or other variable, will be covered by the project brief. The Standards do not take precedence over any contract document, although they will typically be cross-referenced in such documentation.

All A - Introduction Explanatory Copyright and

circulation A 02.03

The MDCS is the property of Monash University and may not be copied without the approval in writing of the Divisional Director, Buildings & Property Division. Application to copy and distribute all, or sections of this document, is to be made through the University Project manager/coordinator assigned to the project.

All A - Introduction Explanatory Acknowledgement

s A 02.04The MDCS was prepared with the assistance of Monash University staff, external consultants, contractors and colleagues from other education institutions. The University conveys its thanks.

All A - Introduction

Strategic Planning & Development

Strategic & Facilities Planning A 03.01

Strategic and facilities planning for Projects works and building refurbishment is driven by: - Monash Directions 2025, - Campus Master Plans, - Strategic Asset Management Plan (SAM Plan), - Monash University Guide for Design & Management of Environmentally Sustainable Buildings: the Eco-Accord

To ensure compliance with these documents, reference must be made early in the project feasibility stage. Faculty and space planning is carried out by the Buildings and Property, Strategic Planning & Information, and is to be utilised as a precursor to the design and construction phase, to which these guidelines refer.

Caulfield Campus Masterplan (2011-2030)

Clayton Campus Masterplan (2011-2030)

Eco-Accord



Statutory Compliance & Standards

A 03.02

The MDCS sets minimum standards for new buildings, building refurbishments and maintenance asset replacements. These standards must be adhered to in all Construction & Maintenance projects at the University.

The intent is to set a standard for University facilities, however, consultants are expected to propose ‘best practice/state of the art’ construction techniques, and introduce technological changes that support pragmatic, innovative design. In recognition of this, any variation from these minimum standards must declared in the Tool under the appropriate compliance response with an accompanying detailed explanation. All variations will be authorised by the appropriate Buildings and Property Officer.

The design must comply with the requirements of the current relevant legislation, including but not limited to: - Standards, (Australian and New Zealand, and were not locally available British) - Local Supply Authority, - Occupational Health and Safety Legislation, - Disability Discrimination Act & Access to Premises, - Insurance Council of Australia, - Metropolitan and other Regional Fire Brigades and authorities, - Building Act, - Building Regulations Building Code of Australia, and - Federal, State and Statutory Authority having jurisdiction over the works or building during the construction of the works.

All works must be designed in accordance with relevant Australian Standards and Building Regulations, Codes of Practice and the Specifications. All refurbishment works must be designed to meet all current statutory and standard requirements.


3









feedback



Key Design Criteria A 03.03

Monash University Project Managers, Officers and Supervisors have a responsibility to ensure the works they are managing or supervising do not negatively impact on the aesthetics, architecture or Public Realm.

Key Design Criteria must include, though not be limited to: - Functional and safe for the intended use, - Economical design that also eliminates wasteful use of space, - Avoidance of expensive exterior and interior finishes, unless sufficient justification exists with regard to maintenance, character, etc., and without compromising the agreed University identity where appropriate, - The avoidance of building services and equipment on façades and roof tops, must be placed out of the ‘line of sight’ (particularly when viewed from ground level), - Flexibility of future use of building and roof spaces, - Engineering Services must also be considered in relation to future change of use and precinct benefits, - Design for resource efficiency (energy, water and materials), - Delivery of high Indoor Environment Quality, - Design to minimise the university’s exposure to Litigation, - Pipework, conduit and services must be concealed, yet readily accessible where possible unless otherwise approved by the Monash University Project Manager, Officer or Supervisor having responsibility for the works, - Ventilation and exhaust systems or fresh air exhaust and intakes must take into account the height of adjoining buildings and air flows, - Performance based solutions may be adopted under the BCA, providing the solution identifies any additional ongoing maintenance costs, - DDA compliance, - Waste minimisation in design, construction and demolition.

Note: the University does not accept materials and products that are environmentally, socially and economically non-beneficial.



Ease of Maintenance A 03.04

The design should endeavour to promote, co-ordinate and unify materials, plant and equipment in accordance within the Standards established by the University. Such elements must permit interchangeability of spares and simplify maintenance and operation. Straightforward, cost efficient and low maintenance procedures are of paramount importance, and must be reviewed before going to tender.

All fabric, structural and service components must be readily accessible and not labour intensive to repair. Buildings that exceed three floors must include or accommodate approved building access systems for the maintenance and cleaning of the external façades.


Strategic Planning & Development Life Cycle Costing A 03.05

The University aims to achieve the optimum balance between capital outlay and operating costs for buildings, consistent with a continuing level of quality and service throughout their agreed lifetime. All built form design, product and material selection must consider the likely ongoing costs to the university and their fitness for use.

Lifecycle costing must be undertaken in accordance with The Australian/New Zealand Standard Life Cycle Costing – An Application Guide (AS/NZS. 4536:1999).

To ensure development sustainability, financially and environmentally all projects must be discussed with Buildings & Property: - Strategic Planning and Development - Engineering and Sustainability; and - Campus Design Quality & Planning

Consultation with these groups is to occur in the early stages of each project and the agreed strategy outlined in the Architect’s return brief.



BCA Definition of Building and Structure Categories

A 03.06

When designing whole or sections of built forms and landscaping for the University, the designer must consider this to be a workplace. Therefore under section 28 of the Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004, the designer must ensure that hazards and risks that may exist in the design are eliminated or controlled at the design phase, so far as is reasonably practicable, and that it is designed to be safe and without risks to the health of persons using it as a workplace, for the purpose for which it was designed.


Built Form, Size & Orientation Generally A 04.01

Building ages and construction techniques vary considerably, both within and across campuses, reflecting the materials and techniques in use at the time they were built. Buildings are a mix of low, medium and high rise, adopting linear and deep space floor plates, as well as asymmetrical, ‘circular’ and other geometric shapes.

Refer to the Design and Development Controls and Master Planning documents for campus growth, height governance and site or precinct densities.


Built Form, Size & Orientation New Buildings A 04.02

In addition to supporting the immediate needs of clients, buildings must respond to the perceived future needs of the university for the anticipated life of the building. Any new building must be delivered with a minimum GBCA certified Green Star 5 Star As-Built rating. Any guidance related to environmentally sustainable development must be sought from Buildings & Property Engineering and Sustainability.


Built Form, Size & Orientation Master Plan A 04.03

Proposed building and landscaping design must be consistent with the University’s Overall and Campus Master Plan and Landscape Design and Development Controls. Where a Campus Master Plan does not exist, direction must be sought from Building and Property Division - Strategic Planning and Development and Campus Design Quality & Planning by submission of a briefing document.


4









feedback

Architect B - Design Controls

Planning & Sustainability

Ecological Sustainability B 01.01

Ecological sustainability is to be maximised throughout design regardless of project size or type. The principles of the EcoAccord model and those detailed in the GBCA Green Star suite of tools must be used.


Planning & Sustainability Green Star B 01.02

All new buildings with a construction budget exceeding $10m must be certified by an independently assessed sustainable building certification system as recognised through the World Green Building Council. The relevant certification system will seek As-built certification to levels of ‘Local Excellence’ or ‘World Leadership’ standards. Building developments under this budget threshold and any refurbishment works not eligible for certification will apply principles consistent with best practice to guide and deliver sustainable outcomes.


Planning & Sustainability Eco-Accord B 01.03 All new buildings and major refurbishments are required to complete a

response to the Monash University Eco-Accord (imbedded in this Tool) Eco-Accord


Planning & Sustainability Passive Design B 01.04

Consultants must be well versed on the principles of passive design, noting that building orientation, footprint and façade design are critical aspects of passive design.



Construction Materials B 01.05

Construction materials, in both building design and operation that are environmentally benign, non-toxic and non-allergenic shall be considered. Preference for materials that are easy to install without a requirement for protective clothing for installers. Adoption of materials from the Living Building Challenge - Declare Product Database is preferred.

Living Building Challenge - Declare Product Database


Planning & Sustainability Facilities B 01.06

Provide building facilities that support physical activity and good health, specifically: - Easily accessible drinking fountains throughout the building - Stairs for everyday use in multi-level buildings - Other opportunities to enhance physical activity should be considered, where advice is available from the University OHS team.

Hydraulic Engineer

B - Design Controls


Water Conservation & Quality

B 01.07 Opportunities to connect to and "fit for purpose use" of campus non-potable water supplies must be investigated.

Hydraulic Engineer

B - Design Controls


Landscape Irrigation B 01.08 All new landscaping projects require irrigation to be sourced from a rainwater

harvesting system.Mechanical Engineer

B - Design Controls


Water Use in Mechanical Plant B 01.09 Air cooled condensers with pre-cooler arrangements to be considered instead

of conventional cooling towers.

Contractor B - Design Controls


Waste and Recycling During Construction

B 01.10

Metals, such as copper pipe, tap ware, troughs and electrical cables are high-value materials that can and must be recycled. Concrete, ceramics and plasterboard must be segregated from general waste and managed appropriately. A target of 95% diversion from landfill should be set, with a minimum requirement of 80% (by weight). Monthly waste and recycling data must be provided and forwarded to the Planning team.



Waste Management during Construction

B 01.11

The Building Contractor must submit an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for review by the Sustainability Compliance & Integration Officer (SCIO). The EMP will include all environmental risks and impacts associated with the project works and management controls to address these. The EMP must also specifically address waste and recycling, stormwater protection and management and refer to the following EPA Victoria Best Practice Management Guidelines: - Construction techniques for sediment pollution control, EPA Vic Best practice environmental management series, Pub No. 275; - Environmental guidelines for major construction sites, EPA Vic Best practice environmental management series, Pub No. 480.The EMP will include an environmental incident definition and notification process to the Monash project manager and SCIO



Independent Design Review & Independent Commissioning Agent

B 01.12Use an Independent Design Reviewer and/or Independent Commissioning Agent to provide third-party technical engineering design review and verification of commissioning.

Architect B - Design Controls Site Underground

Services B 02.01Details relating to existing location, type, size and invert levels of underground services are to be established prior to any excavation works.The Project Architect, Lead Consultant and/or Services Consultants must transfer the above information into the contract documentation.

Architect B - Design Controls Site Feature & Level

Survey B 02.02A feature and level survey, if required, will need to be delivered by external engagement within the project and provided electronically to the University for its records and data management.

Architect B - Design Controls Site Dilapidation

Reports B 02.03The Project Architect, Lead Consultant and/or Services Consultants must carry out a joint inspection with the Contractor of existing roads, services and building conditions, and record any damage to the University Project manager/coordinator prior to commencement of onsite works.

Architect B - Design Controls Site Soil Testing and

Investigation B 02.04

The Project Architect, Lead Consultant and/or Services Consultants must (unless otherwise agreed), arrange for soil testing and investigation to be carried out and provide copies of the report (in digital PDF or Word document formats) to the University for record purposes. A copy of the report must be issued to the University Project Manager/coordinator.

Architect B - Design Controls Orientation B 03

Within the parameters of the site and the required operational activities, the building must be positioned such that it maximises the penetration of natural light to the inner occupied zones whilst minimising potential heat loads from the east and west to provide comfortable environmental conditions and minimise running costs.


5









feedback


Site Access & Approach Access Ways B 04.01

Circulation and access paths need to consider varying degrees of traffic and be categorised into the following, with minimum widths for each:- Arterial: major access routes between buildings or from car parking or set down areas. Minimum width 1800mm,- Main: access routes which carry less traffic than arterial routes while still being seen as important thoroughfares. Minimum width 1500mm,- Secondary: access routes which serve only one building or a small area within a building. Minimum width 1200mm.


Site Access & Approach Gradient B 04.02 Gradients must not be steeper than 1 in 20 unless fitted with a handrail and

kerb.


Site Access & Approach

Set Down Areas & Car Parks B 04.03

Provide accessible set down locations and bicycle parking close to the main entrances of buildings, undercover wherever possible. Also provide additional accessible parking bays, where space permits and as required by needs of building occupants.


Site Access & Approach

Continuous Path of Travel B 04.04

Provide a Disabilities Discrimination Act (DDA) compliant continuous path of travel, with appropriate directional aids, from car park and set down locations to the main entry of the building.


Site Access & Approach Kerbs and Gutters B 04.05 Kerbs and gutters must have “accessible” kerb crossovers to allow

continuous path of travel to building.

Architect B - Design Controls Structure Building Height B 05.01 Overall building height must be considered within the context of the

surrounding buildings and the Campus Master Plan.

Architect B - Design Controls Structure Slab to Slab Floor

Height B 05.02Slab to Slab floor heights must be designed for future proofing and flexibility of use, facilitate operations, equipment, the inclusion or exclusion of suspended ceilings, clearance and access to engineering services (both immediate and for the perceived life cycle of the building).

Architect B - Design Controls Structure Additional Height B 05.03

Special facilities such as laboratories requiring additional height due to equipment, auditoria, tiered lecture theatres and religious centres & sports facilities etc. must be considered on an individual basis.

Architect B - Design Controls Structure Canopies B 05.04 Canopies must be provided as additional protection to building entries.

Architect B - Design Controls Floor Size & Shape B 06

The size, shape and number must be considered to best facilitate the operational needs, flexibility of use, circulation and ‘crush’ spaces, minimise distances and journey times for occupants, and balance the penetration of natural light while minimising solar heat gains.

Architect B - Design Controls Acoustics B 07

Spaces which require a: - high level of acoustic separation to be designed to a minimum sound reduction loss of 40dB(A), characterised by low level of audible sounds from adjoining spaces. - medium level of acoustic separation to be designed to a minimum sound reduction loss of 32dB(A), characterised by intelligible but not distracting sounds from adjoining spaces. - low level of acoustic separation is adequate to be designed to a minimum sound reduction loss of 27dB(A). - two different acoustic separation requirements, adopt the higher level of separation."

Architect B - Design Controls Acoustics Ambient Sound B 07.01

Levels to be at or below: - NR30 in lecture theatres and conference rooms - NR35 in individual offices and tutorial rooms - NR 40 in open planned offices, waiting areas and circulation spaces."

Architect B - Design Controls Acoustics Vibrations B 07.02

Separate all sources of vibration to avoid transmission into building interiors. Requirements for special purpose facilities such as laboratories will be specified in the project brief.

Architect B - Design Controls Acoustics Special Purpose B 07.03

Acoustics to comply with any special purpose facilities such as audio and visual arts recording studios, medical and counselling suites, lecture theatres, libraries and plant rooms specified in the project brief.


University Approved Suppliers B 08

Architects and Interior Designers must refer to the Monash University 'How to Buy Guides' for the panel of 'Approved Suppliers' for incorporation into project documentation.

Monash University 'How to Buy Guides'


University Standardised Products B 09

When specifying materials, components and products, Architects and Interior Designers must refer to the 'How to Buy Guides' to identify products that are standardised for use.



University Standardised Products Conditions B 09.01

Specified products and materials must meet the following conditions: - Equipment must not be used unless spare parts are currently available within Australia, and reasonable ongoing continuity guaranteed. - Australian Made Products from renewable sources must be used. - Any timber or timber products should be Forestry Stewardship Council (FSC) certified. - All materials to be low off gassing. All engineered wood products to be certified E0 for formaldehyde and its derivatives.


University Standardised Products Alternatives B 09.02

Alternative products may be proposed if they are considered to be superior (both in performance and environmental impact) and readily available. Written agreement to use such products must be obtained from the University.


Occupational Health & Safety General B 10.01

All consultants, contractors and subcontractors must ensure that its employees, agents and subcontractors comply at all times with Monash University’s OHS policies and procedures.


Occupational Health & Safety

Safety Management Systems

B 10.02

The Head Contractor will be required to have in place an OHS management system that must, as a minimum requirement, demonstrate compliance with OHS AS 18001:2007 or equivalent occupational health and management systems. This management plan is required prior to commencement of works on site.


6









feedback


Occupational Health & Safety

OHS Management Plan B 10.03

The Principal Contractor for the construction work must provide the University with a Premises specific Occupational Health and Safety Management Plan for the works prior to the work commencing. The Contractor must ensure that the plan is maintained and kept up to date during the course of the work. This management plan is required prior to commencement of works on site. If there is a requirement to temporarily relocate emergency egress paths or assembly areas, consultation must take place between the Project Manager / Coordinator and affected entities and changes communicated appropriately.


Thermal Insulation Performance B 11

All buildings must maximise opportunities for thermal insulation: - Thermally broken facades and window elements must be used. Standard window frames must be thermally broken and bespoke designs must be thermally enhanced as a minimum.- Double-glazed windows are a minimum requirement for new buildings and refurbishments.- Effective building sealing to minimise air infiltration is mandatory.- Ensure all main entries are air locked at the appropriate scale to be effective.


Animal, Vermin & Pest Infestation Vermin B 12.01 All cavities/apertures must be sealed/closed off such that all vermin are

unable to gain access to internal spaces.


Animal, Vermin & Pest Infestation Animal B 12.02 Wherever possible façade detailing must avoid ledges or protrusions, such

that birds are unable to perch, roost or nest.


Animal, Vermin & Pest Infestation Termite Control B 12.03

Anti-termite treatment must be provided to all new buildings. All workmanship and materials must conform to the requirements of the Australian Standard for protection of buildings from subterranean termites with the following considerations: - Physical barriers must be provided in preference to chemical treatments requiring cyclic applications. - Minimise disruption to adjacent building users where treatment is required. - All tree roots which have been exposed during excavation, including stumps, logs and other timber must be fully excavated and removed from the building site. Tree roots from adjacent trees must be reported to the University Project manager/coordinator prior to removal.

Architect B - Design Controls Vandalism (graffiti) B 13 Anti-graffiti coatings must be applied to all vulnerable surfaces as directed by

the University.

Architect B - Design Controls Waste Recycling B 14

An alcove must be provided for recyclable waste streams on each floor. The provision of recycling (co-mingled, cardboard, paper and organics) waste bins, storage and collection must be included in project scope and budget.

Architect B - Design Controls Service Provision Penetrations B 15

Circulation and access paths need to consider varying degrees of traffic and be categorised into the following, with minimum widths for each:- Arterial: major access routes between buildings or from car parking or set down areas. Minimum width 1800 mm,- Main: access routes which carry less traffic than arterial routes while still being seen as important thoroughfares. Minimum width 1500 mm,- Secondary: access routes which serve only one building or a small area within a building. Minimum width 1200 mm.

Architect B - Design Controls Signage MDCS

Supplementary B 16.01

Signage must be designed to:- Monash University’s Branding, as outlined in the Monash Brand Guidelines - the Signage Palette, as outlined in the Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL) - Part 4- the Internal Signage Policy- the Internal Signage Master Palette and Guidelines (currently in development)Specific requirements and approval must be sought from the Campus Design Quality & Planning team where applicable.

Monash Brand Guidelines

Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL) - Part 4

Internal Signage Policy

Internal Signage Master Palette and Guidelines

Architect B - Design Controls Signage

Generally - Directional & Informative

B 16.02

Internal signage to give building users and visitors, clear and precise directions from point of entry in building, to point of arrival i.e. individual room/area. Ensure positioning of signs/notices are undertaken in a co-ordinated and logical manner and that the materials and do not detract from quality of finishes in the adjacent environment.

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Building & Level

Directories B 16.03

Building & Level Directories to be located in main entry and arrival points and must have interchangeable font style, size and colour. They must describe the: - Faculties/Departments - Activities - Areas/rooms etc. - Advise level/direction.

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Individual Rooms /

Areas B 16.04

Individual room signage requirements are as advised by Stakeholders/University Project manager/coordinator. The consultants need to follow University’s Branding and Signage Guidelines, but room numbering will need to be approved/agreed by the Strategic Planning and Information team as described in *Section B - Design Controls - Item B 16.13.01.

*Section B - Design Controls - Item B 16.13

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Other Directional

Signs B 16.05Directions to toilets and similar amenities will also be given either on the floor directories or separately signposted as appropriate. Use widely recognised graphics in lieu of wording for toilet applications.

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Statutory Signage

- Generally B 16.06 The display and containment of Building Occupancy Permit must not detract from the overall appearance of the adjacent environment.


Emergency Evacuation Diagrams

B 16.07.01 All new works Evacuation diagrams must be prepared to the standard outlined in AS 3745-2010 section 3.5.



B 16.07.02Evacuation diagrams identifying egress points, fire protection equipment and assembly areas must be located at access points, lobby areas and corridors as recommended by Monash OHS consultants. Assembly areas are to be elected and endorsed through consultation with Monash OHS.


7









feedback



B 16.07.03Consultants are required to provide construction floor plan drawings including all electrical, fire and security drawings that are required to produce the Evacuation diagrams.



B 16.07.04The Emergency Evacuation diagrams must be produced in A3, by BPD's Evac specialist contractor. The diagrams are to be mounted in designated locations in accordance with the signage policy guidelines.

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Safety / Hazards

Signage B 16.08

Safety Hazards Signage: - Generally clearly document and coordinate with the various occupiers of the building as required. - Identify all safety equipment and facilities in accordance with the relevant standards. - A safety notice board is required to highlight safety issues.


Laboratory Operations Certification / Accreditation Certification Notices

B 16.09Ensure positioning of signs / notices is undertaken in a coordinated and logical manner that complies with the requirements of the Accreditation Authority and the University, and do not detract from quality of the adjacent environment

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Accessibility

Signage B 16.10 All areas to be accessible to disabled users, unless directed otherwise by building entry signs.

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Plant Rooms Plant Room/

Enclosure B 16.11

Plant Rooms: - must identify room function and notify restricted access. Signage to be located on door(s), with wording in accordance with Safety Regulations. - The University should be consulted as to the final requirement of plant room signage prior to installation by the Head Contractor.

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Building Identifier B 16.12.01

For new buildings, consultants also need a Monash University Building Address / Asset Number requested via the University Project manager/coordinator. These Building names and addresses are allocated by Planning Information and Analytics and is used in Monash Accounting and Finance System (SAP), Timetables (Room Booking system for teaching), BAS (Building Automation system), BEIMS (CRM system), Remedy (IT asset allocation) and Security monitoring systems.

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Building Identifier B 16.12.02

Monash has a university-wide room/space database that maintains rooms as a unique identifier of all spaces. This room database tracks the occupying Department or Faculty, number of occupants, room use, quality and many other indicators used for maintenance, space charging, room bookings, asset locations, security etc. Therefore all room numbering has to be approved or agreed by the Planning Information and Analytics team as they maintain this database and room numbers. The room numbering Guideline describes how room numbers are determined. The consultants are requested to provide CAD/PDF proposed plan by the Project Officer at Tender stage to Planning Information Team for Room Numbering to the new spaces and inform PIA everytime a major change absorbed in the room layout.

Architect B - Design Controls Signage Building and

Room Numbering B 16.13 Room numbering must be approved by the Planning Information and Analytics team and incorporated into the drawing by construction stage.


Documentation & Drawings General B 17.01

All documentation must be provided in electronic formats. For documents other than drawings, Microsoft Word and Excel formats should be provided. Architectural drawings must also be provided in AutoCAD (DWG) format for updating of the current University CAD floor plans that are needed to maintain room database, Monash maps, lab certifications, building certifications, evacuation diagrams, way finding etc.


Documentation & Drawings

Supplier Shop Documentation & Drawings

B 17.02

All design documentation (with drawings) and for construction documentation (with drawings) must be issued to the University Project Manager/Coordinator for comment, prior to issue for Quotation or Tender or construction (respectively) in both CAD and PDF format. Any change made during construction must be issued to University Project Manager/Coordinator for information and comment.


Documentation & Drawings CAD Drawings B 17.03.01

The electronic files submitted must:- be transmitted via a file sharing system or be submitted on a CD or DVD to the Buildings and Property Division- be grouped by discipline in separate directories, i.e. architectural, mechanical, electrical, etc.- be assigned electronic file names that match the hard copy drawing names (see 17.03.02)- be in AutoCAD 2012 or earlier version.



The Monash University naming convention for CAD Drawings must be followed, containing the following fields – CL 40 01 A 1234 2 16102008 2008 Description – where the fields shown from left to right are as follows:- Campus Code (2 digit - alpha characters, eg. CL) - Building Number (2 digit - numerical characters, e.g. 40)- Floor Level (gnd or 2 digit, depending on campus, e.g. gnd or 01)- Discipline Code (up to 2 alpha, e.g. ‘A’ for architectural)- Drawing Number (4 digit, e.g. 1234)- Revision (1 digit, e.g. 2)- Date of revision (8 digit, day, month, year, e.g. 16102008)- Year of construction (4 digit, e.g. 2008)- A short description of content.


8









feedback



The Title block must include:- Original issue date, which must not be changed once the drawing has been issued- Drawing name that follows Monash University naming convention (see 17.03.02)- Drawing phase (e.g., For Construction, As Built, etc.)- Consultant/s or general contractor/s involved in the project (contractors/consultants may add their company logo as an image, but business name and address must be displayed as text).



The electronic drawing files submitted must:- be drawn to current construction drawing standards and be dimensionally accurate. Drawings marked ‘Not to scale’ are not acceptable.- be drawn in Model Space and the entities within the drawings must have colours and line types set to BYLAYER- be purged of all unnecessary data including unused layers, line types, blocks, fonts and entities- not include Xrefs and be bound unless they are e-transmitted. If drawings are e-transmitted, they should contain all the base plans needed to view the drawing elements, or they will be invalid. - have line style, line thickness or symbols, and all symbol fonts libraries included in the supplied data (if not included in the standard AutoCAD installation)- have Colour Dependent Plot Style Tables (CTB) provided with each drawing submission- have overall plans, sections and elevations drawn in actual (full) size in Model Space (1:1), so that true distance will be reported in any enquiry of any drawing item- contain only one floor plan of a building per building plan CAD drawing file (**.dwg). Multiple floor plans on one drawing file are not acceptable.- have entities in all Blocks within a CAD drawing file drawn on LAYER 0 and inserted into their discipline layer.Monash University can provide a Detailed Drawing Standard if required.



All drawings sets must utilise a consistent, relevant object-based layering system that uses plain language naming conventions, so that the type of object on each layer is clearly understood, i.e., whether a particular drawing object is part of the ceiling or floor. The number of layers used in a drawing must range between 10-20 main layers for standard construction drawings. Any drawings with more than 60 total layers will not be accepted.



As Built CAD drawing files produced from BIM models must comply with the drawing requirements above before submission. We will not accept pure export drawings that haven’t been ‘cleaned up’. All 2-D BIM-exported drawings must be flattened with accurate and ‘unbroken’ linework and closed polylines.


Documentation & Drawings BIM Files B 17.04

For projects that are developed in BIM software, a copy of the federated model (including all disciplines such as Mechanical, Hydraulic and Electrical) must be handed over as part of the documentation deliverables, in REVIT format (unless otherwise agreed). BIM documentation is a mandatory handover requirement for all large-scale new build projects.


Documentation & Drawings GIS Files B 17.05.01

Australia now uses the GDA94 datum (Geocentric Datum of Australia 1994) for latitude / longitude and the MGA94 map grid (Map Grid of Australia 1994) for UTM (Universal Transverse Mercator) coordinates. The UTM Zone 55 applies for the locations of Monash University’s campuses at Clayton, Caulfield, Parkville and Peninsula.



The use of GPS positioning and measurements of new buildings and services relative to existing buildings or other services is not acceptable since buildings and services may be removed or roads redirected in time leaving these reference dimensions irrelevant.



All constructed underground and above ground services must be mapped accurately on the Campus Site Plan CAD drawing with coordinates obtained using GPS equipment of 50mm horizontal accuracy and converted to the GDA94 coordinate system (Easting and Northing) to minimise the risk of accidental disruption of services, damage and injury in the process of maintenance and building works.



All external above-ground features must be recorded by a licensed surveyor who must follow the layer naming convention outlined in the Monash University CAD Standards (which can be provided on request).


Documentation & Drawings

CAD Drawings/GIS Files

B 17.06 Contractors/consultants must provide asset information in a spreadsheet to complement all CAD-drawn service elements.

Project Manager

B - Design Controls

Commissioning & Handover Standards B 18.01

Ensure the works are done in accordance with AIRAH DA 27 (refer to CIBSE Commissioning Codes or ASHRAE Commissioning Guideline 1-1996 for mechanical services only).

Project Manager

B - Design Controls

Commissioning & Handover

Independent Review-Commissioning Agent (IR-CA)

B 18.02Use an Independent Review-Commissioning Agent (IR-CA) for technical design review, pre-commissioning, commissioning and quality monitoring of all building services (BMS, mechanical, electrical and hydraulic).

Project Manager

B - Design Controls


BPD Handover Requirements B 18.03

All requirements outlined in the BPD Handover Requirements checklist must be included as part of the handover package for project closeout, including O&M Manuals, assets lists, As Built drawings etc. All requirements must be provided six (6) months before the end of DLP to a central location for access by all BPD departments.

BPD Handover Requirements

Project Manager

B - Design Controls


Commissioning Plan B 18.04

A commissioning plan must be produced for all building services, for review, at completion of design documentation. The design intention of each system must be outlined to inform the commissioning process of how systems are intended to function.

Project Manager

B - Design Controls

Commissioning & Handover Witness Testing B 18.05 University representatives (Projects and/or Engineering and Sustainability

Planners) must be present at witness testing for all systems.


9









feedback

Project Manager

B - Design Controls


Commissioning Results B 18.06

Final commissioning results must be approved by the representative from Services and/or Planning team prior to granting of practical completion. The commissioning results must be collated and form a section in the Operation & Maintenance Manual.



Essential Fire Safety Measures B 18.07 The essential fire safety measures, as detailed by the Occupancy Permit,

must be supplied in the Manuals.


Commissioning & Handover Induction Sessions B 18.08 The head contractor must organise supplier induction session(s) with

operators and technical staff from the University.



Defects Liability Period B 18.09

During the Defects Liability Period the contractor must have qualified and suitably equipped service staff available, to respond to defective items in the agreed response times documented.

Architect B - Design Controls Maintenance General B 19.01 All building fabric, structural and service components must be readily

accessible and must not be labour intensive to repair/maintain.

Contractor B - Design Controls Maintenance New Construction

DLP B 19.02

The responsibility for undertaking and recording of statutory and preventative maintenance during the DLP for newly constructed buildings is borne by the head building contractor. The minimum requirements for statutory and preventative maintenance are detailed in *Section B - Design Controls - Item B 19.04 and B 19.05 respectively. Annual Certification to be provided



Contractor B - Design Controls Maintenance

Building Refurbishment DLP

B 19.03

In a part building refurbishment or extension, Statutory maintenance during the DLP must be performed under the University’s existing statutory maintenance contract. The preventative maintenance activities remain the responsibility of the head building contractor. The minimum requirements for preventative maintenance are detailed in *Section B - Design Controls - Item B 19.05


Contractor B - Design Controls Maintenance Statutory

Maintenance B 19.04

The contractor is required to complete the relevant Univerversity Regulatory Compliance Monitoring System (RCMS) logs for each of the services. Failure to fill in and submit the relevant log for each of the services will render the test incomplete. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure all records are received by the RCMS. At the expense of each new building project, RCMS logs are required to be supplied and utilised for the statutory services and/or Essential Fire Safety system. The University RCMS must be utilised for the duration of the 12 month defect liability period, delivering full compliance with the University’s statutory obligations. 12 monthly statutory testing items are to be included in all defects liability periods. Copies/Certification is to be provided on completion of each test.

Contractor B - Design Controls Maintenance Preventative

Maintenance B 19.05

Preventative maintenance during the DLP must be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and industry best practice as a minimum level. Service sheets for these Preventative maintenance activities must remain on-site and a complete set of client copies of the services sheets provided and are required for final certification of the project upon successful completion of the DLP.

ArchitectC - Building Facilities

General C 01

The requirements for building facilities will be outlined in the Project Brief, with specific requirements to be set and approved by the BPD Strategic Planning and Information Team. Ensure that the design of all relevant spaces meet the conditions set by the relevant Strategic Planning and Information Coordinator, with consideration of the general requirements of any space types mentioned in Section C - Building Facilities.


General Spaces Atria and Balconies

Foyers & Common Areas

C 02.01.01

Ensure all new atria and balconies are designed to maximise benefits whilst minimising possible impacts of heat loss/gain, wind tunnel effects/draughts from prevailing winds, impersonal building scale, etc. Undertake a full risk assessment for balconies to determine if area must be controlled (secure), or uncontrolled.




C 02.01.02

Atria and balconies may be introduced as part of the design brief, by agreement, where:- They will contribute to the internal environmental quality of the building, with respect to provision of shade, natural/day lighting, passive ventilation, areas for social interaction and physical connectivity, etc.- The overall site and building footprint will support such a feature, i.e. where deep floor plates are required/proposed. - The location and design is aligned with the campus masterplan, in particular, movement networks and meeting places.- The design is in keeping with the campus character and building image / intent.- The appropriate building modelling has been undertaken by a suitably qualified consultant, and confirms acceptable thermal comfort and natural lighting levels will be achieved within the space, using passive (ideal) or mixed mode means. - The design considers its obligations with respect to OH&S requirements and does not compromise the safety of occupants or workers, including accidental and / or wilful harm or injury, in the use of the space/s provided.- The ease / cost of maintenance of glazing and other high level elements and materials are fully considered, and shown in the life cycle costing forecast.- Planters, planting species and watering systems, are agreed with the university project representative.- Complete technical details of any custom equipment is provided.




C 02.01.03 Balconies: undertake full risk assessment, determine if area must be controlled (secure), or uncontrolled.


General Spaces FoyersFoyers & Common Areas

C 02.02.01

Ensure foyer locations are aligned with the Masterplan and located adjacent to the primary pedestrian pathways. As foyers are often large, open spaces with expanses of glazing and immediate access to the outdoors, heat loss can be an issue, particularly where airlocks are insufficient or not present at all. Ensure foyers are appropriately scaled and sufficiently designed to negate the need for excessive mechanical heating and cooling. Where mechanical systems are specified, ensure air locks are designed with sufficient clearance to minimise transfer of treated air to the outdoors.


10









feedback



C 02.02.02Ensure access to foyers is DDA compliant. In addition provide a different floor surface/colour (e.g. carpet) such that it leads visitors to the reception area or customer service point, as the first point of call.



C 02.02.03 Determine pedestrian numbers at briefing stage. Ensure waiting and inquiry areas are appropriately sized.



C 02.02.04Where requested allow for display facilities to accommodate: - examples of work/research, memorabilia, models and the like, - promotional/information literature, posters etc.



C 02.02.05 Provide furniture/equipment as required e.g. seating, waste receptacles, and a chilled water dispenser.



C 02.02.06 Provide an appropriate cabinet to display required compliance data.



C 02.02.07 Avoid low clearances created by stairs and other features.


General Spaces Vestibules Vestibules C 02.03 Size to facilitate disabled access, with unobstructed wall space at entrances.


General Spaces Corridors & Circulation


C 02.04

For corridors: - Size to accommodate anticipated volumes of pedestrian movements and adjacent room functionality. - Width: use following dimensions as a minimum guide: - Arterial & Teaching - 2100 mm - Main Corridors - 1500 mm, - Secondary Corridors - 1200 mm. - Length: if greater than 100 m, to provide rest stops and seating. - Protrusions and/or objects: avoid or recess - Wheelchairs: widths and passing places comply with DDA Gradients: to be less than 1:20. - Ambulatory aids: provide to facilitate movement. Protection to surfaces: provide where damage is likely i.e. trolleys minimum clear headroom comply with BCA.


General Spaces Toilets & Amenities Toilets C 02.05.01

For toilets and amenities: - Generally: Provide appropriately sized and fitted accessible toilets to all buildings - Size: to be compliant with DDA and building occupant numbers. - Location: close to main circulation space. - Distance: to any accessible toilet must not exceed 120 m. - Gender: Individual accessible toilets to be unisex. - Accessible Shower: Provide to each toilet group within each building, (minimum one unisex compartment at ground level). - Configuration: ensure sight lines at entrances create privacy (including the siting of mirrors).



Toilets and amenities must be energy efficient, minimise water and resource consumption, incorporate natural light and ventilation where possible. Utilise energy efficient fittings and fixtures. Capitalise on opportunities to harvest rainwater for flushing.



Lighting in accordance with minimum levels of the relevant Australian Standard. High quality LED luminaires in conjunction with occupancy and acoustic sensors with local switching. Use of natural light and ventilation where possible is desirable. Avoid lighting designs/layouts that have high energy demands.


General Spaces Tea Preparation Kitchen/ Kitchenettes C 02.06

For tea preparation areas, the following conditions apply: - Site according to floor plate and minimise occupant journey times, where possible site adjacent to other wet areas e.g. amenities. - Materials to ensure moisture resistant/impervious substrates and finishes are used adjacent to wet areas. - Allow sink, benches and other equipment as required and ‘signed off’ in brief - Provide shelving at heights for a wheelchair user access. - Tea rooms for the use of 6 or more people must use a programmable Boiling Water Unit (Zip Hydroboil), programmed to shut down during unoccupied periods. - A kettle is sufficient for low-use tea rooms


General Spaces Parenting / Sick Rooms

Parenting/ Sick Rooms C 02.07

The requirements for parenting and sick rooms are set by the BPD Strategic Planning and Information team, where specific requirements and approval must be sought from.


General Spaces Lockers & Showers Toilets C 02.08

When lockers and showers are required by the project brief, provide sufficient quantity of lockers and showers to meet the needs of building occupants requiring change or bag storage facilities, in a secure location. Ensure electronic access lockers and in locations where people change clothes, provide a seat adjacent to the lockers. Unisex shower facilities off the general access corridor should be considered, with appropriate fittings in the shower recesses.


General Spaces Storage & Cleaners Rooms

Cleaners Room C 02.09

When storage and cleaner rooms are required by the project brief, provide a storeroom sized to accommodate spare furniture and audio visual aids and other housekeeping items. Provide minimum one cleaner’s room per floor min. 4m² with cleaner's sink and shelving, provide hot and cold water taps. Provide minimum one storage room per bldg min. 12m² for storage of cleaning items toilet rolls/paper towels/chemicals and equipment including shelving.


11









feedback


General Spaces Plant Rooms / Enclosures

Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.10.01

Plant rooms must provide protection for equipment from:- mechanical damage; - entry by unauthorized personnel;- weather




The plant rooms are to be located at roof top or basement level of the building, avoiding the main body of the building where possible. Also locate plant room close to most direct point of vehicular access, avoid extensive service road connections.



Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.10.03 Basement plant rooms must minimise the possibility of flooding. Provide a

pump pit, alarmed to BAS. Pit pump out directed to sewer.




The plant room layout at the design stage must provide for future expansion if required. Sizing must accommodate all mechanical, electrical and other plant. Allow sufficient space for additional equipment, for perceived functionality during the life cycle of the building.




Allow adequate space for removal and maintenance of equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Where permitted by the manufacturer's these access spaces may ‘overlap’.




Direct access from corridors to roof areas, plant rooms, tunnels etc. must be provided where possible. Where plant rooms are built on a number of levels, compliant access ladders with safety cages, must be provided. All access clearances shall permit existing and future equipment to be removed and installed.



Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.10.07 Ground Level Roller door and / or full door access must be provided.




Provision for lifting of equipment must be made in elevated plant rooms, for hatches and lifting equipment to facilitate conveyance of equipment to ground.



Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.10.09 Full concrete plinths must be provided under all floor mounted equipment.

Partial concrete pads are not permitted.




Floors must be graded to drain and provided with floor outlets not less than 80 mm diameter, and have 100 mm high coved upstands to the perimeter walls to permit washing down.



Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.10.11 Floor finishes must be sealed against spillages and flooding by approved

building methods with a seamless flooring coating system.




Plant rooms must be designed such that the noise level, when measured with all equipment operating under full load, does not exceed the current exposure standard, less 3DbA. Where this cannot be achieved the University Project manager/Coordinator must be consulted, and the performance criteria agreed in writing.




Plant room signage required to identify room function and notify restricted access. Signage must be located on door(s) with the following message: NO ENTRY Authorised Personnel Only Contact Buildings & Property Division9905 1200or in accordance with Safety Regulations and as advised by Monash Project Manager/Coordinator and Asset Planning Engineer.




The plant must have: - Floor grates (Use chrome plate on brass), - Water tap, - Double GPO’s, - The main plant room must have a 3 phase power outlet, - Light must be operated via wall switch




All Plant rooms must be fitted with visual warning equipment connected to the Emergency Warning Intercommunications System or Fire Indicator panel as appropriate.


General Spaces Service Cores Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.11.01 The useable area of service riser’s must be designed 30% oversized to

accommodate future expansion of services.


General Spaces Service Cores Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.11.02

Services access to be located at regular intervals, and at any point where regular maintenance is required. Provide minimum openings of 600 mm x 600 mm.


General Spaces Service Cores Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.11.03 Duct covers must be durable, easily cleaned and secure where required, and

easily removed for access without damage to the cover or adjacent surfaces.


General Spaces Service Cores Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.11.04

Conduits where cabling may potentially prove difficult to be pulled through, especially around bends, straight access, with large radius curves and without obstructions, must be provided.


General Spaces Service Cores Plant Room/ Enclosure C 02.11.05 New buildings must be connected to adjoining buildings by crawl culverts or

tunnels for the distribution of services


12









feedback


General Spaces Delivery Bay C 02.12

For delivery bays: - Materials: must minimise visual impact, use materials that match or are sympathetic to building. - Location: Site discreetly away from the Main Entry, and as close as possible to existing service routes, minimise construction of new service roads. - Loading dock: Where required from dock to facilitate handling of goods in a safe manner. - Security: Provide secure enclosure / measures, such that unauthorised persons may not enter.


General Spaces Rubbish Removal C 02.13

For rubbish removal: - Mandatory Requirement: Easy removal of waste is mandatory. - Location: Site away from main entry and near the service entrance. - Waste bins: Allow adequate provision for - recyclable waste, & refuse (include one of each for each floor, if no lift is provided). - University recycling and waste management requirements: must be included in all projects. - Security: all bins must be secured to prevent theft or vandalism. - Hazardous waste bins: must all be secured to prevent theft or vandalism - Drainage: from waste holding and storage areas must be discharged to sewer.


General Spaces Bicycles C 02.14.01 Ensure adequate park and change facilities exist at all buildings and configure supporting infrastructure to enable cycling ‘to the door’.


General Spaces Bicycles C 02.14.02Provide storage facilities at convenient locations ideally close to entrances and undercover to each building, based on 1 bicycle bay per 1,000 m² of floor area, and adequately designed to prevent theft.


General Spaces Bicycles C 02.14.03 Bike rails to be flat top, visible, well lit protected from the weather and meet the requirements of class 3 (secure) parking facilities of AS 2890.3.


General Spaces Bicycles C 02.14.04 Rails to be spaced a minimum 1 m apart and 1 m from any wall.


General Spaces Bicycles C 02.14.05The University Project manager/Coordinator with the Campus Design Quality & Planning team will confirm the number of security bicycle lockers required. Shower and change facilities must be considered for cyclists for all new building developments.


General Spaces Car ParkingIndoor Carparks & External Carparks

C 02.15.01Centralised car parking facilities are required over building specific solutions. Design to each campus plan noting the requirements of the relevant Town Planning overlay and campus master plan.


General Spaces Car ParkingIndoor Carparks & External Carparks

C 02.15.02 Allow sufficient visitor, loading and disabled bays, according to DDA, BCA & building occupancy


General Spaces Rainwater Run-off & Harvesting C 02.16.01

Rainwater harvesting and reuse must be considered for all projects and applied where feasible. Ensure system design allows for future upgrade and expansion. Opportunities to integrate education must be explored.


General Spaces Rainwater Run-off & Harvesting C 02.16.02

An underground water harvesting reservoir must be provided, such that it captures and distributes the maximum amount of dispersed runoff rainwater. Pre-filtering of water to ensure that storage facilities do not become fouled by organic and other matter is essential and preferred to any post-storage treatment. Requirements for post-storage treatment will be determined on a case-by-case basis and will be dependent on the end use of the water.


General Spaces Rainwater Run-off & Harvesting C 02.16.03 Provision for interconnection with other on-site storages and reticulation must

be planned for all installations.


General SpacesHard Standing - Cleaning & Maintenance

C 02.17Where required provide sufficient hard standing at base of building, such that it supports the weight of any vehicle / device required to clean, maintain, repair the building’s exterior, and gives safe access to all parts of the façade.


General Spaces Antennae, Satellite Dishes etc. C 02.18

Locate out of ‘line of sight’, when viewed from ground level. Ensure safe access via walkways for maintenance. Compliance with the relevant regulations and procedures with respect to radiation must be achieved. Approval must be sought by the Campus Design Quality & Planning team.


Workplaces Offices Offices C 03

Offices:Ceilings (suspended) preferred, module 1200 x 600mm, (refer section G schedules).Screens (partitions) - performance: specify to meet loading & noise reduction requirements. Screens (partitions) - type: solid glazed or half glazed as required.Screens (partitions) - finishes: paint approximately 20% may be contrast colour, (refer section G schedules), see also Doors.Doors (type) : Hinged or sliding, solid painted, fully or partially glazed as agreed. Paint: if a contrast colour is required, apply to the door rather than the screen/ partition.Noise reduction: must meet performance requirements lay insulation above ceiling Furniture: must be compatible with that in flexible space, and must comply with the Strategic Procurement web-site ‘How to Buy Guide’ (refer link below):http://intranet.monash.edu.au/finance/buy/index.html must be compatible with that in flexible space Flooring - finish: must be carpet tiles (refer section G schedules).


13









feedback


Shared FacilitiesMeeting & Conference Rooms

Offices C 04.01

Meeting & Conference Rooms:Use: small, medium and large meetings, seminars, audio visual presentations, video conferencing. Ownership: Size & Location are to comply with the University’s Space Management Policy.Ceilings (suspended) preferred, module 1200 x 600mm, (refer section G schedules), feature ceilings may be included.Screens (partitions) - performance: specify to meet loading & noise reduction requirements. Screens ( partitions) - type: solid, glazed or half glazed as required.Screens (partitions) - finishes: paint approximately 20% may be contrast colour, (refer section G schedules), see also Doors.Doors (type) : Hinged or sliding, solid painted, fully or partially glazed as agreed. Paint: if a contrast colour is required, apply to the door rather than the screen/ partition. Paints must be low VOC.Noise reduction: must meet performance requirements lay insulation above ceiling Furniture: must comply with the Strategic Procurement web-site ‘How to Buy Guide’ (refer link below):http://intranet.monash.edu.au/finance/buy/index.htmlFlooring - finish: must be carpet tiles (refer section G schedules).


Shared Facilities Quiet Rooms Offices C 04.02

Quiet RoomsOwnership: non-assignedUse: for persons in flexible zones providing acoustic separation to facilitate intense individual work or sensitive telephone calls.Size & Location: must comply with the University’s Space Management Policy.Ceilings (suspended) preferred, module 1200 x 600mm, (refer section G schedules), feature ceilings may be included.Screens (partitions) - performance: specify to meet loading & noise reduction requirements. Screens ( partitions) - type: solid, glazed or half glazed as required.Screens (partitions) - finishes: paint approximately 20% may be contrast colour, (refer section G schedules), see also Doors.Doors (type) : Hinged or sliding, solid painted, fully or partially glazed as agreed. Paint: if a contrast colour is required, apply to the door rather than the screen/ partition.Noise reduction: must meet performance requirements lay insulation above ceiling Flooring - finish: must be carpet tiles (refer section G schedules).Furniture: desk, task chair - note: if room size permits it may also be used for small short meetings, in which case include meeting chair(s).


Shared Facilities Break-out Spaces Kitchen/ Kitchenettes C 04.03

Break-out SpacesUse: work and social interaction, ad hoc / informal meetings, an alternative temporary workplace, and the consumption of meals and refreshments.Location: adjacent natural light, conference / meeting spaces (useful for refreshment breaks). Consider noise generated within area, and possible disturbance to nearby work zones.Finishes, materials and colours: vary and provide different environment from main workplace zones.Ceilings (suspended) preferred, module 1200 x 600mm, (refer section G schedules), feature ceilings may be included.Screens (partitions) - performance: specify to meet loading & noise reduction requirements. Screens ( partitions) - type: solid, glazed or half glazed as required.Screens (partitions) - finishes: paint approximately 20% may be contrast colour, (refer section G schedules), see also Doors.Doors (type) : Hinged or sliding, solid painted, fully or partially glazed as required. Paint: if a contrast colour is required, apply to the door rather than the screen/ partition.Noise reduction: must meet performance requirements lay insulation above ceiling Flooring - finish: to general areas must be carpet tiles (refer section G schedules). To wet areas must be resilient.


Shared Facilities Utility & Photocopy Rooms Offices C 04.04

Utility/Photocopy rooms :Use: dedicated for stationery, photocopying, stores, faxes, printers and the like.Configuration: enclose to minimise disruption to work-zones.Ceilings (suspended): must match main work-zones.Screens (partitions) – performance: must meet noise reduction & imposed load requirements.Flooring – finish: resilient or carpet tiles, subject to anticipated use.Security: provide locking as required.Ventilation: must meet Australian Standard.Equipment: as agreed (note items to be provided as part of building contract to be clearly identified at early stage of briefing).


14









feedback


Shared Facilities Filing Rooms & Spaces Offices C 04.05

Filing Rooms/Spaces:Use: generally shared and reserved for records to be accessed by team or departmental members.Location: site to inner floor areas and as close as possible to the centre of work-zones to minimise travel distances.Heavy loads: if imposed (e.g. compactus) the advice of a structural engineer must be sought. The ability of the structure to withstand the loadings may define the location of the filing / compactus unit(s).Ceilings (suspended): to match main work-zones.Screens (partitions) – performance must meet agreed performance outcomes including imposed loads.Flooring- finish: to be resilient finish or carpet tiles subject to anticipated use.In built joinery: must be avoided, if dispensation is granted, design to be modular and relocatable.Furniture: must be modular / freestanding / relocatable units for ongoing flexibility.


Shared Facilities Storage Offices C 04.06

Storage space within the University is at a premium. Stakeholders must have a clearly defined storage policy that avoids ‘hoarding’. The Architect must have a clear understanding of the storage policy, and specify the safest and most space efficient system to contain the range / variety of items to be stored.- Subject to adequate circulation space, rooms may be irregular shapes, to provide regular planning zones to remaining floor. - Ceilings to match main work-zones.- Screens (partitions) to meet agreed performance outcome (subject to imposed loads).- Flooring to be resilient finish or carpet tiles subject to anticipated use.- In built joinery must be avoided, if included design to be modular and relocatable. - Furniture to be Modular freestanding / relocatable units for ongoing flexibility.


Shared Facilities Other Spaces Offices C 04.07Reception, mail room, library, information display areas are specific to each project, and must be as briefed and agreed with the Strategic Planning & Information team.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Design Principles Labs C 05.01

Design standards for generic requirements for bench height, bench spacing and design, fume cupboards, laminar flow hoods, safety showers and eyewash fountains, basins, sinks, gas reticulation, storage (including hazardous materials and waste) and other specific requirements for particular types of science laboratory, and animal holding facilities are to be discussed with the occupants and/or key stakeholders.


Research and Laboratory Rooms

Types of Laboratory Labs C 05.02

Laboratories in Monash University must be of the following types: - Wet Labs - which utilise, test and analyse chemicals, drugs or other biological matter, - Dry Labs - which contain dry-stored materials, electronics and/or large instruments, - Clinical Labs - which involve work with infectious agents, and typically require higher levels of containment, - Teaching Labs - which require space for teaching equipment, and typically hold less instrumentation.



Energy Management Labs C 05.03.01

All opportunities to minimise energy consumption must be explored. These include but are not limited to: fume cupboard design and specification (VAV are preferred), minimisation of tempered air supply to fume hoods, HVAC design, cool and hot room location and design and lighting design consideration that must be addressed.



Energy Management Labs C 05.03.02

The placement of freezers and other heat-generating appliances and the necessary extraction of the heat produced by such appliances is a significant design consideration to be addressed.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.01 Preparation space must be 25% of the total laboratory area.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.02 Use island benches.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.03 Light fittings to be flush with ceiling.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.04 Provide a residual current device to power outlets.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.05 Reticulate power from above working areas.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.06 Ensure emergency egress is not obstructed by any equipment or dangerous

goods storage cabinets.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.07 Provide recycle bins for paper and other recyclables to all rooms.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.08

Provide emergency stop button and gas isolation valves adjacent to the laboratory exit for emergency laboratory isolations. Ensure the emergency laboratory isolation button can only be released to reinstate the power via a controlled lockout process (for example: a key is required to release the button and re-instate the power).


15









feedback



The provision of adjustable or of varied height benches to accommodate standing and seated users of all abilities and range of human dimensions should be considered and discussed with key stakeholders.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.10 Work surfaces to have equipment, shelves within the zone of reach for a

seated user.


Research and Laboratory Rooms Elements Labs C 05.04.11 Provide shelving at heights for a wheelchair user to reach a range of

equipment needed for laboratory work.



Walls, ceilings and floors to be impermeable to liquids, slip resistant and suitable for chemicals, and resistant to damage from impact and temperature variation.



Safety Stations inc Safety Showers & Emergency Eye Wash

Labs C 05.05

Safety Stations: - Site at the entrance to each main laboratory, or laboratory complex. - The safety shower and actuating mechanisms, must be positioned such that the approach is unimpeded. - Emergency eye washes are to be permanently fixed aerated type, which can be foot operated without using hands - Make provision to drain or restrain any excess water from these devices. Water pressure testing is to be carried out to ensure the discharge is in accordance with the specific requirements.



Gas Cylinder Storage Labs C 05.06

Gas Cylinder Storage: - Locate store in a loading bay or discrete area away from main entry, with one or more sides open to the atmosphere. - Ensure segregation is provided with the necessary separation of particular gases, and means of securing cylinders against falling. - Safe guard from external accidental damage and provide protection against sunlight.



Radioactive Substance Storage

Labs C 05.07.01

Design considerations must be confirmed with the University project manager/ coordinator and University OHS Representative. Any system capable of emitting ionizing radiation or radioactive materials shall not be used without the specific written permission from the University Project representative.




Labs C 05.07.02Any system capable of emitting ionizing radiation or radioactive materials shall not be used without the specific written permission from the University Project representative.




Labs C 05.07.03

External Radiation: - Radiation sources ( e.g. x-ray unit, sealed irradiation units etc. ) must be carefully positioned in relation to occupied areas. Consideration must be given to possible radiation beams or scatter through roof, floor and walls. - Suitable shielding must be used to ensure safe working conditions in adjacent locations. - Certification: by a radiation expert as to the adequacy of the design is mandatory.




Labs C 05.07.04

Contamination control must include: - Dispensing, preparation and counting areas must be separated to avoid cross contamination of equipment. - Gaseous Waste must be disposed of through fume hoods, stacks or general building ventilation. - Arrange such that any exhaust does not re-enter the emitting or nearby buildings. - Non-radioactive liquid waste disposal via the normal drainage system is permissible provided the discharge is in compliance with Trade Waste Agreements and Radiation Regulations. - Radioactive liquid waste disposal via trade waste can only be done provided Health Department approval has been granted and provided under the Health (Radiation Safety) Regulations 1994 and provided trade waste acceptance criteria has been met. This should only occur after consultation with the Universdity's Radiation Protection Officer and Sustainabulity and Compliance Officer. . - Ensure adequate numbers of sinks and supplies of running water are provided in radioisotope laboratories. - Radioactive Waste storage facilities needed, will depend on the nature and quantity of the materials handled. - Storage of highly radioactive sources require discussions with the University OHS Representative prior to nomination or inclusion in building design.


16









feedback


Research and Laboratory Rooms Trade waste Labs C 05.07.05

Laboratory effluent, chemical residues from equipment and glassware cleaning, autoclave and centrifuge drainage, should be discharged to sewer via approved trade waste treatment apparatus in compliance with the University's various Trade Waste Agreements with the relevant Water Authority.Yarra Valley Water - Clayton Campus and associated facilities.City West Water - Parkville and City locations north of the YarraSouth East Water - Caulfield, Peninsula and City locations south of the Yarra.

The Sustainability Compliance and Integration officer should be made aware of all alterations and additions to trade waste fixtures and treatment apparatus to allow for updating of the University's Trade Waste Agreements with the relevant Water Authority.


Lecture Theatre Design Principles Lecture Theatre C 06.01.01

General design to facilitate best practice learning techniques, teaching space design must address: - Configuration to provide sufficient access, circulation and clear sight-lines, - Ambience forms, colours and finishes must be aesthetically pleasing and selected to enhance the overall space, - Light colours must avoid glare to projection screens and writing boards. Note: darker colours may be preferable. Architects must select colours in consultation with the University, - Chairs to be comfortable (preferably ergonomic) and durable (fixed with tablets or flexible with tables) that facilitates note taking both written and electronic, - Tables must be modular shapes and sizes, construction and materials that are durable, mechanisms that are safe to use, and permit easy re-configuration of layouts, - Acoustics: form and materials must address acoustic performance, provide an appropriate hearing augmentation system, - Lighting must be adjustable to support note taking and presentations, and have the capacity for automated shut-off when spaces are not in use.


Lecture Theatre Design Principles Lecture Theatre C 06.01.02

Lecture theatres are also required to adhere to the following conditions: - Wall behind presentation area to be painted matt white for use for projection. - No air grilles, thermostats or other protrusions in projection wall. - Provide 100% blackout capability. - Occupancy detection sensors to be utilised in conjunction with manual switching for lighting and HVAC. - Lighting layout needs to carefully consider location of ceiling mounted data projector and mechanical services. - Aisle lights to be activated by movement sensors. - Install nosings on stairs for visually impaired. - Use only fire retardant fabrics/carpets.


Lecture Theatre Acoustics Lecture Theatre C 06.02

Acoustics: - All teaching spaces must be designed to meet the agreed noise reduction performance levels that address the transference of sounds generated both internally and externally. This must be addressed by use of overall forms and materials to floors, walls and ceilings. - Mid-band reverberation times, measured as RT60, must be set around 0.5 seconds for lecture theatres up to 150 seats; for larger theatres, slightly longer times are acceptable. - Ambient noise from mechanical systems and adjacent areas must be controlled. Where possible steady state noise levels must be limited to NR 30. Isolation: introduce effective insulation to assist with reduction in ambient noise. - Ceilings must provide resilient mounted suspended ceiling system with insulation over to isolate low frequency sound. - STC ratings for walls and doors must be planned to support the NR30. Provide double sheet insulated / cavity stud drywall construction as required. - Extend all barrier walls from slab to slab in multi-level buildings. - Mechanical systems to provide effective noise suppression to achieve an effective acoustic barrier treatment.


Lecture Theatre Access, Egress and Circulation

Lecture Theatre C 06.03

Access, Egress and Circulation: - Design to permit ease of access and safe egress. - BCA: exceed compliance for aisle widths, distance between aisles, egress, seating row spacing and disabled persons access - Circulation and adjacent waiting spaces must be of sufficient size to prevent overcrowding / crushing as occupants depart and arrive. (Maximum changeover time 2½ minutes between lectures). - Site door(s) at, or near the rear, or away from presentation areas, such that latecomers minimise disruption to presentations. - Signage, ease of access / egress, amenities and other services must consider that the general public may not be familiar with the room layout.


Lecture Theatre

Facilities for Persons with Disabling Conditions

Lecture Theatre C 06.04.01

Facilities for Persons with Disabling Conditions: - Access and circulation must comply with DDA code. - Fixed lecterns must not impede wheelchair access. - Floor level must be continuous to that at entry doors.


17









feedback


Lecture Theatre

Facilities for Persons with Disabling Conditions

Lecture Theatre C 06.04.02

Wheelchairs & Hearing Loops: - Numbers: up to 200 seats - allow space for 2 x wheelchairs, and 1 x additional space for each additional 100 seats or part thereof, - Location: must allow clear view of all presentation media, and must not be obstructed by the lectern. Site towards the centre of the front row rather than the side, unless obstructed by the presenter, - Hearing Aids: must be provided for hearing augmentation system. Signs must be provided where audio loops are active.


Lecture Theatre Support Facilities Lecture Theatre C 06.05

Support Facilities:Foyers: must provide adjacent free ‘break-out’ and waiting / ‘crush’ spaces.Toilets & washrooms: provide BCA compliant facilities for occupancy numbers.Displays: provide as agreed at briefing stage.Secure storage: must be sufficient for tables, chairs and equipment.Catering Facilities: must include kitchenette/servery as agreed at the briefing stage. Where a kitchenette/servery is not proposed, provide 15A GPO sockets for urns, bain-maries, hot-plates and the like.Existing Areas: where possible the refurbishment of existing rooms must provide the facilities described above.


Flat Floor - Flexible Teaching Design Principles Tutorial

Room C 07

The requirements for flat floor teaching will be outlined in the Project Brief, with specific requirements to be set and approved by the BPD Strategic Planning and Information Team. Ensure that the design of all revelant spaces meet the conditions set by the relevant Strategic Planning and Information Coordinator.


Control Room AV Control Room AV Control Room C 08.01.01 Provide lockable, ventilated, glass fronted rack for video recorder/player, DVD

player, amplifier, computer.


Control Room AV Control Room AV Control Room C 08.01.02 Use dark colours to avoid reflectance.


Control Room AV Control Room AV Control Room C 08.01.03 Provide closed extraction to heat sources.

Structural & Civil Engineer

D - Substructure & Superstructure

Excavation D 01All topsoil must be separated from the construction site and protected from degradation for reuse at the completion of the project. There must be no net change in the volume of topsoil on the site.



Materials and Standards D 02

All structure design and materials must meet AS/NZS1170 and other respective AS/NZS (or where not available British) Standards, the requirements of testing authorities, legislative compliance and the requirements of Natspec.



Material Use Concrete D 03.01

Reduce the quantity of resource intensive Portland cement by substituting it with industrial waste products such as fly-ash (typically in the order of 10-20%), or oversized aggregate. At least 20% of all aggregates used for structural purposes must be recycled (Class 1 RCA in accordance with HB155-2002) or slag aggregate. Total proportions as follows: - 60% for in-situ concrete - 40% for precast concrete - 30% for stressed concrete



Material Use Steel D 03.02Ensure 60-90% of all steel, by mass, in the project either has a post-consumer recycled content greater than 50% or is re-used.Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts; Materials - Credit 20 - Responsible Building Materials for guidance.

GBCA Green Star - Design & As-Built:Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle ImpactsMaterials - Credit 20 - Responsible Building Materials



General Warranty Periods D 04The following warranties on the following must be provided: - Basement waterproofing - 20 years - Other building waterproofing - 10 years - Termite treatment - 1 year



Substructure Air Leakage D 05.01Ensure roofs, walls and floors are constructed to minimise air leakage in accordance with Section J3.6 of the BCA - Construction of roofs, walls and floors.



Substructure Floor Insulation D 05.02Ensure floor systems exceed the Total R-Value specified in Table J1.6 of the BCA. Floors with an in-slab heating or cooling system must be insulated around the vertical edge of their perimeter with insulation having an R value of not less than 1.0 as per Section J1.6 of the BCA - Floors.



Substructure Floor Sealing D 05.03 Floors must be sufficiently sealed and insulated to prevent heat loss or the transfer of water and air that might contribute to occupant discomfort.



Substructure Formwork D 05.04 Formwork shall comply with the Australian Standards and the Requirements of the Building Control Act and Regulations.



Substructure Reinforcement D 05.05 Inspection of reinforcement in place must be made by the Project Architect/Structural Engineer before concrete pouring is commenced.



Substructure Concrete Workmanship D 05.06

Concrete not in accordance with this specification or otherwise determined defective must be removed from the site and replaced by the Contractor at their expense.


18









feedback



Substructure Concrete Surfaces D 05.07 Paths and paved areas generally must be ruled into 600 mm x 600 mm squares and are to be set out to match adjacent pavement as applicable.



Substructure Foundations D 05.08The area supporting new concrete must be properly prepared and protected prior to placement of concrete. Approval by the Architect must be received prior to any pour.



Floor Slab Tolerances D 06.01 Tolerances must be maximum ± 3 mm in a 3,000 mm straight edge.



Floor Slab Loading D 06.02Design for live loading to AS 1170 Part 1, with economical construction and flexibility of use taken into account. Consideration must be given to long-term use and need for penetrations both initially and during the life cycle of the building.



Floor Slab Loading Exception D 06.03

Floor loads in excess of AS 1170 Part 1 will only be supported in recognition of the following specific operational requirements: - Administration (Offices) - 5 kPa - Compactus - Minimum of 10 kPa - In locations nominated by the Project manager/coordinator, and sized at a minimum of 5% of total floor area per level - Academic, lecture rooms and laboratories - generally 3.0 kPa - Avoids unnecessary expense while maintaining flexibility of room use. - Libraries - 3.3 kPa - Subject to the consent of the Building Surveyor/Certifier, an appropriate floor loading may be designed, where the height of shelves does not exceed 2.3 m. - Plant Rooms - 7 kPa



Floor Penetrations D 07

All floor penetrations and associated service pipes (particularly in laboratory areas), are to be fully sealed with a flexible material. Any sealant used in an internal application – exposed or concealed - must meet Total Volatile Organic Compound (TVOC) Limits as outlined in Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment Quality- Credit 13 - Indoor Pollutants. All floor penetrations must include a sleeve, finished off approximately 25mm AFL. Install puddle flanges where appropriate.

GBCA Green Star - Design & As-Built:Indoor Environment Quality- Credit 13 - Indoor Pollutants



Floor Penetrations Sizing D 07.01Core aperture holes up to 200mm in diameter or penetrations up to 1200mm square must be considered at the design stage, such that they may be required to selected areas at a later date.



Floor Penetrations Water D 07.02 Allow to control water penetration between levels, and fire separation between compartments.



Floor Penetrations Fire D 07.03 Penetrations to be fire proofed in a manner which allows for flexibility.



Slabs with Bitumen Membrane Surface D 08

Fall must be provided in the surface of suspended pavement and roof slabs to ensure that the applied bituminous membrane surface retains an ‘in-built’ fall upon completion. Alternatively consider the installation of a graded screed, prior to the membrane being laid.



Slabs with Bitumen Membrane Surface Drainage D 08.01

Cove membrane to contain any seepage at junctions with walls, etc. Drainage outlet levels must be set to provide a relief point for seepage at the membrane level, as well as the normal run off at granolithic level.



Slabs with Bitumen Membrane Surface Warranty Periods D 08.02 Guarantees and warranties for the membrane must be provided, in the

Operating and Maintenance Manuals.



Floor Wastes D 09Provide floor wastes to all wet areas i.e. laboratories, toilets, plant rooms, tunnels, laundries, animal houses etc, and ensure that these are connected to sewer. Floor wastes must have removable chrome plated brass grates, and be charged with a fixture.



Floor Wastes Falls D 09.01Ensure that adequate falls to floor wastes are specified and achieved. Locate floor wastes under the basin to limit ‘roll away’ for a person using a wheelchair.



Floor Wastes Risers D 09.02 All risers must be fitted with an approved flange and be cast into the concrete floor slab.



Floor Wastes Traps D 09.03Provide deep seal (75 mm) waste traps to plant/air handling and laboratories at no less than 80 mm in diameter. Any sub-flooring membranes must be graded to the puddle flange.



Expansion Joints D 10Ensure that adequate expansion joints are specified, and provided in the structural design of brickwork, blockwork, stonework and concrete etc. Continue joints through the surface finish where necessary.


19









feedback



Expansion Joints Testing D 10.01 Test the junctions between individual buildings independently, generally a structural separation of 30mm minimum must be maintained.



Sub-base Membrane D 11All internal ground slabs must have as a minimum, a plastic sheet membrane of 300 microns turned up at the perimeter with all joints taped. Floors and walls must be fully tanked where below grade or subject to hydrostatic pressure.



Structural Grid D 12The Structural Grid must facilitate the operational functionality, both immediately and for the perceived life cycle of the building. The agreed operational functionality must determine the planning and sub-planning grid (300 mm).



Flexibility in Space Planning D 13

Load bearing elements (columns and structural walls) must, without compromising the structural integrity of the building, including operational and equipment loading requirements, be kept to a minimum to provide flexibility in space planning.



Protection to Finishes D 14Provide adequate protection to finishes on corners and exposed edges, particularly in areas susceptible to high volumes of people and damage from trolleys and the like.



Disassembly D 15Structural framing, roofing and facade cladding systems: ensure at least 50% of new works are designed for disassembly. Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts for guidance.

GBCA Green Star - Design & As-Built:Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts

Structural Engineer


Structural Steel D 16

In projects where at least 50% of the GFA is framed in structural steel, demonstrate that the building’s structural requirements and integrity have been achieved using 20% less steel (by mass) than conventional steel framing. Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts; Materials - Credit 20 - Responsible Building Materials for guidance.


Structural Engineer


Structural Steel Finish D 16.01Structural steel finish to be hot dipped galvanised (including all fixings). On erection of steelwork all damaged surfaces, identifying marks, bolts, and attachments are to be painted or treated with an applied finish. Prior to the application of a finish surfaces are to be cleaned.

Structural Engineer


Columns D 17 Where columns are exposed, treat/finish to minimize deterioration from the elements .

Structural Engineer


Upper Floors D 18 Refer to requirements relating to Floor Slabs.

Structural Engineer


Staircase D 19

Stairs must be designed with both adult and child safety in mind. Design stairs as necessary to: - meet the current Victorian Building Regulations (BCA) - meet the requirements of the Disabilities Discrimination Act (DDA) - include balustrade spacing smaller or not exceeding those required by BCA and DDA - meet the requirements of the Monash University Accessibility Aspiration Design Factors (AAD) - eliminate horizontal railings where a child might climb to a dangerous point - take into account heavy use and adopt materials, finishes and components which enable economy of maintenance - adopt a non-scratching material for handrails - eliminate open risers - locate lighting that can be reached without the need for an elevated work platform or scaffold

Monash University Accessibility Aspiration Design Factors (AAD)

Structural Engineer


Ramps D 20

Ramps must be designed as an integral element of the main building entrance, the overall façade, and the existing and finished levels of the surrounding area. Design ramps as necessary to: - meet the current Victorian Building Regulations (BCA) - meet the requirements of the Disabilities Discrimination Act (DDA) - meet the requirements of the Monash University Accessibility Aspiration Design Factors (AAD) - provide minimum (clear and unimpeded) width of 1200 mm - provide appropriate handrails and edging kerbs

Monash University Accessibility Aspiration Design Factors (AAD)

ArchitectD - Substructure & Superstructure

Roof General D 21.01

Roof design must be in accordance with:- BCA Section J1.3 Roof and Ceiling Construction- BCA Section J3.6 Construction of Roofs, Walls and Floors- SAA HB39 -1997 Installation code for metal roofing- SAA/SNZ HB114:1998 Guidelines for the design of eaves and box gutters


Roof Types D 21.02 Pitched or curved roofs must be used in preference to flat roof systems.


RoofCurrent & Future Roof Mounted Equipment

D 21.03Consider current and future installation of addional plant, solar panels, rainwater tanks, roof gardens, etc. Consolidate new or existing plant and machinery where possible.


20









feedback


Roof Access and Safety D 21.04Roof design must minimise the need for ongoing roof maintenance whilst enabling building services and external features to be safely accessed, maintained and cleaned.


Roof Materials D 21.05.01All materials must be new and their use will be appropriate for the proposed purpose and as recommended by their manufacturer. Colourbond or factory applied finish, in a light colour, must generally be used where the roof is visible from adjoining areas. Utilise locally manufactured products.


Roof Materials D 21.05.02 Roof decking must be 0.53 mm TMT Zincalume of selected profile, complete with fixing chips and associated fixings.


Roof Materials D 21.05.03Metal sheet profiles should be such that they allow fixings for solar panels to be clipped fixed. Drilled fixings that create a place for water ingress must not be used.


Roof Materials D 21.05.04 A membrane roofing system (sheet or seamless) must not be used.


Roof Chemical Reaction D 21.06 The chemical reaction of aluminium in contact with other materials, in exposed conditions must be avoided.


Roof Jointing D 21.07 Jointing of each material type will be to the manufacturer’s specification.


Roof Colour and Design D 21.08Roof to be light in colour to minimise heat gain. Design roof to enhance enhance internal spaces and assist in naturally ventilated or mixed mode systems.


Roof Warranty Periods D 21.09The following warranties must be provided: - Roofing Membranes – 20 years - Sheet metal – 15 years - Workmnaship – 7 years


Roof Rain and Storm Protection D 21.10

The design and specification of all roofing components must be capable o f withstanding a 250mm/hr IFD (Intensity Frequency Duration). This is equivalent to a 1% Annual Exceedance Probability (AEP) or a 1 in 100 year rainfall event.


Roof Skylights D 21.11

Skylights must:- be installed to the manufacturer’s specification- be protected by a guardrail or, - have galvanised wire mesh 300 x 150 spacing of 2 mm strands fixed to the roof structure in accordance with the recommended code. - have galvanized wire mesh 50 x 50 x 3.5mm strand fixed below translucent sheeting when fixed to covered walkways or similar


Roof Insulation D 21.12

Roofs must be sufficiently insulated and comply with the minimum total R value as specified in BCA Section J1.3 Roof and Ceiling Construction. Fibreglass of minimum R3.0 rating fixed so that contact is maintained with underside of roof deck. Avoid, noting health and safety issues of fibreglass insulation include cancer risk from exposure to glass fibres, formaldehyde off-gassing from the backing/resin, use of petrochemicals in resin, and environmental health aspects of production. Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment Quality- Credit 13 - Indoor Pollutants for guidance.

GBCA Green Star - Design & As-Built:Indoor Environment Quality- Credit 13 - Indoor Pollutants


Roof Plumbing D 21.13The following plumbing standards must apply:- Roof plumbing to AS/NZS 3500.3- Flashing Material to AS/NZS 2904


21









feedback


Roof Gutters Restrictions D 22.01The following restrictions apply during gutter design: - Internal gutters must not be used - Internal downpipes must not be used


Roof Gutters Materials D 22.02Box gutters and sumps must be 6 TMT Grade 304 stainless steel, with riveted and soft soldered joints. Sumps must be a minimum width 450 mm, and depth 150 mm.


Roof Gutters Sizing D 22.03 Gutters to be a minimum depth of 90mm, with a minimum of 35mm freeboard.


Roof Gutters Leaf Debris D 22.04Provide removable mesh type leaf guard across the full area of all box gutter sumps. Guards must be made from materials that are compatible with adjacent elements.


Roof Gutters Joints D 22.05 Joints must be first class quality in design and workmanship, with an inspection opening provided for cleaning.


Roof Downpipes Materials D 23.01.01 Sheet metal downpipes, must be 0.6 mm TMT Zincalume with coluorbond or factory applied finish.


Roof Downpipes Materials D 23.01.02 Concealed downpipes must be U.P.V.C. heavy duty (S.W. grade) or copper (“Class D”) as specified.


Roof Downpipes Internal Downpipes D 23.02 Encase downpipes in duct within building envelope. Downpipes not to be cast

within concrete columns.


Roof Downpipes Siphonic D 23.03 Siphonic downpipes must not be specified.


Roof Downpipes External Downpipes D 23.04

External downpipes must connect to stormwater drain by discharging over a grated pit. The pit may be of P.V.C. with an aluminium grate sized to suit downpipe min 225 x 225 square with a dished concrete apron 150 wide each side on consolidated F.C.R. fill. In garden areas the grate level is to be at least 75 mm above mulch.


Roof Access Standards and Policies D 24.01

Roof access doors and hatches including stairs access to be designed to satisfy:- Monash University Occupational Health & Safety Requirements - AS 2688


Roof Access Locking D 24.02 Doors or roof access hatches to be lockable. Keying must be to the Monash University Key Policy Monash University Key Policy


Roof Access Type D 24.03 Roof access hatches to be sliding type hatches. Access must be via stairs not ladders.


Roof Fall Prevention D 25

Provide a suitable fall protection system for all roofs and ensure conformity with the Code of Practice: Prevention of Falls - Working on Roofs.The design must address all areas of roofing including access points, plant and equipment gutter maintenance and skylights.The order of preference for fall prevention is: - Parapet - Perimeter handrail system (static or folding)

Code of Practice: Prevention of Falls - Working on Roofs


Roof Fall Prevention Restrictions D 25.01 Anchor points and static lines must not be specified.


Roof Walkways D 26Ensure design is compatible with roofing system. Provide handrails where walkway is mounted more than 600 mm above roof, and a clear width between handrails of at least 900 mm.


Roof Plant Platforms Design and Location

Plant Room/ Enclosure D 27.01 The design and location of services plant on roof areas must be agreed with

the University at an early stage.


22









feedback


Roof Plant Platforms Maintenance Access

Plant Room/ Enclosure D 27.02

‘Adequate access’ for routine servicing means the sufficient space for a plant mechanic, to access all items safely and without undue stress. Allow sufficient space such that work may be undertaken around each item of plant. Where access for an operative is required under plant a minimum gap of 600 mm must be left for cleaning of leaf and other debris.


Roof Plant Platforms Safety Plant Room/ Enclosure D 27.03

Any equipment installed in a trafficable ceiling space, or on the roof, must have: - compliant access and roof safety equipment to AS/NZS 1657, - lock permitting access only by authorised staff


Roof Plant Platforms Locking Plant Room/ Enclosure D 27.04

External access for maintenance staff to electricity sub stations, main switch rooms and mechanical services plant rooms, must be secured by the University’s external plant room lock systems, not the building’s lock system.

ArchitectE - External Fabric & Finishes

General E 01

The Project Architect must provide a performance and environmental report on the building envelope design at the Concept Design stage for approval by the University. The report must test the proposed design for buildability, cost, cleaning, maintenance, functionality, fire resistance, spread of flame and environmental performance


General Warranty Periods E 01.01

The design and specification of external fabric systems and finishes should consider the ongoing and lifecycle costs associated with their manufacture, transport, erection, maintenance, replacement, demolition, disassembly or removal, as being equally critical in the selection process as their capital costs. It is expected that the following warranty periods are provided:- Precast Concrete panels - 20 years- Other wall panelling - 20 years- Metal Panelling systems - 15 years- Facade systems and sealants - 15 years- Aluminium windows inc. glazing - 5 years- Anodizing - 10 years


External Walls Facades E 02.01.01 Supporting elements i.e. columns that protrude into internal areas must be avoided.


External Walls Facades E 02.01.02Green Star point awarded if 60-90% of the total existing facade of the building, by vertical area, is reused. Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts for guidance.

GBCA Green Star - Design & As-Built:Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts


External Walls Facades E 02.01.03 Finishes that require regular maintenance i.e. painting must be avoided. Timber species must not be specified.


External Walls Facades E 02.01.04Facades must be visually appealing, highly durable, climatically responsive, economical in the use of materials, weathertight, practical to clean and maintain a high level of sound insulation.


External Walls Facades E 02.01.05Building plant must not be visible from the exterior, when viewed from ground level. Except where visibility of such plant might serve as an environmental learning resource to all building users or the university in general.


External Walls Block Work E 02.02.01 Where applicable match blocks and bricks with existing.


External Walls Block Work E 02.02.02 Conduit courses both horizontal and vertical must be laid to conceal all wiring.


External Walls Block Work E 02.02.03Reduce the absolute quantity of Portland cement by substituting it with industrial waste products) such as fly-ash (typically in the order of 10-30%). Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Materials - Credit 19 - Life Cycle Impacts; Materials - Credit 20 - Responsible Building Materials for guidance.



External Walls Cladding and Screens E 02.03 Must exhibit excellent solar heat gain protection, glare control and thermal

performance.


Exterior Windows General Guidance E 03.01.01 Provide room depths of less than 7 m, i.e. depth from window to opposing boundary/wall.


Exterior Windows General Guidance E 03.01.02Ensure general reflectance of wall and ceiling surfaces is middle to high, i.e. generally light in colour. Dark floor coverings should also be avoided though this is less critical in instances where much of this area is to be covered by furniture.


Exterior Windows General Guidance E 03.01.03Ensure 80% of each room enables occupants to see the sky from desk height (720 mm AFFL). Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment Quality - Credit 12 - Visual Comfort for guidance.

GBCA Green Star - Design & As-Built:Indoor Environment Quality - Credit 12 - Visual Comfort


Exterior Windows Exterior Window Construction E 03.02.01 Large, highly reflective glazing must not be used. Double glazed systems

must be used. Provide occupants with visual connection to exterior.


Exterior Windows Exterior Window Construction E 03.02.02

For openable windows above ground level:- Where openable sashes are installed provide a mechanical device such that the sashes cannot be opened to allow a 125 mm to pass through between the sash and frame.- Where openable sashes are installed ensure safety rails and security measures are provided to comply with the BCA, such that a sphere no greater that 125mm can pass through between any security element.- Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment Quality - Credit 14 - Thermal Comfort for guidance.

GBCA Green Star - Design & As-Built:Indoor Environment Quality - Credit 14 - Thermal Comfort


23









feedback


Exterior Windows Sun Protection E 03.03.01 Solar protection must utilise external shading. For north facades, use significant eaves. For east and west facades, use purpose designed systems.


Exterior Windows Sun Protection E 03.03.02Solar film must be used only in locations where it cannot be vandalised or easily damaged and use only on glass for which the manufacturer will warrant performance. Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment Quality - Credit 12 - Visual Comfort for guidance.



Exterior Windows Shading (Internally) E 03.04

In selection of internal shade solutions, consider impact on exterior views of the building. Solutions to be compatible with other rooms on same level internally. Please refer *Section G - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G 07

*Section G - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G 07


Exterior Doors Exterior Door Construction E 04.01

Timber framed or timber faced doors must not be used at the principal points of entry, or at significant areas of the facade. Where used in secondary (back of house) areas, such as delivery bays or plant rooms, timber doors must be solid core, FSC certified, edged all round with KDHW, and faced with moisture resistant plywood facings. Prime all round including top and bottom edges. High Gloss Low VOC exterior quality enamel paint to facings and edges. See also *Section E - External Fabric & Finishes - Item E 04.06.01-02

*Section E - External Fabric & Finishes - Item E 04.06.01-02


Exterior Doors Exterior Door Hardware E 04.02 For main entry doors, lock type and hardware must comply with *Section R -

Security *Section R - Security


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.01 Automatic doors to be provided to all main entrances, via a proprietary

system


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.02

Ensure components are durable, self lubricating, designed for high usage, extreme weather conditions, ease of maintenance and adjustment, and can be sourced locally.



Recess into building from line of main façade, provide protection from prevailing wind pressure when opened. If required provide canopies for further protection.


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.04 Provide adequately sized air lock such that both sets of doors do not open

simultaneously.


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.05 Configurations must utilise one of the following: sliding (number of leafs to

suit), revolving, bi-fold leafs or swing/hinged doors.


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.06 Where revolving doors are selected ensure sufficient egress conditions are

also provided, to comply with BCA and Means of Escape requirements.


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.07 Opening/closing components to be sensitive to obstructions, chain operated,

capable of interfacing with fire alarm and evacuation system.


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.08 Maintain a minimum 50 openings during power failure, and capable of

detecting approaches at slower paces.


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.09 Select to minimise/reduce air currents as much as possible.


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.10 Provide access and egress by persons with disabilities in accordance with the

DDA & Codes.


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.11 Power to entry doors must be key switch operated.



Ensure spare parts are readily available and manufacturer is able to supply within performance timeframes specified in the Monash University Buildings & Property Service Contract Agreement.



Externally located operating components to be lockable and comply with the following conditions (refer to *Section R - Security for further detail):- An approved electronic lock and mounting position is required where security access control systems are installed.- The majority of Electrically operated doors are to be on MU University’s swipe card system. - In the event that an electronic key switch is required then this must be keyed up to the relevant Restricted Master key system as directed by MU Locksmiths.

*Section R - Security


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.14 For safety purposes, provide appropriately located sensors and decals


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.15 Doors must remain in an open position during normal hours when Fire

Indicator Panel (FIP) is in alarm mode.



In the case of a fire alarm signal from the Fire Indicator Panel, the power must be interfaced in a fail safe manner, such that doors are activated in an open position where applicable.


Exterior Doors Exterior Automatic Doors E 04.03.17 In the case of a power failure sufficient power must be available, such that

doors must be activated to an open position.


Exterior Doors Overhead Doors E 04.04.01 To withstand wind load pressure of 55 Pa when closed.


24









feedback


Exterior Doors Overhead Doors E 04.04.02

The opperation of overhead doors must follow: - Manual: force required to operate not to exceed 220N- Motorised: provide electric motor limits switches, manual safety stop and reversing mechanism, and overload cut-out operated by battery - powered remote controller (supplied as part of system), and also by a direct push button or key switch. - Provide a motorised system which is capable of manual operation in the event of power failure. Locate operating switch 1500 mm AFL.


Exterior Doors Overhead Doors E 04.04.03 For Sectional Overhead Doors specify proprietary systems including operating gear hardware and accessories


Exterior Doors Overhead Doors E 04.04.04

For Tilting Overhead Doors:- Door Frame: capable of withstanding load without distortion- Coating Class: Z450 or AZ150- Operation: Manual or motorised (refer generally above)- Motorised: use shock absorbing connecting arm


Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.01 Specify end clips and guides to withstand extreme wind conditions.


Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.02 Deflection to be 1/360th of the span (maximum)


Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.03Helical torsion springs to be housed in the drum and arranged to counterbalance curtain weight without exceeding the safe working stress of the spring material.


Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.04 Manual Hand Operation (high openings) by pole with ‘boat hook’ end fitting.


Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.05 Manual Chain Operation by pulling chain passing over sprocket on the drum, with reduction gears where necessary.


Exterior Doors Roller Shutters E 04.05.06 If a wicket gate is fitted to the shutter, provide a limit switch device to prevent motor operation until the wicket and frame are clear of the curtain.


Exterior Doors Glazed Doors E 04.06.01All styles to aluminium framed glazed doors must be a minimum of 110 mm, allowing a greater back set for the lock to avoid the potential OHS hazard of operators catching their knuckle on the frame reveal


Exterior Doors Glazed Doors E 04.06.02 Ensure adequate markings are included to leading edge of frameless doors for easy identification by visually impaired persons (DDA compliant)


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.01 Use air and wind locks to minimise heat gain/loss and achieve air-tightness at high-traffic building entries and exits.


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.02Identify and seal gaps. Confirm building sealing/pressure testing has been undertaken for all new builds by an independent specialist to CIBSE TM23:2000 standards. Confirm any deficiencies have been rectified.


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.03

Design and construct building envelope with a continuous air barrier to control air leakage into, or out of, the conditioned space. Trace a continuous plane of air-tightness throughout the building envelope and make flexible and seal all moving joints. Join and seal the air barrier material of each assembly in a flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent assemblies, allowing for the relative movement of these assemblies and components. Support the air barrier so as to withstand the maximum positive and negative air pressure to be placed on the building without displacement, or damage, and transfer the load to the structure.


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.04Clearly identify all air barrier components of each envelope assembly on construction documents and detail the joints, interconnections and penetrations of the air barrier components.


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.05 Clearly identify the boundary limits of the building air barriers, and of the zone or zones to be tested for building air tightness on the drawings.


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.06 The air barrier material(s) must have an air permeance not to exceed 0.02 L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178.


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.07

Seal all penetrations of the air barrier. If any unavoidable penetrations of the air barrier by electrical boxes, plumbing fixture boxes, and other assemblies are not airtight, make them airtight by sealing the assembly and the interface between the assembly and the air barrier or by extending the air barrier over the assembly. The air barrier must be durable to last the anticipated service life of the assembly. Do not install lighting fixtures with ventilation holes through the air barrier


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.08Provide a motorized damper in the closed position and connected to the fire alarm system to open on call and fail in the open position for any fixed open louvers such as at elevator shafts.


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.09Damper and provide controls to close all ventilation or make-up air intakes and exhausts, atrium smoke exhausts and intakes, etc when leakage can occur during inactive periods.


Façade Building Sealing E 05.01.10 Compartmentalize car parks under buildings by providing airtight vestibules at building access points.


25









feedback


Façade External Shading E 05.02Provide external controls to north, east and west facades. Unprotected glazing must not be provided to these orientations. Consider window film use on existing buildings only where it does not create stress which may cause cracking to glazed panels, and where reflective blinds are not practicable.


Façade Insulation E 05.03.01 Opaque facade elements (walls, ceiling and floors) should achieve an average R-values of 3 for walls and 4 for roofs.


Façade Insulation E 05.03.02 Use insulation products with low to no ozone depleting potential.


Façade Insulation E 05.03.03

Ensure insulation materials are non-hazardous, formaldehyde free and do not require special clothing or protection to install. Insulation must be inert, durable, rot and vermin proof, CFC and HCFC free, not support mould, fungal or bacteria growth. Gaskets and dry weather seals - use EPDM or silicone rubber or approved equivalent. PVC material will not be permitted.


Façade Glazing E 05.04Use double glazing in all new buildings and major refurbishments, single glazing not permitted in these developments. Double glazed low e glass with thermally broken frames to be used.

Architect F - Internal Fabric General MDCS

Supplementary F 01Section F - Internal Fabric of the MDCS must be read in conjunction with: - Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings

Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric

Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings

Architect F - Internal Fabric General Design Principles F 02.01

Generally design must consider the following:- Value for Money: Internal fabric constitutes the second highest maintenance cost of all internal elements, careful selection must address ongoing and life cycle maintenance costs.- Master Palettes: a holistic ‘Master Palette’ approach to the internal corridor, circulation spaces and amenities is being introduced to existing buildings.- The designer must seek advice from the Monash University Asset Planning Engineer - Building Fabric, or Project manager / coordinator to establish whether such a policy exists for the building being designed. - Work Quality: All materials used must meet the respective AS/NZS (or where not available British) Standards, the requirements of testing authorities, legislative compliance and the requirements of Natspec.

Architect F - Internal Fabric General Products &

Finishes F 02.02

Contractors and Suppliers must specify the following products and finishes as stated in Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric and Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings. Where a Consultant/Contractor wishes to specify products other than those specified in the Schedules, these must be submitted for review and approved in writing by the BPD Interior Design & Quality Coordinator. The Monash Project Coordinator/Project Manager, Consultant and Contractor must allow sufficient time for review/approvals, such that the agreed programme is achieved.

Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric


Architect F - Internal Fabric General Warranty Periods F 02.03

The following warranty periods must be provided:- Plaster Walls – 3 years- Wall Tiles – 5 years- Plastic coatings – 5 years- Suspended Ceilings – 5 years- Interior Timber Doors – 2 years- Interior Aluminium Doors – 5 years

Architect F - Internal Fabric General Measurements &

Set-outs F 02.04A planning sub-grid of 300 mm will be used for key components, e.g. ceiling grids, office and enclosed room dimensions, relocatable modular fitments, and systems furniture.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Walls Brick, Block,

Masonry F 03.01 A Structural Engineer must check load bearing integrity in regards to brick, block and masonry prior to removal.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Walls Wet Plaster & Dry

Lining F 03.02.01Wall finishes: must be agreed at briefing stage and may include:- Wet Plaster- Dry lining - direct stick, (fully flushed or expressed joints)- Dry lining - on furring channels, (fully flushed or expressed joints)


Lining F 03.02.02 Corner guards must be fixed to all external vertical corners.


Lining F 03.02.03 Casing beads must be fixed to all edges of hard plaster and internal render.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Walls Skirtings F 03.03

Skirtings must adhere to the following conditions:- Refurbishments: match existing- New Buildings: metal, laminate or vinyl self coloured as approved must be used. Do not use timber or MDF for clear or painted finish. - Ducted: proprietary systems approved must be used.- For vinyl type: Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F1.1

Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F1.1

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Walls Architraves F 03.04

Architraves must adhere to the following conditions:- Refurbishments: match to existing- Timber: Standard: To AS 2689, - Installation: To AS 1909- Steel: To AS 1397- Aluminium: To AS 2047- For vinyl type: Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F1.1


Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) New Buildings F 04.01 For new buildings, use and benefits must be agreed at early stage of design

brief, to ensure finished floor level is consistent throughout the building.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Exisiting Buildings F 04.02

For existing buildings, areas both now and for the future to be agreed to minimise changes to existing floor levels and maintain flexibility of use for areas where possible.


26









feedback

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Standards F 04.03 Floor to be designed to AS 4154 and classification of environment type for

computer floor, to AS 2835

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Structural Loading F 04.04 Provide system that is capable of carrying twice the uniform and concentrated

loads without failure.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Panel Material F 04.05 Ensure edges are fully enclosed to avoid particle contamination caused by

possible movement between panels.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Size F 04.06 Generally 600 mm x 600 mm, otherwise to be agreed in writing

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible)

Service Identification Labels

F 04.07 Provide self adhesive labels identifying services and their direction. Fix to visible surface of panel and below carpet (if applicable).

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Carpet Tiles F 04.08 It is not a requirement that panel and carpet tile dimensions align.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Lifting Devices F 04.09 Panel must not be lifted from side mark with label - “Lift panel vertically at

centre”

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Finishes F 04.10

Finishes must be: - Steel elements: galvanized- Coating class for sheet: At least Z1351

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Floor Heights F 04.11

Maximum floor height must be determined not only by immediate use at time of briefing, but anticipated use for life cycle of building. Minimum floor height must generally be 150 mm or for computer access floors 300 mm

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Spares F 04.12 Supply pedestals, stringers, and uncut floor panels equivalent to 2% of

installation.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Service Access

Boxes F 04.13

Service Access Boxed must adhere to the following conditions:- Lifting: must have recessed / flush, ‘non-trip’ lifting feature.- Depth: box depth must accept plug-top and cable without over stressing / bending cables, or causing cover to not sit flush with floor finish.- Compatibility: product must be compatible with access floor system. - (Refer also to Section K - Electrical)

Architect F - Internal Fabric Floors (Accessible) Manufacturer F 04.14 Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section

F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F2 Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F2

Architect F - Internal Fabric Ceilings Ceiling Type F 05.01

Generally, the Project Architect must assess whole of building refurbishment strategy to support ‘exposed’ slabs or suspended ceilings. The strategy must be agreed in writing at the outset with the Stakeholders and Monash Project Manager/Coordinator. In general areas suspended ceilings are required rather than ‘exposed’ slabs. Where an exposed structural slabs is utilised, the following conditions apply: - Finishes: must be selected to provide reflectivity and luminance levels that achieve an acceptable reduction in energy consumption.- Textured applications: directly to underside of slab are not supported- Concrete/Metal: consider reflectivity in relation to lighting system and lux levels.- Exposed services: All services are to be set out in a logical co-ordinated manner, relative to the form/shape of the area. Where exposed services such as ducts, gantries and pipes are utilised, these must be installed, such that they avoid the buildup of dust and dirt.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Ceilings

Suspended Ceilings (Plasterboard)

F 05.02

Use Plasterboard in areas where minimal access is required to services above. For access hatches/panels: - Type: use proprietary hatches, keep to minimum and minimise visual impact. Panels must have concealed hinge, no lock, be quick release and match ceiling colour.- Size: 600 mm x 60 0mm (minimum)- Additional Loads: The suspension system must be designed to carry the weight of the ceiling only. Additional loads must not to be placed upon, or carried by, the suspension system without prior references to system manufacturer.- Finishes: All ceiling painting must meet the requirements set in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1.

Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1.


Suspended Ceilings (Proprietary Tile and Grid System)

F 05.03.01

For new buildings:- Set-out: Where possible, ceiling grids must align with structural elements, and window mullions.- Height: 2700 mm AFL, (or other approved in writing by University)- Grid: 1200 x 600 mm on a proprietary exposed ‘T’ bar suspension system.- Procurement: Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G3.1

Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G3.1



F 05.03.02Generally:- Noise reduction: specify tile type to achieve agreed noise reduction.- Insulation laid above ceiling tiles either side of screens (partitions) is required where room flexibility is necessity.



F 05.03.03

Suspended Ceilings in the following areas are not required to comply with the following criteria:- Specialised Laboratories and those requiring additional ceiling heights, tiered lecture theatre, - Feature reception areas, larger conference rooms, atriums, large entry lobbies and those accommodating lifts, escalators and/or stairs, catering, sport and recreation, campus centres, retail, religious centres, - Child care, studios, performing arts, large storage rooms and workshops.



F 05.03.04

For refurbished buildings:- Generally: adopt a 1200 mm x 600 mm suspended ceiling grid, to avoid ‘creep’ and misalignment along the length of a building,- Where possible ceilings must be set-out from the centre of the floor plate, and any ‘creep’ avoided across the floor by using the structural grid as the line on which any dimensional adjustments are undertaken.


27









feedback


Suspended Ceilings (Metal Pan)

F 05.04 Do not specify metal pan ceilings.

Architect F - Internal Fabric

Internal Screens (Partitions)

Screens (Partitions) F 06.01

Internal screens (partitions) to be used to seperate offices from public areas to underside of slab, or roof to ensure appropriate acoustic separation. For general use screens (partitions) should be taken from floor to underside of suspended ceiling only. The following conditions apply:- Fire rating: All elements must comply and provide the required fire rating - Loads: check intended load of shelving and cupboards, provide suitable framing to support anticipated loadings.- Set-outs: Align to ceiling grid or ½ ceiling grid, or window mullion.- Ambulatory aids: Must be considered when setting out partitions, dimensions to include full depth of ambulatory aids to give clearance as specified or required by DDA.- Sizes: use standard widths and lengths- Construction: metal or timber studs, with plasterboard linings, solid, fully or half glazed.- Materials: Use proprietary products for boards and studs, beads etc.- Noise transference: may include additional linings or proprietary insulation to meet specified noise reduction. - Finishes: include painting, flexible sheet (usually vinyl), applied film (glazing). - Glass fins may be used when abutting to mullions, and STC or fire ratings are not required. Glass fins are not generally supported when abutting to external glazing panels in between mullions or joints. The Project Architect must show these clearly on drawings and they must be agreed. - Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F3.1




Fully Glazed Screens (Partitions)

F 06.02

Fully Glazed Screens (Partitions) must adhere to the following conditions:- Transparent, with safety markings required to promote visual and supportive communication between personnel.- Film specify partially obscured area with decorative patterns subject to approval. Solid film (total area)must not be used. - Glass panels must be equal in any one length with silicone butt joints.



1/2 Glazed Screens (Partitions)

F 06.03

1/2 Glazed Screens (Partitions) must adhere to the following conditions:- Be transparent or partially obscure as the requirement of fully glazed screens.- Feature i.e. decorative, textured or timber panels, should be restricted to areas less susceptible to damage i.e. ‘controlled’ reception, conference rooms or high profile public areas.- Do not use blinds to internal glazed screens. No treatment or film preferred



Toilet and Shower Cubicles Toilets F 06.04

For toilet and shower cubicles a proprietary system from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F3.2 must be specified. They must also adhere to the following conditions:- Panels including doors:- core: high moisture resistant particleboard to AS/NZS 1859.1- thickness : to doors, divisions, fronts and nibs 25mm- facings: 1.2mm minimum laminate sheet to AS 2924,- colour: coordinate with flooring, tiling, fitments and painting. Select colour / pattern / grain to minimise impact of graffiti. - Door Hardware: - Spring Hinges: hold open type- Catches: with indicators, and external emergency release facility, in accordance with BCA.



Internal Screens (Partitions) Operable Walls F 06.05

Operable walls must adhere to the following conditions:- Use must be carefully considered at the briefing stage and tested against anticipated utilisation to minimise ongoing costs and maintenance. Approval is required from the Interior Design & Quality Coordinator.- Proprietary system to be specified; (see the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F3.3).- Ensure panels can be moved easily without undue effort, which may cause strain or injury to operator.- OHS: ensure system has no sharp or protruding components that may cause harm or injury to operator.- Loadings: where required engage services of Structural Engineer to prepare report, and recommendations on ability of building structure to support associated works and specified system.- Noise reduction: Type test operable wall to ensure it meets specified sound transmission class (STC) rating.- Finishes: Select durable facings that may easily be repaired or replaced if damaged, coordinate to other room finishes, submit sample for review.




Protection from Damage and Radioactive Emissions

F 06.06

For protection from damage and radioactive emissions:- A proprietary system is to be specified- In circumstances such as high traffic areas or frequently changed furniture layouts provide protection where damage to finished surfaces is likely to occur.- In rooms where activities are likely to cause radioactive emissions, linings are to be installed in accordance with statutory codes and specification prepared by specialist consultant.- Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F3.4


Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Doors

Timber Door Frames and Jamb Linings

F 07.01 Timber Door Frames and Jamb Linings to current standard: AS 1909

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Doors Metal Door

Frames F 07.02 Where specified in a timber stud or partition wall they are to be fitted with loose pins to hinges.


28









feedback

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Doors Interior Door

Construction F 07.03.01 Doors within a building and on a floor should match.


Construction F 07.03.02Configure doorways such that when in the open position doors do not impede egress/access to adjacent toilets/amenities and rooms. For doorframes, door handles and skirtings, provide 30% contrast to background to assist people with vision impairment.


Construction F 07.03.03

When undertaking the refurbishment to part of an existing building or floor where door designs vary, designers should seek the advice of the University Project Manager who will advise the preferred design, to which the new doors should be matched.If existing designs are clearly ‘dated’, a new design will be introduced, (Heritage and Buildings of Special Interest excepted).Types:- Hinged (double, 1½ leafs, single leaf) to suit specified opening width,- Sliding (double or single).Where height of room requires elevated work platform to be used to undertake maintenance, ensure door opening width will enable this to occur.Provide minimum clearance in accordance with the DDA for all areas.Leafs:- In Walls (i.e. masonry) Height - 2040mm,- In Screens (Partitions) Height - full height (with expressed head frame) - 2040mm with fixed head panel finished to match (if veneer, grain to align),- Construction: solid core required, thickness 40mm, or as defined by special needs i.e. fire / acoustics).Facings:- flush MDF,- Protection: use in situations where damage may result e.g. trollies, equipment sample(s) of material to be submitted for review.Finish:- painted. All painting must meet the requirements set in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1.- veneer (high profile areas only, where not susceptible to damage),- other sample(s) of material to be submitted for review.Vision panels:- refer matching design note as above.

Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Doors Glazed Doors F 07.04

For glazed doors:- ADD Factor: Provide 30% contrast to leading edge(s). - Glazing Frames: stile width (nominal 110 mm minimum) .- To avoid the potential OHS hazard of operators catching their knuckle on the frame reveal, all stiles to framed glazed doors must be a minimum of 110 mm, allowing a greater back set for the lock.- Frame finishes: metal, steel (galvanised, painted, powder coated or anodised), aluminium (powder coated or anodised) or timber (painted or clear lacquer)- Frameless: Glazed doors must be clearly marked, with either push, pull or sliding signsNote: the leading edge of frameless leafs must bear contrast markings for visually impaired persons.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Doors Fire Doors F 07.05

For Fire Doors:- Vision Panels must be included for safety such that they do not compromise the specified Fire Resistance, and are within ‘line of sight’ of users (including those in wheelchairs).- Magnetic hold open devices must be provided with fixing points for magnetic holders in addition to normal fixings. Link to FIP to ensure release on activation of alarm.- Manual release (Smoke Doors) must be provided at switch height, with appropriate label.- Signage must be approved and installed to comply with the BCA.- Provide a certificate of compliance from the fire door manufacturer appropriate to fire resistance specified.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Doors Roller Shutters F 07.06

For Roller Shutters:- End clips and guides must be able to withstand extreme wind conditions.- Drum deflection must be 1/360th of the span (maximum).- Helical torsion springs must be housed in the drum and arranged to counterbalance curtain weight without exceeding the safe working stress of the spring material.- Direct Manual operation by handle(s) attached to bottom rail.- Manual Hand Operation (high openings) by pole with ‘boat hook’ end fitting. - Manual Chain Operation by pulling chain passing over sprocket on the drum, with reduction gears where necessary.- If a wicket gate is fitted to the shutter, a limit switch device must be provided to prevent motor operation until the wicket and frame are clear of the curtain.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware F 08

The Project Architect must prepare a complete lock and hardware schedule in consultation with the University Project Manager/Coordinator, Locksmith and Stakeholder(s) and in compliance with *Section R - Security of the MDCS

*Section R - Security

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware Lever Handles F 08.01

Where lever handles are used:- Operation: to be lever with returns and no snibs, when used in public areas.- Non-handed: select, such that the same lever can be either left or right handed.- ADD Factor - Statutory: meet the requirements of the DDA and BCA, lever handles are mandatory for single action egress purposes, i.e. accessible to persons with a physical disability- Colour coding: specify with minimum 30% contrast to background, to assist visually impaired persons to recognise door elements e.g. handles- Material: brass to a satin chrome finish. - Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F4.1



29









feedback

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware Push Plates F 08.02

Where Push Plates are used:- Material: brass to a satin chrome finish.- Signage ‘Push’ - on backplate

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware Pull Handles F 08.03

Where Pull Handles are used:- Type: use with backplate.- Material: brass to a satin chrome finish.- Signage ‘Pull’ - on backplate.

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware Door Knobs F 08.04 Do not specify door knobs

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware Miscellaneous

Door Hardware F 08.05

Miscellaneous Door Hardware:- Function without risk of injury to hand.- Hinges: ensure number and size is suited to weight of leaf, type to include ball races.- Coat hook(s): must be used to match hardware suite, and where necessary used in conjunction with door stops to prevent damage to adjacent walls, screens (partitions). Coat hook to have a rubber end or similar. - Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F4.2


Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware Closers & Stops F 08.06

Closers & Stops:- Closers: Use only where required by statutory regulations and codes and where specifically requested by Stakeholders, and approved at Planning & Sustainability document review.- Size: appropriately for extreme weather conditions, with full adjustment.- Design for high usage and ease of maintenance.- Opening force required not to exceed 19.5 N.- Automatic closers to be heavy duty with appropriate time delay on closing action for disabled persons to safely pass through.- Hydraulic closers to be surface or floor mounted where applicable.- Stops: match to hardware suite, affix to floor or walls, screen (partition) NOT to door, use always where handles or coat hooks may damage adjacent wall, screen, position on leaf such that they do not cause excessive strain to hinges - Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F4.3


Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware Locks -

Mechanical F 08.07

All locks must be keyed in accordance with the Monash University Key Policy where: - Keys for cylinders on delivery must be provided to the University Project Manager /Coordinator for final distribution.- A Lockwood construction keyed system compatible with the University master key system must be fitted during construction.- All locks must be egress escape from the inside as per Victorian Occupational Health and safety requirements. - All locks to be keyed in accordance with the Monash University approved key system only.- A letter will be issued by the University to our approved supplier authorising the Project Architect and/or Contractor to order and install the cylinders to the required specification. All key systems are to be controlled and maintained by the University.- Master keying on all projects for maintenance and services will be determined by the University. Cylinder(s) will be supplied to the contractor complete with construction keying if required. - Sourced from the specified pre-approved list from Section F: Schedules - Internal Fabric - Item F4.4


Monash University Key Policy

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware Locks - Electronic F 08.08

Electronic locks to be operated by card proximity readers, in compliance with Section R - Security of the MDCS and in collaboration with Campus Security. Refer also to the Monash University Access Control (Electronic) Policy.

Monash University Access Control (Electronic) Policy

Architect F - Internal Fabric Interior Door Hardware Door Signage F 08.09 Affix room number to match Monash standard, as described in *Section B -

Design Controls - Item B 16.01*Section B - Design Controls - Item B 16.01

ArchitectG - Internal Finishes & Fittings

General MDCS Supplementary G 01.01

Section G - Internal Finishes & Fittings of the MDCS must be read in conjunction with: - Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings



General Warranty Periods G 01.02

The following warranty periods must be provided:- Painting - 3 years- Flooring:- Tile - 15 years- Timber - 5 years- Carpet - 15 years- Polished concrete - 10 years- Vinyl - 10 years- Signage - 3 years- Fittings - 2 years- Furniture - 5 years


General Rating G 01.03All interior materials, paints, finishes, adhesives and sealants to be independently rated E0 for formaldehyde and its derivatives. Materials for laboratory areas exempt where no suitable product exists or can be acquired.


General MDF G 01.04 Confirm MDF is low VOC and rated E0 for formaldehyde and its derivatives.


General Low VOC G 01.05All interior materials, paints, finishes, adhesives and sealants to be low-VOC or zero-VOC . Materials for laboratory areas exempt where no suitable product exists or can be acquired.


Painting General G 02.01.01 All painting must meet the requirements set in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1

Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1


30









feedback


Painting General G 02.01.02 Minimise paint requirements. Use pre-finished surfaces where possible. GECA certified preferred.


Painting Design Principles G 02.02

All painting must comply with the following principles: - Water based enamel satin finish to areas subject to normal use. - Water based enamel paint gloss finish to high traffic and public areas - Preperation as follows: wash down, fill, sand, etch, prime - Hardware and signage to be removed and surface made good as necessary. Hardware and signage to be replaced, unless otherwise directed. - Paint qualities to be: grey water safe, water based unless prior approved, non-toxic, biodegradable, low VOC, environmentally acceptable, ozone friendly and free from carcinogens and phosphates


Floor Finishes Design Principles G 03.01

Select floor finish according to anticipated density of foot traffic as follows: - High: stone, concrete (polished) ceramic tile (e.g. foyers of high profile densely populated buildings, Campus Centre, Sports Centres excluding specialised activity areas) - Medium: carpet tile (e.g. lecture theatres, computer laboratories, flat floor teaching rooms and adjacent corridors); vinyl (3 mm) (laboratories, using non-corrosive chemicals or non-wet areas); applied seamless finishes (laboratories using chemicals or areas susceptible to high pressure wet cleansing) - Low: carpet tile (e.g. administration areas including work zones, meeting, utility rooms); vinyl (2 - 2.5 mm) (break-out rooms, tea preparation areas) - ADD Factor: avoid "busy" and colourful floor patterns that cross pathways – rather, use colour as a wayfinding tool to designate pathways and take people in the required direction of travel


Floor Finishes Installation Contractor G 03.02

All carpet tiles, vinyl and rubber installations must be carried out by the specified installation contractors outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.1. Allow for suitable lead times.



Floor Finishes Laying Method G 03.03Carpet tile and entry mat laying method/direction will be subject to pattern and must comply with Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.2



Floor Finishes Carpet Tile Ranges & Colours G 03.04 Carpet tiles to be selected from the specified pre-approved list in Section G:

Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.3Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.3


Floor Finishes Carpet Tiles - Contrast G 03.05

In high profile zones such as reception areas and corridors, select contrast colours or patterns not exceeding 20% of the area. Patterns/insets must be straight rather than curvilinear.


Floor Finishes Carpet Tiles - Restriction G 03.06 Broadloom carpet must not be used


Floor Finishes Entry Mats G 03.07.01

To protect internal floor finishes, the first 2-3 m (approx. 6 paces) within a building must: - Utilise a high performance, soil barrier material in accordance with Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.4 - Be provided with an in mat recesses at each entry point to the building with entry mats fixed with friction compound (as recommended by manufacturer), where changes in floor level does not exceed 3 mm.



Floor Finishes Entry Mats G 03.07.02Where entry points (air locks) are not of sufficient depth, the entry mat may be introduced into the building as a contrast feature finish to the main interior flooring.


Floor Finishes Entry Mats G 03.07.03If soil barriers are not flush to main floor finish, they must have a trip resisting feather edge, and be secured or of sufficient weight, such that they do not lift or move under normal use.


Floor Finishes Entry Mats G 03.07.04 Mat recesses for fire isolated areas must be external, and adequately drained if exposed to the elements.


Floor Finishes Accessible Floors G 03.08 Accessible floors to be design in accordance with Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.5



Floor FinishesInstallation Guidelines - Substrate

G 03.09

Installation must comply with the following conditions: - To AS/NZS 2455.1 or AS/NZS 2455.2 as appropriate - Suitably prepare the substrate to receive the flooring installation including stripping and cleaning, repairs, removal of all fixtures and fittings and ensure substrate is level - For Carpet installations: Test concrete substrate for dryness using hydrometer test method described in AS/NZS 2455.1 Appendix B. If necessary use artificial means of drying out the substrate before installation - For Resilient Finishes installations: Test concrete substrate for dryness using hydrometer test method described in AS 1884 Appendix A. If necessary use artificial means of drying out the substrate before installation - Acid etch concrete surfaces to receive epoxy coats as directed by manufacturer of finish product - Where substrate exceeds maximum permissible tolerances apply levelling compound compatible with adhesive - Do not lay carpet tiles over parquetry. Remove and set aside blocks for reuse or as spares as directed by Monash University Project Manager/Coordinator.


Floor FinishesInstallation Guidelines - Underlays

G 03.10

Installation must comply with the following conditions:- Fibre cement: thickness 5 mm minimum (for carpet tiles) To AS 2908.2 Type B, category 2 mm minimum (for vinyl and rubber)- Hardboard: Standard to AS 2458, standard hardboard Type RD, manufactured specifically as flooring underlay.


31









feedback


Floor FinishesInstallation Guidelines - Synthetic Sporting Surfaces

G 03.11Installation must comply with the following conditions:- To AS 3541.1- Fire performance: Maximum indices to AS 1530.3


Floor FinishesInstallation Guidelines - Expansion Joints

G 03.12Provide movement joints over structural joints and at junctions between different substrates. Depth of joint, sealant and preformed strips to be in accordance with manufacturer's’ instructions, and compatible with finish materials.


Floor FinishesInstallation Guidelines - Carpet Tiles

G 03.13

Installation must comply with the following conditions: - To AS/NZS 2455.2 - Fixing: fix with friction compound as recommended by manufacturer - Friction compound: Suitable for holding tiles in place without permanent sticking, allowing tiles to be relocated without damage if necessary.


Floor Finishes Vinyl (PVC) G 03.14.01Select appropriate vinyls for application, considering slip resistance rating. Detail slip resistance rating on finishes schedule or similar. Vinyl to be selected from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.6



Floor Finishes Vinyl (PVC) G 03.14.02 No vinyls are to be specified with carborundum/silicon carbide content.


Floor Finishes Vinyl (PVC) G 03.14.03

All vinyl types are required to meet the relevant Australian Standard where: - Unbacked flexible sheet: To AS 2055.1 - Semi-rigid floor tiles: To AS 1889.1 - Flexible floor tiles: To AS 1889.2 - Adhesives: To AS 3553 - Anti-static vinyl sheet: To AS 1169 - Slip Resistance: To AS 4586, BCA/NCC, HB 197:1997 and HB 197:2014 (when implemented)


Floor Finishes Vinyl (PVC) G 03.14.04 Floor finishes under wall hung urinals to be welded, low maintenance vinyl flooring.


Floor Finishes Vinyl (PVC) - Covings G 03.15.01 Provide a 32 mm pre-formed PVC fillet at all wall/floor junctions.


Floor Finishes Vinyl (PVC) - Covings G 03.15.02 Vinyl flooring to be covered over fillet, and extended to a minimum of 100mm

above floor


Floor Finishes Vinyl (PVC) - Covings G 03.15.03 Coving to floor penetrations will be a minimum 35 mm.


Floor Finishes Rubber G 03.16.01 Rubber to be selected from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.7



Floor Finishes Rubber G 03.16.02 Use of rubber floor finish must meet BS 1711 and ensure a minimum coefficient of 0.5 for slip resistance.


Floor Finishes Epoxy Base Coat G 03.17

Epoxy base coats to be used in laboratories where it is likely to receive spillage of corrosive chemicals and susceptible to excessive wet wash down cleansing treatments. Epoxy base coats to be selected from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G2.8



Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles G 03.18.01 Provide fully tiled floors in male W.C’s


Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles G 03.18.02 Glazed tiles must generally be 150 x 150 mm and exposed edges must be fully glazed.


Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles G 03.18.03 Unglazed vitrified ceramic floor tiles must be approximately 15 mm thick laid on cement mortar bed to required level and falls.


Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles G 03.18.04Acid resistant tiles must generally be 150 x 150mm x 14 mm to suit their required design purpose. They are to be grouted with a compatible acid resistant grout of equal resistance with the tiles. Tile adhesive must be to the manufacturer’s recommendation.


Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles G 03.18.05 Ceramic tiles to BS 6431 and adhesives to AS 2358 (do not use PVA based adhesives in wet areas or externally)


Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles G 03.18.06 Submit drawing or agree set-out with Project Manager/Coordinator prior to installation.


Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles - Falls & Levels G 03.19

Tiles must: - Be even and correct to floor wastes and made level at junction to walls - Have general falls at 1:100 (minimum), with showers at 1:60 (minimum) - Be non-slip in all floor applications, with minimum coefficient of 0.5 for internal use and 0.7 for external use.


Floor Finishes Ceramic Tiles - Different finishes G 03.20

Where differing finishes abut, the floor level must be adjusted to counter the difference in thickness of the two systems, and a suitable cover trim installed to protect the edges.


Floor Finishes Timber G 03.21.01Timber subject to anticipated use where the Project Architect must to specify all stakeholders and approval for use given by BPD Campus Design Quality & Planning.


32









feedback


Floor Finishes Timber G 03.21.02 Where required match parquetry to existing areas.


Ceiling Finishes Painting G 04.01All ceiling painting must meet the requirements set in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1. Colours should be selected bearing in mind required lux levels for tasks to be performed within the area, finishes should assist in the minimisation of energy consumption from light fittings

Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G1


Ceiling Finishes Stability G 04.02 Ensure material is stable, and will not generate dust or particles.


Ceiling Finishes Exposed Services G 04.03 All services are to be coloured in accordance with applicable Australian Standard.


Ceiling Finishes Fire Indices G 04.04 All materials must comply with the required fire indices for the specified areas.


Ceiling Finishes Exposed Slab G 04.05.01Where exposed slabs have been approved by BPD Campus Design Quality & Planning, finishes must be selected to provide reflectivity and luminance levels that achieve an acceptable reduction in energy consumption.


Ceiling Finishes Exposed Slab G 04.05.02 Do not apply textured applications directly to underside of slab.


Ceiling Finishes Suspended Ceilings G 04.06

Suspended ceilings must be: - 'T' bar exposed - 1200 mm x 600 mm or 600 mm x 600 mm, subject to room proportion and size - A system that is compatible with the selected tile range - Sourced from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers from Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G3.1



Ceiling Finishes Metal Pan G 04.07 Metal pan ceilings are not to be used.


Appliances G 05Selection of electrical appliance to be from the panel of 'Approved Suppliers' of the Monash University 'How to Buy Guides'. Preferrence for equipment and appliances with zero or low drawing power, i.e. <1 Watt.



Appliances Refrigeration G 05.01

Site refrigeration appliances appropriately. Locate freezers where they have direct access to low energy ventilation or cooling, away from heat sources. Allow adequate air gap at rear of refrigerators - do not be enclosed in a confined space such as a cupboard. Provide low energy cooling strategy for freezer condenser. Locate fridges away from heat sources such as stoves/ovens, hot water systems.


Fitments General G 06.01

Generally, fitments must adhere to the following conditions: - Use: fitments (joinery) are susceptible to higher than normal usage, wear and tear and must be designed accordingly. - Standardisation: fitments (joinery) units are to be modular and standardised throughout a building/floor. - Loading Safety Notice: where fitments have a weight limitation, a maximum loading label must be displayed.


Fitments Design Criteria G 06.02.01

The following design applies for fitments: - Carcase: 25 mm - Worktops: 25 mm minimum - Materials: MDF finish to be fully sealed, do not cut on site. - Finish: 1.2 mm laminate pre-laminated board preferred - Colour: white/neutral only - Doors/Drawer Fronts: contrast colour may be selected as feature; on basis that element can be easily replaced. - Hardware: Handles/Pulls: select with no sharp edges or protrusions that may cause injury. - Hinges: select type number and size to withstand weight of leaf and anticipated heavy use.


Fitments Design Criteria G 06.02.02Handles/pulls, hinges and glass display cabinets must be specified from the pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Items G4.1



Fitments Laminates G 06.03 Laminates used to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G4.2



Fitments Wall-Mounted Fitments G 06.04 To be designed to prevent personal injuries from failure of components, and

be securely fixed securely to wall/screen (partition).


Fitments Glass Display Cabinets G 06.05 Must meet all safety standards, including glass doors, tracks and locking

mechanisms. Carcase construction must be of sufficient strength.


Fitments Laboratories Labs G 06.06

For benches/tops in labs the following conditions apply: - Finishes must be selected based on use: high performance laminate (i.e.Trespa or Duropal), chemical based epoxy or water based epoxy - Frames to have a 35 x 35 mm section - Material to be stainless or mild steel powder coated - Ensure components and construction for chemical storage comply with the relevant legislation and Australian Standards


Fitments Wet Areas G 06.07For wet areas use high moisture resistant substrate, and ensure it is adequately sealed all round by finishes and to junctions with floors, walls, sanitary- ware and sinks etc.


33









feedback


Signage - Interior General

MDCS Supplementary G 07.01

Signage must be designed to:- Monash University’s Branding, as outlined in the Monash Brand Guidelines - the Internal Signage Policy- the Internal Signage Master Palette and Guidelines, currently in developmentSpecific requirements and approval must be sought from the Campus Design Quality & Planning team where applicable.


Internal Signage Policy

Internal Signage Master Palette and Guidelines



Signage Directional G 07.02

Provide requirements for the development of a signage system that displays consistent, information across each campus, and to the exterior and interior of the buildings. Refer to the Monash Brand Guidelines.




Information Signage (Non-Statutory)

G 07.03.01Provide internal signage to give building users and visitors, clear and precise directions from point of entry in building, to point of arrival i.e. individual room/area.



Information Signage (Non-Statutory)

G 07.03.02Ensure positioning of signs/ notices is undertaken in a co-ordinated and logical manner and that the materials, do not detract from the quality of finishes in the adjacent environment.



Building Directories G 07.04.01 Building directories to comply with the Monash Brand Guidelines in

configuration and materials Monash Brand Guidelines



Building Directories G 07.04.02 Location of building directories to be located at main entry/arrival point



Building Directories G 07.04.03 Building directories to include Faculties / Departments / activities / areas /

rooms etc. - advise level / direction


Signage - Interior General Level Directories G 07.05.01 Level directories to comply with the Monash Brand Guidelines in configuration

and materials Monash Brand Guidelines


Signage - Interior General Level Directories G 07.05.02 Location of level directories to be located at main arrival point / head of

staircase / escalator / lift lobby


Signage - Interior General Level Directories G 07.05.03 Level directories to include Faculties / Departments / activities / areas / rooms

etc. - indicate direction



Individual Rooms / Areas G 07.06.01

Individual room/area signage to include Faculties / Departments / activities / occupants / room numbers / names and the like - all as advised by Stakeholders / Project Manager/ Coordinator.




Individual Rooms / Areas G 07.06.02

Individual room/area signage to include Faculties / Departments / activities / occupants / room numbers / names and the like - all as advised by Stakeholders / Project Manager/ Coordinator.



Other Directional Signs G 07.07.01 Directions to toilets and similar amenities will also be given either on the floor

directories or separately signposted as appropriate.



Other Directional Signs G 07.07.02 For toilet signage in lieu of wording, use of pictograms required


Signage - Statutory (To Code Requirements) Generally G 08.01.01

The display of Containment, Building Permit Notification and Fire Evacuation Notices are to be considered in a co-ordinated manner, such that they do not detract from the overall appearance of the adjacent environment.


Signage - Statutory (To Code Requirements) Generally G 08.01.02 An allowance should be included within the project cost, or as directed by the

Monash University Project Manager/ Coordinator for statutory signage


Signage - Statutory (To Code Requirements)

Building Permit Notification G 08.02.01 Containment of Building Permits & Certificates together with an explanatory

floor plan should be displayed in the Fire Indicator Panel (FIP) cabinet.



Building Permit Notification G 08.02.02 Display cabinet: size and type to be agreed with Monash University Project

Manager / Coordinator/ Asset Engineering Planner - Electrical & Fire.



Fire Evacuation Notices G 08.03.01 All new works Evacuation diagrams must be prepared to the standard

outlined in AS 3745-2010 section 3.5.



Fire Evacuation Notices G 08.03.02

Fire Evacuation Notices to be location at each access point, lobby areas or non exit corridors as recommended by the University Project Manager / Coordinator & Asset Planning Engineer - Electrical & Fire .




Consultants are required to provide construction floor plan drawings including all electrical, fire and security drawings that are required to produce the Evacuation diagrams.




Clearly document and coordinate with the various occupants of the building as required, and in association with the MU Project Manager/ Coordinator in regards to safety/hazard signage. The Emergency Evacuation diagrams must be produced in A3, by BPD's Evac specialist contractor. The diagrams are to be mounted in designated locations in accordance with the signage policy guidelines.


34









feedback



Safety / Hazards Signage G 08.04.01

Clearly document and coordinate with the various occupants of the building as required, and in association with the MU Project Manager/ Coordinator in regards to safety/hazard signage



Safety / Hazards Signage G 08.04.02 Identify all safety equipment and facilities in accordance with the relevant

standards.



Safety / Hazards Signage G 08.04.03 A notice board is required to highlight safety issues



PC2 Laboratory Containment and other Accreditation Certification Notices

G 08.05Clearly document and coordinate with the various occupants of the building as required, and in association with the MU Project Manager in regards to PC2 Laboratory Containment and other Accreditation Certification Notices



Signage for Accessibility Users G 08.06

All areas to be accessible to disabled users, including visually and hearing impaired unless directed otherwise, via building entry signs with install to comply with DD and AS 1428.


Signage - Statutory (To Code Requirements) Plant Rooms Plant room/

Enclosure G 08.07

Plant room signage required to identify room function and notify restricted access. Signage must be located on door(s) with the following message: NO ENTRY Authorised Personnel Only Contact Buildings & Property Division9905 1200or in accordance with Safety Regulations and as advised by Monash Project Manager / Coordinator & Asset Planning Engineer.


Window Treatments G 09Window treatments to be selected bearing in mind co-ordinated, consistent and long term visual appearance, when the building is viewed from the exterior.


Window Treatments

Treatments Adjacent to Facades - Roller Blinds

G 09.01.01

Roller blinds must be specified in accordance with overall façade performance, including glazing, sun shading, and room activities. For roller blinds: - Do not specify venetian or vertical lathe blinds (if these currently exist in adjacent areas, seek advice from Project Manager/Coordinator/Interior Design & Quality Coordinator regarding matching or specification of new products), - Specify only commercial grade products; do not specify domestic grade products. - Do not specify products with plastic components/gearing - For manual operation - metal ball chains not plastic to be used. Ensure user is able to reach chains without having to stretch due to adjacent furniture/obstacles. Ensure blind clears all window mechanisms i.e. opening handles. - Fabric: Ensure only fire rated fabrics are specified, to meet AS1530.3 compliance. Consider UV backing if brownout blinds required. - Safety: Manual blind chain – install according to BCA to ensure child-proof wall or floor fixing.


Window TreatmentsTreatments Adjacent to Facades - Roller Blinds

G 09.01.02 Operable blinds to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G5.1



Window Treatments

Treatments Adjacent to Facades - Black Out Blinds

G 09.02

For blackout: - Ensure effective control of natural lighting - Roller blinds or curtains – must be within integrated light-excluding frame if total blackout required. Curtains with light-excluding linings must be specified to specialised areas only, and beyond reach of students. - Manual or remote (motorised) activation as specified - Where motorised operation is specified ensure noise generated is minimal and does not detract from presentations. - Ensure closure of black-out system does not exceed 25 seconds. - Noise reduction: use heavier weight materials where high acoustic performance is required - Refer to Green Star Design & As-Built: Indoor Environment Quality - Credit 12 - Visual Comfort for guidance.



Window TreatmentsTreatments Adjacent to Facades - Film

G 09.03For film: - To be specified in accordance with overall façade performance, including glazing, sun shading, blinds and room activities. - Ensure application does not compromise glazing warranties.


Window TreatmentsTreatment to Internal Glazed Screens (Partitions)

G 09.04Where use of partitions is required, it must be justified by a business/operational case, and approved in writing and supported by Interior Design & Quality Coordinator.


Window Treatments

Treatment to Internal Glazed Screens (Partitions) - Operable Blinds

G 09.05 Do not use blinds to internal glazed screens (partitions); glazing film or no treatment only


35









feedback


Window Treatments

Treatment to Internal Glazed Screens (Partitions) - Glazing Film

G 09.06

For glazing film: - Where use is supported, pattern, texture and colour that allows degree of visual communication is preferred to ‘solid’ film. - Graphic interpretation of Faculty’s /Division’s image/business activities is encouraged such that it reflects the desired image. - Drawings showing extent and pattern sample(s) to be submitted to Project Manager/Coordinator and Interior Design & Quality Coordinator for support from Maintenance. - Where no film is specified adequate ‘safety’ film to be applied, to signify use of clear glazed panels. - Film applied to facades and internal glazed screens (partitions) to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G5.2



Furniture General G 10.01.01Use furniture with long life and which has been sustainably sourced. Ensure material components comply with adjoining standards for timber, VOCs, etc. Utilise furniture available in Monash University Furniture Reuse Centre wherever possible. Consider the selection of GECA certified products.


Furniture General G 10.01.02Specifiers must select furniture items from the panel of 'Approved Suppliers' of the Monash University 'How to Buy Guides' for offices systems furniture and loose furniture for flat floor teaching spaces.



Furniture General G 10.01.03 The project architect /contractor/supplier must ensure suitable access route within building from delivery point to final location.


Furniture Laminates G 10.02 Laminates used to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.1



Furniture Powder Coat G 10.03 Powder coats used to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.2



Furniture Screen, Panel Fabrics & Facings G 10.04 Screen, panel fabrics and facings to be from the specified pre-approved list

outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.3Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.3


Furniture Worktops, Frames & Modesty Panels G 10.05

Generally worktops, frames and modesty panels must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.4



Furniture Returns & Rear Worktops G 10.06 Generally returns and rear worktops must adhere to the conditions outlined in

Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.5Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.5


Furniture Screens & Panels G 10.07 Generally screen and panels must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.6



Furniture Accessories G 10.08 Generally accessories must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.7



Furniture Hutches & Shelving G 10.09 Generally hutches and shelving must adhere to the conditions outlined in



Furniture Mobile Pedestals G 10.10 Generally mobile pedalstals must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.9



Furniture Mobile & Static Cabinets G 10.11 Generally mobile and static cabinets must adhere to the conditions outlined in



Furniture Cabinets G 10.12 Generally cabinets must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.11



Furniture Tables G 10.13 Generally tables must adhere to the conditions outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.12



Furniture Cabling G 10.14.01The components of the systems furniture range, when configured into workstation settings, must provide safe and tidy cable reticulation. The system must also allow ease of access for maintenance, adjustment and sufficient room for expansion in the number of cables as required.


Furniture Cabling G 10.14.02

Cabling must meet the following conditions: - Type - soft wiring is required. - Location - cabling must be sited below worktop. - Outlets (GPOs) - must be located above the worktop (outlets may be located in screens or worktop mounted power rails) and have the capacity to allow users to easily switch off when not required. - Cable route - the interface between the worktop and screen must be such that cabling may be brought onto the work surface at any point, i.e. a gap or lift up lid with ‘brush’ edge. Cable trays under a desk must have a clean finish with no sharp edges. - Quantities - to be determined by work-task and as agreed (allow to consult with Information Technology Services and OHS). Ensure available GPOs if Sit/Stand desks have been approved specifically for work areas. - Power isolation - cabling must be configured to allow power isolation on a desk-by-desk basis e.g. through a dedicated stand-by power kill switch (or Eco-switch).


Furniture Cabling G 10.14.03 Cabling used to be from the specified pre-approved list outlined in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G6.13



36









feedback


Furniture Cabling G 10.14.04Power and data fed from above / the suspended ceiling facilitated by power poles, power panels or ‘umbilicals’ must be fully compatible with the systems furniture.


Furniture Cabling G 10.14.05

Power rails may be supplied and must be fully compatible with the systems furniture range. 4 power outlets and 1 data and 1 voice must be provided as a minimum, other quantities will be determined by works tasks, and agreed in writing with the Stakeholders and Monash Project Manager/Coordinator/Interior Design & Quality Coordinator.


Chairs & Seating General G 11.01.01

Specifiers must select chair and seating items from the panel of 'Approved Suppliers' of the Monash University 'How to Buy Guides' for task and multi-purpose chairs (excluding lecture theatre seating). Selection must be made in collaboration with OHS, users and the BPD Planning Interior Design & Quality Coordinator.



Chairs & Seating General G 11.01.02

Chairs and seating must meet the following conditions: - Samples: to be available for minimum 1 week, for trial by stakeholders. - Manufacturing base: Australia - Warranty: 5 years minimum - Under-frames: subject to chair type, specify skid bases (do not use type with legs) - OHS: all chairs must meet the assessment criteria stipulated by Monash OHS.


Chairs & Seating Fabrics G 11.02.01

Fabrics for chairs and seating must be commercial upholstery grade fabrics or vinyls, selected for appearance, stain and fire resistance and durability. Tight weave fabrics are recommended, and must be recommended by the manufacturer for the intended purpose. Exemption must be sought for any use of leather. (Refer to BPD Interior Design & Quality Coordinator)


Chairs & Seating Fabrics G 11.02.02Upholstery fabrics for all chairs and seating to be selected from the specified pre-approved list of manufacturers and colours in Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G7.1



Chairs & Seating Fabrics G 11.02.03

Fabrics for chairs and seating must meet the following conditions: - Abrasion test - minimum 50,000 Martindale required - Colour Fastness to Light - ISO 105-B02 - 1994 rating - Fire Rating - To meet AS 1530.3. - Protective Treatments - Stain treatments or similar approved may be applied, ensure that the fabric and upholstery materials are compatible (foam, Dacron etc). - Seat Panels - avoid large areas of unbroken fabric, as this causes stretching and rucking. This includes long ottomans and banquette seating.


Chairs & Seating Task Chairs Offices G 11.03

Task chairs in an adminstration/office setting must meet the following conditions:- For equity and continuity a single range with back height variations must be used across each Faculty/Division- Conference, meeting and visitor chairs must follow a similar form/theme to task chairs i.e. mesh, square, oval or ‘tulip’ shaped backrests.


Chairs & Seating Reception & Waiting Chairs Offices G 11.04

Chairs in a reception/waiting setting must meet the following conditions:- Furniture in high profile areas to provide a touch of individuality that reflects the Faculty/Department’s desired image.- Furniture susceptible to damage must only be used in ‘supervised’ areas.


Chairs & Seating Lounge & Tea Room Chairs

Kitchen/ Kitchenettes G 11.05

Chairs in an a lounge, break-out or tea room setting must meet the following conditions:- Where space permits and in agreement with stakeholders, preferred seating in a mix of low (informal), dining and high stools.- Material for seating may be a mix of upholstered and ‘hard’ finishes. Fabrics to have minimum 50,000 Martindales or similar, be FR to meet AS1530.3 and be approved by the BPD Interior Design & Quality Coordinator.


Chairs & Seating Teaching - Flat Floor Chairs

Tutorial Room G 11.06

Chairs in teaching (flat floor) areas must meet the following conditions:- Subject to use, nesting/stacking or non-stacking chairs as required by stakeholders, and meeting the assessment criteria as stipulated by Monash OHS. Consider also tilt and fold seats with castors to 2x legs. - Sufficient storage area must be provided for surplus furniture- Comfort: form of chair must provide comfort for user, during maximum duration time of teaching sessions / meetings.- Safety: Where stacking chairs are specified, provide ‘dollies’ for ease of moving as supplied and recommended by manufacturer. Ensure maximum numbers, when stacked, will not cause injury when being moved by users.- Materials: may be upholstered, semi upholstered or ‘hard finish i.e. injection moulded polypropylene or laminated timber.


37









feedback


Chairs & Seating Lecture Theatre Seating

Lecture Theatre/ Auditoria

G 11.07

(Fixed) seating in lecture theatres must meet the following conditions:- Fixing: to sloping or tiered floors.- Sight Lines: in shallow raked or shallow stepped theatres, stagger seats to give unimpeded view of presenter and presentation area.- Safety: set seats such that they avoid injury to feet from seat back in front, where necessary add up-stands/fascias.- Statutory: ensure BCA compliance for clearance between rows and ease of access (where existing rooms are to be refurbished the Project Architect is to check set-out dimensions to ensure compliance, this may result in reduction of seat numbers.)- Refurbishment: this may provide cost benefits, the Project Architect is to assess condition of seats and tablets and the refurbishment strategy and agree with stakeholders.- Selection Criteria: correct posture, maximum length of lecture / presentation, cost, image and maintenance. - If required, allow for GPO location adjacent to seat.- Materials: polypropylene shell type (with or without upholstered finish) to high quality maximum comfort seat cushions and fabric upholstery.- Fabrics: patterned or darker colours to minimize visual stains with 50,000 Martindales or similar. To have suitable stain finish and be FR, to meet AS 1530.3.


Chairs & Seating Lecture Theatre Seating Tablets

Lecture Theatre/ Auditoria

G 11.08

Seating tablets in lecture theatres must meet the following conditions:- Type: fold up/down preferred, the support mechanism must be of sufficient strength and require minimum maintenance.- Size: to take A3 folder or notebook computer.- Materials: surface must have a durable anti-graffiti finish, patterned laminates deter defacing.- Edges: Metal, high impact ABS or clear finished MDF edges preferred. DO NOT use laminate, as this does not withstand chipping or wilful damage.- Handing: provide approximately 15% left handed tablets, locate at end of rows.


Miscellaneous Fittings Compactus G 12.01.01Project Architect must identify fully the stakeholder’s need for a compactus. If necessary the services of Monash Records and Archives should be used to assist in records management, such that the need for records storage is minimised.


Miscellaneous Fittings Compactus G 12.01.02

Compactus must meet the following conditions:- Floor loadings: the services of a structural engineer must be used to determine the ability of the floor to withstand the loads imposed, when the compactus is fully laden. (Note: such a report may restrict the location of the compactus on the floor.)- Safety: where it is likely that users may be injured or trapped between bays, locking devices must be specified. Additionally the rail system must be recessed, this can be achieved by ramping up the floor level and recessing the rails or cutting the floor and recessing the rails.- Security: where agreed compactus may be specified with locks or positioned in a secure (lockable room)


Miscellaneous Fittings Writing Boards G 12.02.01

Writing boards to be used include:- White marker board- Colour backed glass (extent to be agreed on site). Do not use ‘ideas’ paint.- Sash hung double white marker board.- Electronic board (giving hard copy print out).- Smart board (linking information displayed to data).


Miscellaneous Fittings Writing Boards G 12.02.02The University Project Manager/Coordinator to advise if the board(s) is to be supplied free issue or as part of the main contract. If supplied free issue the University Project Manager/Coordinator will advise whether the main contractor is to fix or attend on the specialist suppliers installer’s.


Miscellaneous FittingsWriting Boards - White Marker Board

G 12.02.03

White marker boards must meet the following conditions:- Use: generally in rooms where size allows writing to be easily read by attendees, do not use in large lecture theatres.- Pre-approved Supplier: See Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G8.1



Miscellaneous Fittings

Writing Boards - Sash Hung Double White Marker Board

G 12.02.04

Sash hung double white marker board must meet the following conditions:- Use: fixed or ‘roller boards’, do not use in large lecture theatres.- Operation: manual over motorised to reduce maintenance.- Tools: provide tools for operating boards where they are out of arm's reach.- Proportions: no wider than 4 to 1 to facilitate free-travel and avoid jamming.- Handles: ensure type minimises risk of injury to users, avoid ‘D’ pulls.- Accessibility: ensure board is able to be used while other media is also in use.


Miscellaneous Fittings Writing Boards - Electronic Boards G 12.02.05

Electronic boards must meet the following conditions:- Sizes: 77”: use in larger teaching spaces, where room capacity is approximately 50 students. Where capacity exceeds 50, options must be considered for the technology to project images onto a suitably sized screen.- Sizes 55”: use in meeting rooms and small discussion areas. May also be used in large lecture theatres, where the information can be duplicated at a suitable size via a data projector.


Miscellaneous Fittings Writing Boards - Smart Boards G 12.02.06 Smart boards must comply with conditions set by Monash eSolutions


Miscellaneous FittingsPin Boards, Display Boards, Wallboards etc.

G 12.03

Pin boards, display boards, wallboards etc. must meet the following conditions:- Project Architect to prepare schedule indicating - location, size, materials, finish, wording etc. (Note where wording required materials, colour, font etc. to follow Monash Branding requirements)- Arrangement: boards need adopt modular sizes such that they align with each other, or other features within an area. e.g. door/glazing frames.


38









feedback


Miscellaneous Fittings Displays G 12.04

Displays including examples, exhibits, memorabilia, models, specimens etc. must meet the following conditions:- Generally: Where requested the Project Architect will design cabinets or specify other suitable ready made fixtures to display those items or similar described above. - Supply & Installation: MU Project Manager / Coordinator to advise whether cabinets will be supplied as part of main contract, or free issue. If supplied free issue MU Project Manager / Coordinator to clarify whether joiner and electrician is to attend and fix.- Security: cabinets to be securely fixed and locks provided as required.- Lighting: where requested and agreed feature lighting maybe installed.


Miscellaneous Fittings Artwork G 12.05

Artwork must meet the following conditions:- Existing pieces: discuss removal with Monash University Museum of ART (MUMA), and ensure pieces are safely removed prior to the commencement of demolition / building works.- Display: Project Architect to discuss opportunities for display of artwork both hung and 3 dimensional at an early stage with the Stakeholders and MUMA. Other than external ‘public space’ works or art, pieces are generally required to be displayed in ‘supervised / controlled’ spaces.- Locations: early agreement on location is advised, illumination maybe flexible on tracks or adjustable (recessed or surface fittings).- Fixings: if pieces are likely to be changed regularly, picture rails or rods with cables are required, as this minimises damage to wall finishes. Security fixings are used as directed.


G - Internal Finishes & Fittings

Miscellaneous Fittings Sculpture G 12.06Ensure floor is capable of carrying the load of the sculpture without deflection, and that stabilisation method takes account of flooring components and in-floor services.


Miscellaneous Fittings Paintings G 12.07 Locations for paintings must be free from excessive ultraviolet light, vibration and dust with robust fixings for hanging and citation plate provided.


Miscellaneous Fittings Murals G 12.08Locations for murals must be free from excessive ultraviolet light, vibration and dust with robust fixings for hanging and citation plate provided. Also ensure the proper surface is selected, prepared and cured.


Miscellaneous Fittings Planting G 12.09

Planting must meet the following conditions:- Species: The specialist supplier must assist in their selection- Procurement and maintenance: The required method is to hire plants from a specialist supplier (see Section G: Schedules - Internal Finishes & Fittings - Item G8.2), under the terms of the agreement; species that have deteriorated are removed and replaced with healthy plants. - Personal Plants: Where plants are hired it is generally a condition that staff members do not bring their own plants into the work environment, as these can spread disease to those supplied under contract.


Architect H - Plumbing General Materials H 01.01 Must reduce the use of PVC materials. Use concrete, vitrified clay, HDPE,

zinc, cast iron, copper, galvanised steel or aluminium as alternatives.

Architect H - Plumbing General Pipes H 01.02

To maximise pumping efficiency large diameter pipes must be utilised and pipe and pump lay must be designed to minimise the pipe length and number of bends required to deliver from the point of supply.

Architect H - Plumbing General Warranty Periods H 01.03

It is expected that the following warranty periods are provided:- Sanitary fittings: vitreous china – 2 years- Sanitary fittings: stainless steel – 5 years- Tapware – 5 years- Plumbing reticulation systems – 5 years

Architect H - Plumbing

Non Potable Alternative Water H 02

Opportunities for use of non-potable "fit for purpose" water must be undertaken where practicable. In order of preference this may consist of: - Rainwater harvested from roofs via down pipes. - Harvested stormwater. - Cooling water reuse or recirculation, - Recycled water of the appropriate standard .These systems shall comply with Department of Health and EPA Vic Guidelines on alternative urban water supplies and reclaimed water: - "Rainwater use in urban communities: Guidelines for non-drinking applications in multi-residential, commercial and community facilitie" Department of Health & Human Services, May 2013. - "Guidelines for Environmental Management: Use of Reclaimed Water" EPA Vic June 2003. - "Code of Practice Onsite Wastewater Management" EPA Victoria, Publication number 891.3 February 2013. - "Australian Guidelines for Water Recycling; Managing Health & Environmental Risks (PHASE 2) Stormwater harvesting and reuse" Environment Protection and Heritage Council July 2009.


Non Potable Alternative Water Toilet Flushing Toilets H 02.01

Options for toilet flushing via the use of harvested or recycled water should be investigated for all projects. Header tank and flushometer systems are ideal for this approach, minimising the requirement for additional pipe work.


Non Potable Alternative Water Metering H 02.03 All water harvesting and reuse systems must be remotely monitored and

metered, preferably by central building automation system.

Architect H - Plumbing Access General H 03.01.01

All pipes whether sewer, water, flusher or services for the Mechanical Services subcontractor must be positioned to allow access by tradesmen particularly when in service risers / ducts. In no instances must any of these pipes be concealed behind other pipes.

YES


Positions of pipes relative to pipes of other services and installation must be co-ordinated by the Contractor in consultation with the respective trades concerned and to the approval of the Architect.


Where adequate access cannot be provided from existing access hatches/panels, supply and install new galvanized M.S. 300 x 300 mm (minimum) door and pressed metal frame, budget lock and metal tongue. Location to be approved by Architect.


39









feedback

Architect H - Plumbing Concealment Services H 04.01

Layouts have been designed on the principle that piping will be concealed within ducts, false ceiling, plant rooms, and similar services spaces. Services must not impose restrictions to air streams.

Architect H - Plumbing Concealment Non-Concealment H 04.02

Where concealment of piping, traps, etc. is not possible, it must be brought to the attention of the Architect. If the Architect approves non-concealment in certain situations, the piping and fittings must be chromium plated, supported on CP Pillar clips, and fitted with CP wall plates to cover entry points in walls, floors or ceilings.


Labelling & Identification Standards H 05.01 All systems and services must comply with Australian Standards, Rules of the

Identification of Piping, Conduits and Ducts.


Labelling & Identification Pipes and Valves H 05.02

Pipes in ducts and other concealed accessible spaces must be banded and labelled as required. Valves must be identified for service and area controlled. Where valves are controlling heating or cooling water the valve maximum flow rate must be clearly stated on the valve, as built diagrams and BAS graphics. Tags must be engraved copper round plate.

Architect H - Plumbing Water Service Metering H 06.01.01 Water meters must have pulse heads to allow connection to network.

Architect H - Plumbing Water Service Metering H 06.01.02 Metering must be capable of measuring consumption and must be a High-

level RS-485 meter.

Architect H - Plumbing Water Service Metering H 06.01.03 All meters must be connected to the campus Building Automation System

(BAS) and update the graphics accordingly.

Architect H - Plumbing Water Service Tenancy Metering H 06.02

Metering must be provided at each building and to tenancies within the building. Tenancy metering has to be pattern-certified with the National Measurement Institute.

Architect H - Plumbing Retail Food Tenancies Water Cooling Tenancy H 07

Once-through cooling systems for retail food tenancies are to be avoided. Where an ongoing water source is required, provide water reticulation and recycling systems to minimise potable water consumption. Replace traditional wok stoves with waterless wok stoves.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Plumbing H 08.01.01 Ensure selected plumbing fittings and fixtures are easy to maintain.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Plumbing H 08.01.02 Install flow restrictors and aerators on existing taps (less than 5L/min) and

showers (less than 9L/min ).

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Dual-Flush Toilets Toilets H 08.02

Use dual flush toilets with 4.5/3.0 L cistern similar to the Leda 2000 Smart flush toilet pan with Invisi cistern. Ensure pans and cisterns are matched to provide maximum water efficiency (WELS 4-star or greater.). No concealed serviceable fixings. Pan "P" trap connection must match existing conditions and alignment.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Water-Saving

Urinals Toilets H 08.03.01

Waterless urinals are not to be installed, WELS -5 star or greater low flow urinal systems are to be installed with manual flush or smart demand operation with actiivation sensitivity field at the front of the urininal. Engage with the Cleaning Services Manager to ensure effective functioning of these systems. Provide cold water taps and floor wastes for cleaning purpose to be installed in proximity to waterless urinals. Fibreglass or plastic urinals must not be used.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Water-Saving

Urinals Toilets H 08.03.02 Low flow urinal systems implementing (mains powered) sensors and timers and low-flush cisterns or flushometers can be implemented.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Wash Basins Toilets H 08.04.01

Cold Water only plumbing is appropriate for the vast majority of hand washing facilities providing significant energy savings. Provide Isolation valve to each fixture/service. Exceptions to this general rule may be required for workplace (as opposed to public) toilets where warm water hand washing may be a requirement.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Wash Basins Toilets H 08.04.02 Push-to-actuate, spring-return types including flow restriction must be used.

Recommend RBA taps be used for this application.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Wash Basins Toilets H 08.04.03 Program sensor taps (if fitted) to switch off within 6 seconds.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Cleaners Sinks H 08.05

Cleaners sinks must be white vitreous china complete with bucket grate and hot and cold water taps. Provide Isolation valve to each fixture/service. Engage with the Cleaning Services Manager to ensure effective functioning of these systems.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Drinking Fountains H 08.06 All drinking fountains to be selected from the prescribed list in the Monash

University Design and Development Controls – Landscape (Part 5).Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL)

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Showers Toilets H 08.07 Use only low flow shower heads of WELS three star or greater.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Hand Dryers Toilets H 08.08.01

In low-use toilets, the default standard is recyclable paper towels in conjunction with a recycling program. In high-use public toilets, two or more high-velocity hand dryers with on/off sensors are appropriate. Hand dryers without electric heating elements are the option e.g. Dyson Airblade, Davidson Washroom Machflow or equal.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Fixtures Hand Dryers Toilets H 08.08.02 Assessment must be made of the noise isolation requirements as they affect

surrounding areas.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Cast Iron Pipe H 09.01.01 Cast Iron Non-Pressure Pipes and Pipe Fittings, must have approved joints

and be coated inside and outside with approved composition.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Cast Iron Pipe H 09.01.01 Provide all pipes, bends, junctions, I.O.’s, stoppers, gratings, traps, etc., as

specified and as required to complete the installation.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Copper and Brass

Pipe H 09.02.01 Pipe must be of the type required by the controlling Authorities under the conditions of use.


Pipe H 09.02.02Fittings must be either capillary sleeve type fabricated from seamless brass or copper tube or cast brass. Where required, pipe must be marked to indicate inspection and approval by the controlling Authority.


40









feedback


Pipe H 09.02.03

All copper tube must be of the tube types when used in the following locations:Type “A” Tube:- As directed.Type “B” Tube:- Gas services.- Refer Current Gas Installation Code AG601.- Cold water services- Hot water service- Flusher service- Compressed air- Vacuum service- Steam supply

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Insulation H 09.03

Provide appropriate insulation for the particular service. Insulation must cover the entire exposed areas, including bends and valves. Pipe insulation wall thickness must be maintained and must not be crimped at hanging points.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Floor Grates H 09.04 For floor grates use chrome plate on brass and vinyl clamp type in wet areas.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Traps H 09.05

For traps:- to basins, must be loose ring “P” type. - to laboratory fittings, must be P.V.C. “P” traps, unless noted otherwise.- to sanitary fixtures exposed to view and not in cupboards, ducts, etc., must be chrome plated on brass.- All grease traps must be located outside building and have good access to service it.- All neutralisation, settling, straining and separator pits must be installed with readily available access for pit maintenance and pH probe cleaning and calibration.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Inspection

Openings H 09.06

Inspection openings must adhere to the following conditions:- Must be provided as necessary in all soil, waste and vent pipes and located where directed all in accordance with the regulations.- Must be easily accessible.- All neutralisation, settling, straining and separator pits must have a disconnector gully or sampling point downstream of the treatment pit to ensure free and easy access for trade waste sampling and discharge flow rate determination.- Concealed flushometers must have 300 x 300 S.S. panel screw fixed to wall.- Each concealed stop valve or waste and sewer I.O. must have a 300 x 300 mm standard “Trafalgar” access door and frame primed and fitted to allow easy access.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Trade Waste

Treatment H 09.07.01

Trade Waste Treatment must include the following:- Treatment of trade-waste is to ensure compliance with trade waste acceptance criteria and if relevant Gene Technology Regulator and Biosecurity requirements.- Automatic dosing treatment systems are to be connected to Campus BAS.- Notification and consultation with the Sustainability Compliance & Integration Officer (SCIO) regarding changes to existing treatment apparatus or the installation of new trade waste treatment apparatus is essential to:(a) allow for utilisation of existing trade waste treatment systems;(b) update existing site-wide Trade Waste Agreements or (c) apply for new trade waste consents or agreements.



As a rule trade waste neutralisation pits are to include pH probes on the inlet and outlet sides of the pit and controllers to ensure automatic acid and alkali dosing systems or disinfection/ sterilisation systems result in a trade waste discharge that is between pH 6-10. The neutralisation pit should be adequately sized to allow for adequate retention and mixing time for the dose chemicals. Aearation may be utilised when sedimentation is not required by the relevant Water Authority. Note: Under bench marble chip pits do not generally provide adequate pH control, settling or retention time to ensure trade waste compliance and should not to be the sole treatment process for wet, clinical or teaching labs and may only be used: (i) in conjunction with other downstream trade waste treatment apparatus or (ii) very specific instances with the agreement of the SCIO.



Appropriately sized oil and grease interceptors are to be installed for food preparation and food service tenants as per the relevant Water Authority Requirements. Appropriately sized settling/sediment or silt pits are to be utilsed to provide primary treatment of wastes with high suspended insoluble solids contents such as from bin washes or studios as per the relevant Water Authority Requirements.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Pipes H 09.08

For pipes:- In locations where noise may be transmitted to adjoining habitable spaces, use an approved sound insulating material over PVC pipe, or cast iron pipe. Pipe insulation wall thickness must be maintained and must not be crimped at hanging points.- Exposed pipe work and fittings in public areas must be chrome plated.- Locate tundishes so that condensation does not cause damage.- Copper Joints must be silver soldered.- All pipes must be labelled and have flow direction decals.- Hot water supply pipes must have high-performance pipe insulation including joints, elbows and valves.- Metal cladding around serviceable items must include quick release fixings. Screws are not acceptable.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Reticulation H 09.09 Reticulation systems to enable separate metering of individual floors and

areas.


41









feedback

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Valves H 09.10

Valves must meet the following conditions: - Must be Johns full bore gate valves with screwed ends with non-rising spindle or equal approved. Unless particularly required by the Controlling Authority, - All valves spindles must be zinc free. Valves with o’ rings must not be used. - All valves must be in accessible locations for operation and maintenance to approval of Architect and identified as before. - Location of stop valves as nominated by Architect must not be varied. - Each service i.e. n/gas, c/air, vac steam etc. must be fitted with a control valve adjacent to each fitting or small group of fittings suitable for the service served. - Balance valves must be globe type valves. - All valves must be located in service ducts or special pits with easy access. - Valves must be tagged to identify area served and maximum flow rate (L/S). Tags must be cooper round plate.

Architect H - Plumbing Sanitary Plumbing Backflow

Prevention Valves H 09.11

For Backflow Prevention Valves:- All water system must include backflow prevention devices.- Backflow prevention valves must be installed in locations with easy access for servicing and testing. - Tyco is preferable suppliers of backflow prevention valves. - Valves must be tagged to identify area served and maximum flow rate (L/S). Tags must be engraved copper round plate.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Plantrooms Design Principles Plant room/

Enclosure H 10.01.01 Plant rooms must be functionally integrated into the building design.

Mechanical Engineer


Enclosure H 10.01.02Plant rooms must provide protection for equipment from:- mechanical damage; - entry by unauthorized personnel;- weather.

Mechanical Engineer


Enclosure H 10.01.03The plant room layout at the design stage must provide for future expansion if required. Sizing must accommodate all mechanical, electrical and other plant. Allow sufficient space for additional equipment, for perceived functionality during the life cycle of the building.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Plantrooms Design Criteria Plant room/

Enclosure H 10.02.01

The plant must have: - Floor grates (Use chrome plate on brass), - Water tap, - Double GPO’s, - The main plant room must have a 3 phase power outlet, - Light must be operated via wall switch

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Plantrooms Design Criteria Plant room/

Enclosure H 10.02.02 Basement plant rooms must minimise the possibility of flooding. Provide a pump pit, alarmed to BAS. Pit pump out directed to sewer.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Plantrooms Access Plant room/

Enclosure H 10.03.01Allow adequate space for removal and maintenance of equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Where permitted by the manufacturer's these access spaces may ‘overlap’.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Plantrooms Access Plant room/

Enclosure H 10.03.02Direct access from corridors to roof areas, plant rooms, tunnels etc. must be provided where possible. Where plant rooms are built on a number of levels, compliant access ladders with safety cages, must be provided.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Plantrooms Ground Level Plant room/

Enclosure H 10.04 Roller door and/or full door access must be provided to ground level plant rooms.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Plantrooms Location Plant room/

Enclosure H 10.05The plant rooms are to be located at roof top or basement level of the building, avoiding the main body of the building where possible. Also locate plant room close to most direct point of vehicular access, avoid extensive service road connections.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Domestic Water Supply Backflow

Prevention H 11.01 Water systems must be designed to include backflow prevention devices.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Domestic Water Supply Booster Pump H 11.02

If required, dual cold water pumps must be provided. One pump must be capable of providing the flow and pressures required. The second pump must be used as standby.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Domestic Water Supply Filtration H 11.03.01

Ensure water quality is assessed to determine need for filtration. Where filtration is installed, ensure the need for service/replacement is flagged but does not prevent operation of equipment unless continued operation would result in danger to users or plant.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Domestic Water Supply Filtration H 11.03.02

Provide an appropriate water collection device in locations where water spillage during change of filter may cause damage to fitments and or floor coverings.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Heating Water Supply Hot Water Service H 11.04.01

If solar hot water is not viable, the use of gas systems may be considered. Electric systems only to be considered where no gas is available and the supply of gas to the site is not viable. Heat pump technology must be approved by the BPD Engineering and Sustainability Team.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Heating Water Supply Hot Water Service H 11.04.02 Instantaneous hot water units are to be used in preference to storage

systems where solar thermal systems are not used.

Mechanical Engineer


Hot water must be provided to the following points:- All showers,- Kitchenette and tea preparation station sinks. An additional outlet must be provided for a dishwasher viz.20 mm diameter copper, 200 litres/hour if required. These facilities must have their own hot water system which must not be less than 315 litre capacity where high turnover dishwashing facilities are required.- Laboratory Glass Washers. This service shall terminate at an appropriately sized ball valve.

Mechanical Engineer


Boiling water units (BWU) must only be used in kitchenettes serving a significant number of users (greater than 12). BWUs must be programmed to enter standby, sleep or off modes outside building operating hours to reduce energy wastage (Zip Hydroboil).


42









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Heating Water Supply Hot Water Pumps H 11.05.01

Hot Water Pipe:- Hot water pipes 15 and 20 N.B. must be lagged with Kemlag used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. Larger sizes must be lagged with “Armaflex” or equal fitted. Joints, elbows and valves must also be insulated.- Steam supply must be lagged with 25mm rockwool with calico sheath for internal situations and zincalume sheath fully weather protected externally all to the manufacturer’s recommendations and to the proprietor’s satisfaction.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Heating Water Supply Hot Water Pumps H 11.05.02

The hot water pumps - Must be installed in the return water loop.- Grundfoss is the recommended pump manufacturer for a hot water pumps.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Gas Service General Labs H 12

The gas supply to each laboratory shall consist of two separate services:- Fume cupboards must be supplied from the main supply and each fume cupboard hall be fitted with a 15 ∅ solenoid valve (A.G.A. approved) (24V D.C. active open) to be connected to the BAS,- The general gas service from the main supply to the other laboratory fittings must be controlled by an appropriate sized solenoid valve (240V) for connection by the Electrician to the emergency stop at the exit doors.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Gas Service Metering H 12.01.01 Facilities which use gas for purposes other than heating, must have an

individual gas meter.Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Gas Service Metering H 12.01.02 Gas meters must have pulse heads to allow connection to network.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Gas Service Stop Buttons Labs H 12.02.01

Supply and install “Gas” stop buttons located at each laboratory door. Wire stop buttons in series to isolate main gas solenoid valve for the general laboratory outlets.

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Gas Service Stop Buttons Labs H 12.02.02

Supply and install “Power” isolating stop button at each laboratory door, wire to isolate the general power in each area (not the fume cupboards). The stop button must operate a shunt trip to be located within the D.S.B.0

Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Gas Service Stop Buttons Labs H 12.02.03 Isolating stop buttons must be Telemecanique manufacturer – No. XALJ174

or other approved.Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Gas Service Stop Buttons Labs H 12.02.04 Provide clear polycarbonate housing with open front, protruding proud of

button to prevent accidental isolation or protective cage.Mechanical Engineer

H - Plumbing Gas Service Pressure H 12.03 Gas supply pressures must be clearly displayed on all pipes and meters.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC General Design Principles I 01.01.01 Ozone Depleting Substances (ODP) must be eliminated and High Global

Warming Potential (GWP) substances must be minimised and well contained.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC General Design Principles I 01.01.02

Plant rooms housing HVAC equipment containing refrigerant must be moderately airtight in their enclosure and fitted with refrigerant leak detection to cover high risk sections of the equipment.

Mechanical Engineer


All HVAC systems must include, BACnet, high level connectivity for monitoring and low level connectivity for control, to the Building Automation System (BAS) and must have time clock control, localised 2 hour (adjustable) after hours switching.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC General Design Principles I 01.01.04 The location of switching devices will be aligned horizontally with adjacent

door hands or other controls within a zone of 900 mm to 1100 mm.

Mechanical Engineer


HVAC plant and system components must be positioned in such a manner to minimize any aesthetic impacts or detract from the building or surrounding environment. All plant and control systems must be designed/located to facilitate efficient operation of the system:- Adequate ventilation to allow cooling of compressors - Condenser coil faces must not be installed in a Westerly exposure.

Mechanical Engineer


All selected equipment and infrastructure must have 20% redundancy for future expansion and accordingly be capable of variable load control and efficient operation under low load conditions where applicable.

Mechanical Engineer


Design associated with Tenancy Alterations, Fit Outs, refurbishments, building upgrades etc., must consider existing plant (local and/or central) and ensure introduced loads (increased/decreased) do not affect system performance upstream or downstream of are not under the refurbishment. Any upgrades required are to be captured within the scope of that project.

Mechanical Engineer


Where existing system capacity is below cumulative requirements, new plant will be integrated into the existing system (Central Plant) to increase capacity and be programmed for staged operation under peak, partial and low load conditions. added plant must not operate in contradiction to the existimg. Larger Exhaust systems (10 air changes or more referenced to the space), must include heat recovery.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Delivery Design Criteria I 02.01.01

Provide the following minimum air-change rates:- Individual or open-plan offices 4-8 AC/hr- Lecture theatres/classrooms 8-10 AC/hr

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Delivery Design Criteria I 02.01.02

Provide the following minimum outside air rates:- Individual offices - 11.1 L/s/person- Open-plan offices - 16.6 L/s/person - Lecture theatres/classrooms - 8.3 L/s/person

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Naturally or Mechanically Assisted Ventilated Spaces

Design Criteria I 03.01Maximise naturally ventilated and mechanically assisted ventilated spaces throughout the building. Outside air must be provided at 50% above that specified in AS 1668.2 unless carbon dioxide monitoring and control is used.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Naturally or Mechanically Assisted Ventilated Spaces

Design Principles I 03.02

Include carbon dioxide monitoring and control systems with a minimum of one CO2 sensor at all return points on the floor, to facilitate adjustments of outside air ventilation rates via VSD fans to each level, to achieve outside air requirements. Outside air intakes must be filtered to remove airborne contaminants.


43









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Indoor Air Quality Design Principles I 04.01.01

The introduction of poor quality air from nearby facilities, equipment and utility areas including from food preparation areas, photocopying and high volume printers and other production equipment is not permitted. Ensure air quality is not affected by local or external contamination.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Indoor Air Quality Design Principles I 04.01.02

Dedicated exhaust systems must be installed to eliminate or control sources of indoor pollutants from photocopy rooms, toilets, kitchenettes etc. These systems must operate in conjunction with the required building ventilation requirements. The use of local closed extraction systems are to be used.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Thermal Comfort Design Criteria I 05.01.01 HVAC systems must be designed to maintain a dry bulb temperature range

between 20oC to 25oC.Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Thermal Comfort Design Criteria I 05.01.02 Uncontrolled Relative Humidity (RH) is to be maintained within a range of

40% to 60% unless specific conditions are nominated.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Thermal Comfort Design Principles I 05.02

Where under floor distribution is used, each outlet must be directional and volume flow rate adjustable for localised control of air flow. Loactions of outlets must not effect occupancy comfort.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Set Points Design Criteria I 06.01 Maintain preferred temperature set points of 21-24 degrees during normal or

agreed hours of occupation (typically 8:30am to 5:00pm).

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Distribution Design Criteria I 07.01

HVAC systems must be designed for individual internal and perimeter zones for each facade of the building with heating, cooling and volume control. Perimeter zone must not exceed 100m2 (with a maximum depth of 5 m) or serve more than one facade orientation. Each zone to be thermostatically controlled as a minimum.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Distribution Design Principles I 07.02.01

Provide means to distribute air evenly throughout the conditioned space . Ensure air distribution is even and does not cause drafts. Where this cannot be achieved through central air handling systems, efficient ceiling fans must be introduced.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Distribution Design Principles I 07.02.02 Ceiling spaces must not be used as return air paths. Fully insulated and

ducted return and supply air system must be used.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ceiling Fans Design Principles I 08.01

Provide ceiling or wall mounted fans to areas of high occupation, i.e. classrooms, open plan offices, etc., to improve air circulation and mixing, extend comfort levels where required and assist with air distribution. Horizontal fans can provide greater mixing across the room and when oscillating provide air movement over a wider range than a fixed ceiling fan.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ductwork Design Principles I 09.01.01

Except where higher standards are nominated in this specification, all ductwork and associated works must be supplied and installed in accordance with the current Australian Standards.

Mechanical Engineer


Ductwork design must aim to achieve the optimum aspect ratio with largest diameter (equivalent) practical and minimise the length and number of bends between supply fan and delivery point. Guide vanes must be used in radius bends in larger ductwork. Minimise the use of flexi-duct. Exposed ductwork must be painted to match adjoining surfaces. The use of glass fibre duct (or any construction material which has the potential to break down and contaminate the air stream) is not permitted.

Mechanical Engineer


Design ductwork to be efficient. Use largest possible diameter insulated pipes and ducts to minimise friction and heat loss. Ensure pipe and duct sizes are not reduced in value management as this significantly compromises system effectiveness and efficiency.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ductwork Design Criteria I 09.02.01

Use radius elbows (with or without turning vanes) to maintain uniformity of airflow and minimise pressure drops - both of which affect system performance and occupant comfort. Radius elbows should have a radius/width (R/W) ratio of 1.5.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ductwork Design Criteria I 09.02.02

Avoid using turning vanes at entrances to branch ducts as they disrupt airflow; where used ensure turning vanes are properly aligned to run parallel with sides of ductwork. Preferentially a radius branch fitting with no turning vanes (preferred) or 45 degree entry fitting (passable) to branching ducts. No 90 degree angles in duct work allowed.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ductwork Exposed Metal

Ductwork I 09.03Ductwork exposed to the elements must be sealed watertight and cross broken to prevent ponding. Exposed ductwork must be painted to match adjoining surfaces.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ductwork Round/Oval Metal

Ductwork I 09.04

All round/oval metal ductwork must meet the following conditions:- All low velocity round ductwork and fittings must be flanged joints or approved welded joints must be used in all inaccessible places. - Flanges joint angles must be rolled to true circles and tack or spot welded to ducts. - Oval ducts exceeding 800 mm in width must not be used. - Oval ducts under 800 mm width must be manufactured from spiral lock seam round ducts.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ductwork Flexible Ducts I 09.05

The use of flexible duct must be minimised. When flexible duct is used the following conditions must be met:- Flexible ducts must be installed so that no bend has a mean radius of less than one and half time the duct diameter.- Must be cut to the lengths necessary for each application, and no jointing of pieces of flexible ductwork will be permitted.- Low velocity flexible ducts must not be longer than 4000mm and supported at intervals not greater than 1500mm in distance.- High velocity flexible duct must be no longer than 600mm unless approved by the University. - Flexible ductwork must be supported by packaging straps, buckles and gutter guard saddles to suit the duct diameter which must be not less than 400mm long.- Joints between flexible and sheet metal ducts must be made with approved metal band clamps and all leaks must be eliminated.- Ducts must be in “as new” condition at the date of Practical Completion.- Plastic ducts must not be used, unless specifically for purpose.


44









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Duct Supports I 10

All hangers, bars, brackets, rods, rolled steel sections etc. used to support ducts will meet the following conditions:- Must be installed at sufficient intervals to prevent sagging and vibration of ductwork.- External duct supports must be hot dipped galvanized with cold galvanized touch up of surfaces damaged during installation. - Internal duct supports must be prime coated immediately after manufacturer.- must be suspended using hanging strap and half round sleeves (sheet metal or equal) to prevent compression of duct.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Duct Insulation I 11

Insulation to Australian Standards and BCA whichever is higher. External insulation is to be used unless a requirement for internal insulation is required for acoustic or external/exposed installation. Internal insulation must be lined with perforated foil faced insulation or perforated metal where higher velocities are encountered. Alternate face material to be used as determined by specific applications. Internal insulation must not be exposed directly to the air stream.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Duct Penetrations Design Criteria I 12.01.01

Where ducts penetrate internal walls and floors, the openings through which they pass must be sized to allow a uniform 12 mm minimum clearance all rounds. The space must be packed through its depth with- “Kaowool” or equal approved.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Duct Penetrations Design Criteria I 12.01.02

The joints on both sides must be sealed using a non-hardening resilient compound and 38mm x 2 mm trimming angles to the duct must be provided on each side of the penetration to conceal the opening. Fire ratings of walls and floors must be maintained.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Dampers Balancing

Dampers I 13.01

Balancing dampers must be installed according to the following conditions:- Balancing dampers must be installed in each branch duct serving more than one diffuser, and at all flexible duct connections to branch ductwork.- Dampers in the main duct branches to be Opposed Blade and must be of the single blade type for flexible duct branch take offs rigidly constructed and free from slack movement or vibration.- Where dampers are not accessible, locate dampers behind diffusers.- Fit a lever and quadrant control to each damper assembly in an accessible position, which must provide for adjustment and locking in any desired position. Mark and label clearly the permanently “Open” and “Closed” positions. After installation and balancing is completed, mark the normal working position of each damper lever. Mark end of spindle with groove parallel with damper blade.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Dampers Fire Dampers I 13.02

Fire dampers must:- Be constructed and installed in accordance with the Australian Standards. - Maintain the integrity of the fire rated wall/floor penetration and supply the appropriate damper to suit each situation.- Be documented on drawings and ‘As Installed’ documentation.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Air Diffusers, Grilles & Louvres Design Principles I 14.01

Place air diffusers near to major heat sources/losses, avoid the placement of diffusers directly over desks. Ensure local fixtures, fittings and minor structures do no impede air flow from registers. Ensure diffusers especially slot diffusers do not blow air directly onto occupants or directly onto glazing. Avoid the use of wall diffusers as they tend to create drafts. Ensure return air paths are unrestricted. Swirl diffusers are recommended for office spaces.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Air Diffusers, Grilles & Louvres

Ceiling Supply Diffusers I 14.02

Ceiling mounted diffusers must: - be of ‘swirl’ type construction, manufactured from galvanise steel or aluminium.- be fitted with an insulated ‘cushion head’ or ‘static pressure’ box, to which the flexible ductwork is connected.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Air Diffusers, Grilles & Louvres

Side Blow Diffusers I 14.03

Side blow diffusers must meet the following conditions:- Suitable for mounting through wall openings or on the face of ductwork.- Flanged frame and adjustable blades must be of extruded aluminium or fabricated from zinc-coated steel. Two sets of blades are to be fitted, horizontal and vertical and must provide universal adjustment of airflow patterns. Each blade must be individually adjustable.- A set of opposed multi-blade volume control dampers must be fitted behind each diffuser, adjustable by screwdriver through a diffuser face. - Where grilles are fitted directly on to ductwork, stream splitter dampers must be used where practical.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Air Diffusers, Grilles & Louvres External Louvres I 14.04

External louvres must meet the following conditions: - Be manufactured from marine grade aluminium or bronze and colour coded to match adjacent surfaces.- Be fitted with vermin proof screens.- Pressure across the louvre must be minimised to limit any noise generation.- Intake louvres must not entrain water.- Consider window cleaning requirements and façade orientation in louvre design

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Access Panels and Hatches I 15

Where correct access cannot be provided from existing access hatches, supply and install new galvanized M.S. door and pressed metal frame, push release lock and metal tongue. Location must be fit for purpose.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Space Heating I 16

Heating system for a conditioned space must obtain energy from a source that is renewable or has low greenhouse gas intensity such as natural gas or high efficiency heat pumps. The use of resistive electric reheats will not be considered.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Space Heating Low Pressure

Heating I 16.01

Low pressure heating must meet the following conditions:- Provide appropriately located isolation to facilitate maintenance.- Include components for automatic air venting and manual air bleeding.- Air vents discharge to drain.- Fit water filter and dosing pot into supply line to header tank.


45









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation General I 17.01.01

When designing mechanical services for new buildings or major refurbishments, the feasibility of combining natural ventilation, mechanical ventilation and air conditioning must be investigated. Natural ventilation must be considered as a preferable option.

Mechanical Engineer


All enclosed car parks, kitchens and WCs must be ventilated so that the concentration of toxic or odorous gas is reduced to an acceptable level. Enclosed car park ventilation systems must utilise continuous carbon monoxide sensing systems to control ventilation rates.

Mechanical Engineer


In addition to the ventilation requirements nominated in the Australian Standards, the design must ensure the containment of odours and steam when designing the mechanical systems compliments natural ventilation.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation Ventilation Control I 17.02

Ventilation Control must include the following:- Minimum installation of one CO2 sensor in all return air paths and within zone occupied areas. Sensors should also be considered in high use spaces across the floor e.g. in lecture theatres.- Use of high tier CO2 sensors only; rated commercial/industrial grade with minimum guaranteed drift. Use Drager, Vaisala or similar.- Checking and calibration of CO2 sensors every 12 months as a minimum or as per manufacturer's specification.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation Non Mechanical

Roof Ventilators I 17.03Non Mechanical Roof Ventilators include:- Natural ventilation-considered as preferable option. - High-performance gravity roof ventilators for medium to high specific heat loads with standard sound insulation must be used.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation Ducted Supply

Systems I 17.04.01Main riser ducts must be capable of handling an increase of 20% in air quantity for potential expansion of HVAC. Fans and motors must be selected with this in mind.

Mechanical Engineer


Systems I 17.04.02 Provide locking quadrants to all adjustable dampers.

Mechanical Engineer


Systems I 17.04.03Provide duct access panels in the risers at each floor and in each branch or sub-branch for cleaning purposes. Duct access panels must be not more than 10 metres apart and as per current Australian Standards.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation Ducted Exhaust

Systems I 17.05.01Provide duct access panels in the risers at each floor and in each branch or sub-branch for cleaning purposes. Duct access panels must be not more than 10 metres apart.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation Ducted Exhaust

Systems I 17.05.02 Exhaust ventilation ductwork systems, installed in car parks and WC’s must be completely separate from each other.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation Local Exhaust

Hoods I 17.06

Local exhaust hoods are to be:- Supplied with power supply from the mechanical services switchboard. - When time clock controlled through the BAS, an afterhours override switch (time adjustable) must be provided .- Labelled as for fume cupboards.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation

Fume Cupboard Make Up Air System

I 17.07.01

Make-up air systems must be fed from the mechanical services switchboard and is to shut down on fire alarm; the system must be interlocked with the fume cupboards and progressively increase air supply as required as fume cupboard usage increases. Make up air supply must be via a VSD with fan speeds controlled by room pressure. Supply fan VSD, pressure sensors and fume cupboard fan status must be BAS connected.

Mechanical Engineer



I 17.07.02 Use unconditioned make-up air systems where the application permits as the default for fume cupboards to reduce energy wastage.

Mechanical Engineer



I 17.07.03 Identify fan assembly by nominating the Fume cupboard/area it serves.

Mechanical Engineer



I 17.07.04Where tempering has to be provided for make up air systems, the pre-heat systems must be via heat recovery(enthalpy or air to air heat exchanger) initially.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation Kitchen Exhaust

Systems I 17.08

Provide duct access for cleaning and inspection purposes. Duct access panels must be not more than 10 metres apart and must be located, before and after each bend, change of direction and at each riser as per the relevant, current Australian Standards.The discharge point of the kitchen ventilation system must be above the roof. Kitchen exhaust fans must be able to be easily pulled apart for cleaning purposes.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation Fume Exhaust

Systems I 17.09.01 The Principal Consultant must consult appropriate stakeholders to establish the requirement for each project.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ventilation Fume Exhaust

Systems I 17.09.02All fume cupboard exhaust fans must be variable speed and interlinked with the sash position for volume control. Both points must be connected to the building automation system for monitoring. Variable speed drives must be located adjacent to the fan and protected from the elements.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Standards Labs I 18.01 The design, manufacturer, installation and operation must fully comply with

the requirements of current Australian Standards.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Power Supply and

Lighting Labs I 18.02Power for the lighting and general power outlets must come from the lab distribution board. The exhaust fan must be powered from the local mechanical services switchboard and continue to operate under GFA unless the fire strategy determines otherwise.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Control System Labs I 18.03 The fume cupboard control system must be a proprietary electronic controller

providing total control, and safeties to the operation of the fume cupboard.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards GPOs Labs I 18.04.01

All switches and G.P.O.s are to be matching brand and colour and be mounted on the skirting duct across the front of the cupboard. The duct is to be supplied and fitted by the fume cupboard manufacturer.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards GPOs Labs I 18.04.02 Each cupboard is to be fitted with a minimum of 2 No. double G.P.O.’s (with

R.C.D. protection in laboratories) and neon lamp indicators.


46









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Alarm Labs I 18.05

Each cupboard is to be fitted with faults acknowledge, and fault reset switch (spring loaded push button N/O) mounted on the front of the cupboard. An audible alarm is to be built into the proprietary controller. Flashing alarms may also be required in certain applications where audible alarms may not be heard.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Labelling Switches Labs I 18.06 Label all switches with black lettering on white background self-adhesive

labels.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Identifying

Cupboards Labs I 18.07

Identify each fume cupboard. (Eg.Fume Cupboard No. 1 room G16) with black lettering on white background located above the front sash and identify exhaust fan assembly and switchboard equipment and auxiliary equipment such as PLCs, etc. with similar corresponding sign. External and switchboard labels are to be engraved traffolyte and permanently fixed.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Control Wiring Labs I 18.08 Control wiring must not be less than 1.5mm2 7/050.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Power Wiring Labs I 18.09 Power wiring must not be less than 2.5mm2 7/067.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards DDA Labs I 18.10 Requirements for special use fume cupboards to be provided in project

specification. Consideration in design must include DDA requirement.Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Control Panel Labs I 18.11 Control Panel flush mounted on front fascia, containing all relevant switches

and indicators.Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Isolator Labs I 18.12 Provide an isolator which simultaneously isolates the gas and electrical

outlets while maintaining exhaust flow, mounted above front opening.Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Disconnect Device Labs I 18.13 Provide for automatic isolation of services in the event of power failure.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Warning Label Labs I 18.14 Specify operating limits of cupboard, including quantity of chemicals, control

of ignition and safety procedures.Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Sump Labs I 18.15 Sump must be installed with adequate depth to safely contain chemicals in

the event of a spill.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Exhaust Labs I 18.16.01

Maintain a minimum linear air velocity of 0.5m/s at the face of the cupboard in conjunction with sash open position. Exhaust fans to be variable speed to maintain required face velocity at varying shash positions.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Exhaust Labs I 18.16.02 Contain an accessible, manually operated fire damper.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Fume Cupboards Exhaust Labs I 18.16.03

All fume cupboard fans must be controlled via VSDs. All VSDs must be installed in the plant room or inside a waterproof enclosure, which meets IP56 requirements.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Evaporative Cooling Considered

Spaces I 19.01Evaporative cooling systems (direct and indirect) must be considered for application in areas where humidity control is not a critical consideration. Examples include: commercial kitchens; sports facilities.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Evaporative Cooling Recycled Water I 19.02 Investigation should include the use of recycled or harvested water sources

for indirect evaporative systems.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Conditioning Categories of

Need I 20.01

The University nominates several critical categories of need for the air conditioning of building spaces, defined by use, function and comfort level:- Where air conditioning is critical to the outcome of academic experiments.- In animal accommodation facilities, where air conditioning is necessary for the health and wellbeing of the animals.- In specialized equipment and central computer rooms where an air conditioned environment is necessary to avoid equipment damage.

High iImportance areas that must have a supply of air conditioning include:- Lecture Theatres- Tutorial rooms and laboratories- Computer rooms- Libraries- Theatres and assembly areas- Meeting Rooms (areas greater than 20 m2)- Animal houses and animal holding areas- Child minding centres- Archive/rare books/art work storage and exhibition areas- Areas occupied by the Chancellor, Vice-Chancellor and other senior executive staff.- Any space where the University’s Thermal Comfort Guidelines cannot be practically applied.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Conditioning Air Conditioning

System Selection I 20.02.01

Selection of system type to be in accordance with the following:- Generally, selection must consider existing equipment serving the site and maintain consistency of manufacturer unless specific approval has been sought for alternate suppliers.- Equipment to be selected to operate at full capacity up to 38 deg C and at reduced capacity up to 45c ambient.- If a system is to serve 30% or more of a building UFA, including new buildings - Centralised system to be used,- If a system is to serve less than 30% of a building UFA, which has existing centralised system - priority must be given initially to upgrading any existing centralised systems to service the additional areas,- If a system capacity is likely to exceed 250 kW - a chilled water system is to be used,- If a system capacity is less than 250 kW and an existing centralised system is not present, or the operation hours are significantly different from the rest of the building e.g. a constant temperature room that runs 24 hours in a building that has typical operation hours of 9-5, a system that operates independently from the base building system must be used. VRV packaged or split type vapour compression systems can be considered. Where package systems are utilised, they must have a COP of 3 or greater.


47









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Conditioning Air Conditioning

System Selection I 20.02.02

Centralised chilled water systems serve a number of buildings are to be adopted in accordance with campus master-plan provisions. Where existing centralised equipment is reaching the end of its lifecycle, refurbishments and/or new projects must include a budget provision to allow replacing such equipment. Utilisation and expansion of centralised systems within a building must be considered in all instances.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Conditioning Chilled Water

Systems I 20.03

Chilled water systems must be primary and secondary type. Chillers are to be arranged in parallel and individually matched with a primary and secondary pump. Chiller(s) selection needs to consider:- Diversity in power sources- System diversity and minimum/low load requirements.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Conditioning Chilled Water

Systems I 20.04 Adiabatic Air Cooled Chillers must be the first consideration when selecting chiller units. Discuss justification for alternative selections.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Water Cooled Chillers Centrifugal

Compressors I 21.01

Centrifugal Compressors- Arrangement: Hermetic or open drive. Dual compressors may be offered to increase efficiency.- Refrigerant: Refer to General Design Principles - Rotor: Impeller statically and dynamically balanced. Test the rotor assemblies at 20% over speed.- Capacity Control: Provide stepless capacity control, which maintains stable operating conditions and responds to variations in load, reducing to 20% or less of full load capacity with constant condenser water temperature to ARI 550/590.- Lubrication: Provide oil pump, filter, oil cooler, thermostatically controlled oil heater and pressurized lubrication during run-up and coast-down including coast-down after a power failure.- Oil heaters: To operate during off cycles of the compressor.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Water Cooled Chillers Screw

Compressors I 21.02

Screw Compressors- Arrangement: Hermetic, semi-hermetic or open drive.- Capacity control: Positive fully modulating or multi-step capacity control assembly reducing to 17% of full chiller load.- Lubrication: Provide oil separator, pump or pressure differential oil system and filter.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Water Cooled Chillers Water Cooled

Condensers I 21.03

Water Cooled Condensers- Pressure vessel design: To AS 1200- Water tube velocity: 3m/s max.- Heat transfer surface: Mechanically cleanable enhanced surface copper tubes without turbulators.- Water boxes and tube plates: Mild steel for normal water conditions.- Condenser piping connections: Arrange to suit plant room layout with two pass condenser and Victaulic or flanged pipe pieces for removal to allow for inspection and tube withdrawal. Alternatively marine water boxes must be utilised where indicated.- Fit lifting lugs to water boxes.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Water Cooled Chillers

Water Box Corrosion Protection

I 21.04

Water Box Corrosion Protection- Provide a Cathodic protection system for each condenser water box, using an impressed current, designed and installed by a suitably qualified person. Include power supply, wired from chiller control panel, D.C. power supply with balanced outputs and ammeter, anodes and interconnecting wiring, and a facility for periodic testing and alarm at BMS.- Cathodic protection must comply with the recommendations of AS 2832.4, Cathodic protection of metals – internal surfaces.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Water Cooled Chillers Water Cooled

Type I 21.05

Water Cooled Type- Type: Centrifugal- No. of Comps: Minimum of 2- Refrigerant type: Refer Design Principles- Chilled water range (oC/oC): 6/12- Minimum efficiency at full load (kW/kWr): 5- Minimum efficiency at part load (kW/kWr): 10- Power supply (Voltage/Phase/Frequency): 400/3/50- Starter type: VSD- NPLV: 6Nominal selection: 1. Equipment to have Proven Performance and Consistent Service support.2. Consistency with existing product on specific site.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Air Cooled Adiabatic Chiller

Centrifugal Compressors I 22.01

Centrifugal Compressors:- Arrangement: Hermetic or open drive. Dual compressors may be offered to increase efficiency.- Refrigerant: Refer Design Principles- Rotor: Impeller statically and dynamically balanced. Test the rotor assemblies at 20% over speed.- Capacity Control: Provide stepless capacity control, which maintains stable operating conditions and responds to variations in load, reducing to 20% or less of full load capacity. - Lubrication: Provide oil pump, filter, oil cooler, thermostatically controlled oil heater and pressurized lubrication during run-up and coast-down including coast-down after a power failure.- Oil heaters: To operate during off cycles of the compressor.


48









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC


Screw Compressors I 22.02

Screw Compressors:- Arrangement: Hermetic, semi-hermetic or open drive.- Capacity control: Positive fully modulating or multi-step capacity control assembly reducing to 17% of full chiller load.- Lubrication: Provide oil separator, pump or pressure differential oil system and filter.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC


Air Cooled Condensers I 22.03

The following conditions apply in the selection of an air cooled condensers:- Equipment to be selected to operate at full capacity up to 38 deg C and at reduced capacity up to 45c ambient.- Coils must be copper tube, epoxy coated aluminium fins- Condenser fans must have multiple direct drive low noise axial fans with guards and baffles to prevent air short circuiting when fans cycle off.- Provision of a weather proof acoustic enclosure, low noise direct drive fans and sound attenuators if required to meet specified sound level or alternatively provide variable speed fan drives controlled for reduced speed at night.- Speed control fans to control maintain head pressure

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Air Cooled Adiabatic Chiller Air Cooled Type I 22.04

Air Cooled Type- Type: Screw- Refrigerant type: Refer Design Principles- Chilled water range (oC/oC): 6/12- Minimum efficiency at full load (kW/kWr): 3- Minimum efficiency at part load (kW/kWr): 6- Power supply (Voltage/Phase/Frequency): 400/3/50- Starter type: VSD- NPLV: 4.5Nominal selection Refer 1. Equipment to have Proven Performance and Consistent Service support.2. Consistency with existing product on specific site. (If Available)

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Packaged Air Conditioners Design Criteria I 23.01

Packaged Air-conditioning systems must be used only where it can be demonstrated that required conditions cannot be achieved by use of chilled water or the area is of a critical nature. Units must:- be heat pump/reverse cycle inverter type (units up to 20 kWr),- have the highest practical COP, minimum COP of 3 at full load.- The system must be connected and controlled so that load shed is on signal from BAS, - system fire trip shutdown is connected to the Fire Indicator Panel,- time schedule controlled from the Building Automation System (BAS),- auto restart after power failure,- load management /set point control from BAS,- be of a manufacturer consistent with any existing product on the specific site.- Use a refrigerant that has an ODP of 00.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Packaged Air Conditioners Manufacturer I 23.02 Selection of manufacturer's who offer service through nominated suppliers

only are discouraged.Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Packaged Air Conditioners Controls I 23.03 Package units should be BAS low level connected with time schedules and

dual set point control wherever possible.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Split Air Conditioners Design Criteria I 24.01

Split Air Conditioner Units must:- be heat pump/reverse cycle inverter driven (units up to 20 kWr),- have the highest practical COP, minimum COP of 3 at full load,- the system must be connected and controlled so that load shed is on signal from BAS, - system fire trip shutdown is connected to the Fire Indicator Panel,- time schedule controlled from the Building Automation System (BAS),- auto restart after power failure,- load management /set point control from BAS- compatible with BAS system- be of a manufacturer consistent with any existing product on the specific site.- Use a refrigerant that has an ODP of 00.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Split Air Conditioners Manufacturer I 24.02 Selection of manufacturer's who offer service through nominated suppliers

only are discouraged.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Split Air Conditioners Controls I 24.03.01

Where standalone split/package systems are used, units should include occupancy sensors or be controlled by a local occupancy sensor and time clock to ensure system does not operate when room is not occupied for a period of time.

Mechanical Engineer


Standalone package units must have a suitable in-built temperature dead band, +/- 1.5 degrees around set point to ensure system does not switch between heating and cooling.

Mechanical Engineer


Where several small package units are being installed a central controller should be included networking the individual systems to allow improved control.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Split Air Conditioners Efficiency I 24.04 Any packaged heating or cooling units must achieve COP of 3.5 or greater

and only be used when more efficient options are unavailable.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Cooling, Heat and Reheat Coils Access I 25.01 Heating coils must be accessible from both sides for cleaning and servicing.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Cooling, Heat and Reheat Coils Restrictions I 25.02 Electric heating or Zone reheat systems are not permitted. Where their use is

unavoidable specific approval must be sought prior to development of Design.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Constant Volume System Control Strategy

Existing I 26.01

Where existing Constant Volume System Control systems are in place, fans should be fitted with BAS connected VSDs and high quality carbon dioxide sensors to allow fans to be turned down when conditioning is not required and air quality is high. Supply and return fan performance profiles must be carefully match to allow effective balancing at lower fan speeds.


49









feedbackMechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Variable Volume System Strategy I 27 All new air-handling systems should be variable volume unless minimum

fresh air only.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Variable Volume System Strategy Design Principles I 27.01

In general, a Variable Air Volume (VAV) system may be used for open plan office areas and large rooms eg. Dividable tutorial rooms, Laboratories, Meeting rooms. When used the following conditions should be met:- FCUs must be considered as preferred system for staff offices. - Each conditioned space must be properly zoned into internal and perimeter zones.- To achieve a better air distribution and to minimise cold air dumping during low air flow, swirl and linear slot type diffusers must be used instead of Louvre type.- One motion detector must be provided for each VAV box.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Variable Volume System Strategy Pressure Sensors I 27.02 VAV pressure sensors to be accurately calibrated and documented during

commissioning.Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Handling Control Design Principles I 28.01 Design zoning and air distribution to minimise requirements for re-heating.

Where required, zone reheats must not use resistive electrical elements.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Handling Control Economy Cycle I 28.02

Specify HVAC systems with economy cycle, mixed mode or 100% fresh air wherever possible to take advantage of acceptable external conditions and higher ventilation rates. Supply air temperature must be maintained at design.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Handling Control Minimum Outside

Air I 28.03 Outside air intake controls must include minimum outside air entry when external conditions are unfavourable.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Handling Control Reed Switches I 28.04

For mixed mode applications, supply reed switches linked to building automation system on all windows to disable mechanical plant when windows are open.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Handling Control Humidity Control I 28.05

Install humidity sensors for outside air, and internal air to allow enthalpy control of economy dampers. The intake of outside air should be minimised when relative humidity (RH) exceeds 60%. Humidity should not exceed 75% RH in the supply ductwork to avoid condensation and mould growth.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Distribution Air Handling

System I 29.01.01

Air handling systems must meet the following conditions:- Install comparoator type outside air economy cycle with continuously variable outside/return/spill automatic air dampers to mainatin design supply air temperature, connected to campus BAS and optimised for energy efficiency.- Air conditioning systems to be provided with chilled water from single multi-compressor water cooled chiller and heating water from a boiler or heat exchanger using high temperature hot water.- Make up air supply systems’ fan motors, to be connected to 3 phase power from a Mechanical Services Switchboard and include, pre-heat, shut down in fire alarm mode, and capacity to progressively increase air supply in tandem with fume cupboard/hood usage where applicable.- Supply and return air to be fitted with Variable speed drives.- Provide night purge system, programmed to consider prevailing and predicted weather conditions and operated to maximise energy efficiency.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Air Distribution Air Handling

System I 29.01.02

All air-handling systems must have adequate outside air make up variable (up to 100% of the supply air). Outside air should be considered at locations well away from:- Fume exhausts.- Local traffic.- Kitchen and WC’s discharges.- Cooling towers discharges.- Other objectionable discharges.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Direct-expansion (DX) I 30

Direct-expansion (DX) refrigeration systems must be used only where it can demonstrated that required conditions cannot be achieved by use of chilled water or the area has a consistent load and critical nature e.g. computer, data or communication rooms. The use of DX systems reduces the opportunity to vary fan speeds and can restrict the effective utilisation of economy cycles.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Chilled Beam Control Strategy I 31

Chilled Beam Control Strategy must:- Designed to allow higher temperature and low pressure cooling water to be utilised, i.e. more smaller beams. - Designed so beam valves so that water pressure can be primarily controlled at the pump with beam control valves close to 100% open when cooling is required. - Chilled water temperature to be variable and quality dew point sensor(s) must be included to ensure water temperature remains above dew point at all times. - Chilled beams - Where high internal heat loads due to equipment are present, alternative or supplementary cooling may be required.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Refrigeration Plant Chillers LCA I 32.01.01

All chiller plant to be selected on the basis of Life Cycle Analysis, considering first cost, operating cost and energy efficiency and comparing various options.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Refrigeration Plant Chillers Refrigerant I 32.01.02 Chillers must utilise refrigerant as referred to under Design Principles.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Refrigeration Plant Chillers

Chiller Plant Optimisation I 32.02.01

Optimisation must use adaptive control methodology to continuously optimise chiller system energy efficiency. The optimisation loop must take at least the following inputs:- Power consumed by VSDs on CHW & CCW pumps - Power consumed by VSDs on cooling tower fans- Power consumed by chiller. - Ambient wet bulb temperature

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC



The optimisation loops or closed loop feedback will continuously adjust logic in accordance with actual system conditions such as chiller approach, chiller operating boundary conditions, pumping efficiency, tower operating boundary conditions, cooling tower approach and performance, so as to optimise total plant COP.


50









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC



Optimisation must be in line with manufacturer's' plant data, paying particular attention to tolerances, limits and advice from plant design engineers. Evidence of this is essential. Optimisation must not void plant warranty.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC



Optimisation will achieve:- For multiple chiller systems, chiller sequencing based on actual loading and overall system COPs- Condenser water relief. Temperature and flow optimisation.- For multiple pump system, pump sequencing- For multiple tower system, tower control sequencing- Chilled water reset, designed to optimise flow and temperature efficiency at load.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC



The use of proprietary (closed) optimisation protocols is prohibited. Monash University staff must be trained in the maintenance and interrogation of the system.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC



Optimisation will be implemented using the existing Building Automation System (BAS). BAS will poll all relevant plant inputs and either:- perform optimisation on the BAS or,- pass on data to a BAS overlay product via native protocol i.e. modbus or bacnet.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC


Chiller Plant Optimisation I 32.02.07 BAS overlay proposals must contain fail safe design, where in the event of

comms loss, the plant and devices will default to localised chiller control.Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC


Chiller Plant Optimisation I 32.02.08 Selection of manufacturer's who offer service through nominated suppliers

only are discouraged.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC


Condenser Water Relief Strategy I 32.03

Implement a Condenser Water Relief Strategy. Condenser water temperature should be variable to maximise the performance of the chiller and maximise benefit of cool air temperatures. Part load performance curves, condenser water temperatures of chiller should be used in conjunction with a floating condenser water temperature relative to ambient air temperature to maximise the efficiency of the chiller. Condenser water relief requires, chilled water and condenser water flow and return temperatures, a flow meter in the chiller water and condenser water loops and a ambient temperature and dew point sensor to keep condenser cooling water temp 3 degrees above dew point.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC


Chiller Control Strategy I 32.04

Chiller Control Strategy should be implemented under the following conditions:- Chiller should respond to cooling load called from the field, not return water temperature (which is not a good reference for chiller control).- Chiller part load efficiency should be analysed to identify optimal performance range and staging of multiple chillers. ‘J’ curves should be generated to identify optimal staging strategy. - Water cooled chillers should have condenser water temperature strategy to optimise chiller efficiency, refer to condenser water control.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Refrigeration Plant Chillers Chiller selection I 32.05

Vapour Compression Chillers to have the following Minimum Coefficient of Performance (Type | Capacity (kW R) | Min COP):- Air cooled with Condenser | All Capacities | 3.5 - Air cooled without Condenser | All Capacities | 3.6 - Water cooled, Reciprocating | All Capacities | 4.85 - Water Cooled (Rotary Screw and Scroll) | <528 kW | 5.1 - Water Cooled (Rotary Screw and Scroll) | 528-1055 kW | 5.65 - Water Cooled (Rotary Screw and Scroll) | >1055 kW | 6.35 - Water Cooled, Centrifugal | < 528 kW | 5.75 - Water Cooled, Centrifugal | > 528-1055 kW | 6.4- Water Cooled, Centrifugal | > 1055 kW | 7.0

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Refrigeration Plant Chillers Absorption Chillers I 32.06

Absorption chillers must be double-effect type to maximise the coefficient of performance (COP). Ideally absorption chillers utilise renewable or waste heat as the energy source.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC


Helical Screw Chillers I 32.07 Helical Screw chiller must be not considered, unless specified by the

University.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC


Centrifugal Chillers I 32.08 When centrifugal chillers are the technology choice, variable speed drive type

centrifugal chillers must be selected.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Design Principles I 33.01

Consideration is to be given to the use of closed circuit coolers rather than conventional cooling towers to reduce risk of legionella. Cooling Towers shall be designed and installed in such a manner as to reduce the use of potable water. Harvested rainwater, where available, is to be used for makeup. Adiabatic Coolers should be considered as a means to reduce water use and eliminate legionella risk by eliminating conventional cooling towers.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Structure I 33.02

Design in accordance with the OH & Safety Act, risk management plan, using materials, drift eliminators, ladders, platforms and shading devices which ensure ease of maintenance, cleaning and resistance to ultraviolet radiation.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Fan Cylinder I 33.03 Fan Cylinder to Use fibreglass. Screen to be stainless steel.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Fan I 33.04

Cooling tower fans must be used:- direct driven, high efficiency, rare earth magnet. - direct exhaust upwards.- all cooling tower fans must be driven by VSD’s and connected to BAS.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Motor I 33.05

High-efficiency, rare earth magnet electric motors totally enclosed and tropic proofed.Bearings to have a design life of 300,000 hours.Select materials to ensure no corrosion of fan hub to motor shaft.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Attenuator I 33.06 To fan outlet and inlet when noise level will be obtrusive.


51









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Power Supply and

Lighting I 33.07Power Supply and Lighting:- All power outlets must be compliance with IP56 requirements.- Light fittings must be compliance with IP56 requirements.- All dosing equipment shall be hard wired.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Fill I 33.08

Fill:- Remain in dry position during periods of non operation.- To be easy to handle and clean in sections not exceeding 300mm (W) x 1830mm (L) x 300mm (D).

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Water Distribution I 33.09

Water Distribution:- Components to be removable for ease of cleaning, without needing to remove eliminators.- Must have a water meter on a supply pipe and discharge pipe, connected to BAS or other monitoring system.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Dosing Equipment I 33.10

Dosing equipment:- All cooling towers must be equipped with “Cooling Tower Dose and Bleeding Controller”.- The dosing system has to be connected to the BAS and able to send SMS alert in event of low chemical concentration in the cooling tower.- All cooling towers must be equipped with a water sampling point.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Drift Elimination I 33.11

Drift Elimination: - Modules to facilitate cleaning and maintenance. - Support system to eliminate distortion of blades.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Thermostat

Controls I 33.12 Thermostat Controls must be clearly visible in exact degrees to one decimal place.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Inlet Louvres I 33.13

Inlet Louvres must be:- Removable- Prevent splash out.- Prevent sunlight penetration to interior.- Two pass configuration installed at 90 degrees

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Cooling Towers Access I 33.14

The access must be designed in accordance with the OH& Safety Act requirements and other State and Federal regulations:- Provide ladder to top of tower.- Provide safety railing when tower is 2.60M or higher.- Provide safe access across basin area.- Provide a platform to perform service and inspection.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Water Reticulation Systems Valves I 34.01

All Valves must:- Provide appropriately located isolation and control valves to facilitate effective maintenance and operation.- Be labelled- Valves carrying thermal fluids to be insulated.- Addressable balancing valves must be used.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Water Reticulation Systems Gauges I 34.02

Provide temperature and pressure gauges on supply and return off condenser water loops. Provide temperature and pressure gauges on supply and return of:- All chilled and heating water loops.- Cooling and heating coils.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Water Reticulation Systems Water Treatment I 34.03 Ensure design facilitates treatment regime. All closed water system must

have a designated dosing pot.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Water Reticulation Systems Pumps I 34.04

Pumps must:- Be Grundfoss or approved equal - Be elected at 1440 Rpm/minimum 80% efficiency- Have motors to be sized for maximum pump impeller diameter- Be in line circulators could be selected for higher RPM.- Have condensate pumps must not be used unless a project specific “Exemption to use “has been approved by the University. Where approved, alarm monitoring and system interlocks must be provided through the BAS.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Water Reticulation Systems Humidifiers I 34.05 Must be selected to operate at highest efficiency under University Supply

water purity conditions.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Water Reticulation Systems

Water to Water Heat Exchangers I 34.06 Heat Exchangers must be Shell and Tube. Plate exchangers are not

permitted without prior approval.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Mechanical Services Noise Levels I 35

Noise levels are to be maintained as per the following table or as per the current Australian Standards and EPA Guidelines or better. Maximum internal Noise Rating (NR) :- Lecture theatres - 30 - Professorial suites, Associate Deans, training, conference and seminar rooms - 38 - Senior academic staff, academic offices, managerial offices, meeting rooms, syndicate and common rooms - 38 - Foyers, corridors, toilets and store rooms - 45


52









feedback

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC

Mechanical Services Switchboards I 36

Existing mechanical services switchboards are located in most buildings. The contractor must locate and identify the relevant MSSB at time of tender. Equipment supplied from MSSB must include (but not be limited to):- Split air-conditioning package systems supplied complete with control stations and interconnections to Fan Coil Units.- Fume cupboard exhaust fans controlled at the fume cupboards.- Ventilated storage cupboards complete with local control switches.- Make-up air fans. - Preheat systems.- Local exhaust systems.- Auto off Manual Switches and indicator lights on mechanical services switchboards to match existing (including fire alarm indication).- Contractors and thermal overloads must match existing for uniformity where practical.- All equipment associated with the mechanical services installation.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Equipment Labelling I 37 All equipment must be bar-coded. Contractors must use only the University

approved bar-coding labelling system.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Drives I 38

Drives for air conditioning systems must meet the following conditions:- Direct drive, high efficiency motors are to be specified to maximise energy efficiency.- Where belt drives are specified, high efficiency belts (‘timing belts’) are to be used in preference to standard V-belts.- Belt guards to permit view of belt for rapid maintenance inspection. - Access opening for measurement of drive speed. - Guards to be easily removable.- Equipment’ guards should be painted in bright colour (red or yellow)- Guards to provide sufficient space for maximum belt stretch.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Variable Speed Drives VSDs I 39.01 Variable speed drives (VSD) must include “High End” harmonic and RFI

filtering and must be of Danfoss or ABB manufacturer.

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Variable Speed Drives Retrofitting VSDs I 39.02

Retrofitting VSDs to include the following:- Locate as close as permissible to the driven equipment- Existing contactors must be removed- Power Isolator to be installed at and on the feed side of the VSD- Existing fire mode operation to be maintained- MSSB mounted Manual/Off/Auto rotary switch to be maintained- BAS to Alarm (Mismatch Fault) if operation is not synced at next ON/OFF cycle

Mechanical Engineer

I - HVAC Ceiling Fans Design Criteria I 8.02 Ceiling/wall fans should not exceed 35W at maximum power.

Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection General Design Principles J 01.01.01

The life cycle cost of the fire protection systems is to be considered and minimised. Fire protection systems are to be designed such that they are maintainable in an easy, safe and cost effective manner.


J - Fire Protection General Design Principles J 01.01.02 Conduits, wiring and pipes are to be concealed as not to negativity impact on

the aesthetic appearance and architecture of the buildings and campus.Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems General J 02.01.01 All Monash University owned buildings must have a fire detection system

complying with AS1670.1 installed.Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems General J 02.01.02

Fire detection systems shall be fully addressable networked system complete with graphics capable of indicating individual detectors and devices on the Campus Graphical Control Centre.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems General J 02.01.03 Whenever devices are added to a fire detection system the batteries in the

panel are to be tested and upgraded to allow for any additional load.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems General J 02.01.04

When any alteration or addition to the fire detection system is performed, documentation must be provided strictly in accordance with the relevant clauses of AS1670.1, particularly clause 7.2 documentation. This includes but is not limited to the following: - Standard Form of Installer’s Statement for Fire Alarm System in Appendix F - Commissioning Test Report in Appendix E of AS1670.1 - ASPIRE Reports for VESDA systems - Log Report (clause 7.3) - Colour Coded Block/ Zone Plans - As installed drawings.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems General J 02.01.05 In addition to the BCA and Australian standards fire detection systems are to

be designed and installed to the manufacturer's requirements.Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Design Principles J 02.02.01 Fire detection and EWIS systems are to be connected to the campus site fire

and EWIS networks.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Design Principles J 02.02.02

Off site buildings owned by Monash are to have their fire detection and EWIS panels connected into the Monash fire network via the Universitty LAN. This connection is to be non brigade calling. A local ASE is to be provided to alert the brigade.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Fire Indicator

Panels J 02.03

Fire detection system must follow the standardised system for that campus as follows: - Berwick and Clayton - Simplex 4100 Series - Caulfield and Peninsula - Edwards EST3 - Parkville - Ampac


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Detectors J 02.04.01

Detectors must be: - Addressable - Indicating - Of a type that meets the fire panel manufacturer’s specifications - Certified to the relevant Australian Standards for performance and compatibility with the fire panel


53









feedbackFire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Detectors J 02.04.02 Smoke alarms are not to be used. Detector with sounder bases are

acceptable.



For refurbishments, in the event that the existing detectors are not addressable, the fire zones affected by the refurbishment will be converted to addressable detection. Where more than 30% of a conventional detector zone is being modified the entire zone is to be updated to system compatible addressable devices and the fire panel modified to suit.



Detectors for the Caulfield and Peninsula campuses where they are the existing Ziton addressable detectors are to be upgraded to the most technologically up to date addressable detectors for the Edwards EST3 panel.



Maintenance access is to be provided to concealed detectors. Concealed space detectors are to be provided with remote indicators and famco brackets.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Detectors J 02.04.06 Detector bases must be of a type that is interchangeable between different

types of detectors.



The use of beam detectors instead of smoke detectors in high ceiling areas such as atriums is to be considered to improve maintenance access and safety. The beam transmitter and receiver are to be located to provide low risk maintenance access.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Detectors Library J 02.04.08 After hours library book returns located within a building are to be of 2 hour

fire rated construction and be fitted with a smoke detector.Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Interfaces J 02.05.01 Mechanical Services Switchboards that have a fire mode are to auto reset

upon fire alarm reset.Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Interfaces J 02.05.02 Fire detection systems are to have a high level interface to the BAS and a low

level alarm interface to security.Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems VESDA Systems J 02.06.01 Aspirating smoke detectors such as VESDA are to be programmed so the

sensitivity suits the environment and not cause false alarms.Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems VESDA Systems J 02.06.02 Aspirating smoke detectors must be Xtralis.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems VESDA Systems J 02.06.03 Fire detection plans are to include the location of the control unit, filters, pipe

work and sampling points of aspirating smoke detectors.Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems VESDA Systems J 02.06.04 VESDA ASPIRE calacultations are to be provided with the as built

documentation and placed in the FIP.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems

Programing Syntax (Clayton Only)

J 02.07

The programming labelling requirement for the Clayton fire system must include the building name, floor, wing (if applicable), room number and zone number.

Node Name:<<Building name>> (Node<<none number>>) e.g., Robert Menzies/Arts (Node 11)Description:BLD <<building number>> <<floor number>>FLR <<wing (if applicable)>> RM<<room number>> AZF<<zone number>> PS or FS or MV (if applicable)eg, BLD11 GNDFLR WEST RM10 AZF10Point type:VERIFIED SMOKE DETECTOR etc (program defined).The acceptable abbreviations are as follows:GND =Ground, 1ST= First Floor, 2ND = Second Floor, 3RD = Third Floor, etc.FLR = floorWST = West Wing, or EST = East Wing, STH = South WingRM =Room, 143=ROOM 143

PS = Pressure SwitchFS = Flow SwitchMV = Monitor Valve

All proposed programming changes are to be approved by the fire control room.



Fire Detection Systems Graphic Systems

J 02.08.01For all fire detection system changes the head end graphics is to updated/ modified. Graphics are to include a site plan, building zone plan(s) and isolation screen.



Fire Detection Systems Graphic Systems

J 02.08.02 Fire detection systems must not be placed on-line/operational until the relevant changes have been updated to all graphics terminals.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Fire Network

Changes J 02.09.01

Works on the fire detection system network including panel programming must be prior approved by Buildings and Property Services Operations. Access to the network will need to be booked. During busy periods the lead time can be weeks. Contact Buildings and Property Services Operations for more information.


J - Fire Protection Fire Detection Systems Fire Network

Changes J 02.09.02Connection of new Fire Indicator Panels onto the network will only take place when the new installation has been reviewed and deemed acceptable and compliant by Buildings & Property Operations.


J - Fire Protection

Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System J 03 Sprinkler, hydrant and hose reel test drains are to be installed. Test drains

are to flow into water harvesting infrastructure.


54









feedbackFire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection

Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System Water Supply J 03.01.01 The fire services are to come off the dedicated campus fire main where one

exists. Fire Protection Engineer

J - Fire Protection

Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System Water Supply J 03.01.02

Power supplies for pump sets and associated controls that provide water into a campus wide fire main that supplies a large number of buildings is to be provided with standby backup power.


J - Fire Protection

Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System

Automatic Sprinkler Systems J 03.02.01

Automatic sprinkler systems must be designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with the BCA and relevant Australian Standards including AS2118.


J - Fire Protection



Pressure switches must be micro switch type with a pressure range of up to 2000 kPa. Pressure switches must provide the following functions: - Start jacking pump - Start booster pump - Provide ancillary alarm via the FIP


J - Fire Protection



Sprinkler heads are to be placed so they can be easily maintained. Concealed heads must be easily accessible; maintenance access is to be provided. Especially in ceiling spaces, lift shafts and service risers as applicable.


J - Fire Protection



Other than accommodation units and building void spaces, Ordinary Hazard shall be the minimum grade of sprinkler protection. Light Hazard grade shall not be used.


J - Fire Protection


Automatic Sprinkler Systems J 03.02.05 Quick response sprinklers are to be used when protecting spaces to the

Ordinary Hazard grade.


J - Fire Protection


Automatic Sprinkler Systems Library J 03.02.06

Library stack areas greater than 100m2 in sprinkler protected buildings are to be protected to a minimum standard of Extra Hazard Grade 1. Library smaller stack spaces and reading areas are to be protected to a minimum standard of Ordinary Hazard Grade 3.


J - Fire Protection


Automatic Sprinkler Systems Labs J 03.02.07 Laboratories with chemicals are to be protected to a minimum standard of

Ordinary Hazard Grade 3 Special in sprinkler protected buildings.


J - Fire Protection

Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System Hydrant Systems J 03.03

Hydrant systems must: - Be designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with the BCA and relevant Australian Standards including AS2419.1. - External hydrants to have full bollard protection. - The location of internal hydrants is to be in accordance with the BCA, Australian Standards and the local fire fighting authority but preferably in the stairwell areas of the building. - All hydrants to be provide with ‘storz’ couplings or in accordance with the local fire fighting authority. - Hydrant standpipes must be dual head type.


J - Fire Protection

Fire Hydrant & Sprinkler System Hose Reels J 03.04

Hose reels must: - Be designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with the BCA and relevant Australian Standards including AS2441. - Be fitted with a shut off device to allow isolation and removal of the hose reel. Do not install layflat fire hoses. - Swinging hose reels to be used where hose reel cupboard or cabinet requires such to achieve clearance accesses. - Fire hose reels are to draw from the dedicated hydrant system where available within the building.


J - Fire Protection


Hose Reels cabinets J 03.05

Hose reel cabinets:· Where hose reel cupboards are not provided, must be finished in red with appropriate signage. · External hose reel cabinets are to be fitted with lockable lever handles.


J - Fire Protection

Gas Suppression Systems J 04

Gas suppression systems must use an alternative to ozone depleting substances by using retardants such as Novec 1230 or inert gases suited to the applications.


J - Fire Protection Fire Extinguishers J 05

Fire extinguishers and blankets must be designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with the BCA and relevant Australian Standards including AS1841 & AS2444.


J - Fire Protection Fire Extinguishers

Wet Chemical Extinguishing System

Kitchen/ Kitchenettes J 05.01

Where commercial kitchens are present in buildings without automatic sprinkler protection, and where the cooking range includes a deep fat fryer, provide a pre-engineered package wet chemical type automatic special extinguishing system arranged to discharge across the cooking surfaces below the kitchen range hood and interlocked to shut-down the gas supply to the kitchen ranges.


J - Fire Protection

Emergency Warning & Intercommunication System (EWIS)

General J 06.01.01

All University owned buildings shall have an EWIS complying with AS1670.4 and shall: - Use cone speakers. Horn speakers are only to be used in areas that can’t be easily covered by cone speakers. - Have the amplifiers and batteries upgraded to suit whenever devices are added onto a system. - Be utilised for crisis public announcements. - Connected and fully commissioned onto the CERPS system on the clayton campus. - Utilise WIPs on the Clayton and Caulfield campuses as emergency phones.


J - Fire Protection


General J 06.01.02

When any alterations or additions to the Emergency Warning and Intercommunication System is performed, documentation must be provided in strict accordance with the relevant clauses of AS1670.4, particularly clause 6.4 Documentation. This includes, but is not limited to the following: - Standard Form of Installer’s Statement for Sound System and Intercom System for emergency purposes; - Commissioning Test Report in appendix E of AS1670.4;. - Log Report (clause 7.3); - As installed drawings


55









feedback


J - Fire Protection


EWIS Panel J 06.02

The EWIS must follow the standardised system for that campus as follows: - Simplex QE90 (Clayton) - Ziton (Caulfield & Peninsula) - Ampac EV3000 (Berwick) - QE90 (Parkville)


J - Fire Protection


Emergency Telephones J 06.03

The WIP phones for the Clayton and Caulfield campuses are to be connected to the campus emergency phone system. (WIPs call security when lifted outside evacuation mode.)


J - Fire Protection


CERPS – Central Emergency Response Phone System (Clayton Campus Only)

J 06.04.01

The Clayton campus uses the QE90 EWIS system to perform crisis public announcements and emergency phone duties. The QE90 EWIS panels are linked through an intricate network of switching nodes via data and audio buses. Due to the complexity of the network and restrictions on configurations and cable lengths Simplex (Tyco) need to be consulted for design assessment when adding to this system. When the EWIS panel is set to auto the WIPs will ring a WIP in the security control room.


J - Fire Protection


CERPS – Central Emergency Response Phone System (Clayton Campus Only)

J 06.04.02

Warden present switches mounted on an engraved metal plate are to be installed adjacent to all WIPs on the Clayton campus. These switches are used to indicate the presence of a warden. Refer to the campus Essential Services Technical Officer for the standard plate and key switch arrangement. An additional cable pair will be required at all WIP phones above the standard WIP wiring to connect the warden present switch into the system. The panel WIP fault lights are used as a warden presence indicator activated by the corresponding WIP warden present switch. WIP faults will be initially indicated by the fire phone system fault light. To determine which WIP is in fault, a Show WIP Fault button when pressed will use the WIP presence indicator lights to indicate the faulty WIP.


J - Fire Protection


EWIS Graphic Systems J 06.05

For all EWIS changes the contractor is to update/ modify all computer head end graphics (where computer installed), relevant drawings, schedules, and signage to reflect the alterations and additions. EWIS panels must not be placed on-line/operational until the relevant changes have been updated to all graphics terminals.


J - Fire Protection


EWIS / CERP Network Changes J 06.06

Works on the EWIS network are to be prior approved by Buildings and Property Services Operations at least five business days’ prior to the works commencing. Works must be carried out in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and by suitably trained and well experienced technicians. Connection of new EWIS Panels onto the network will only take place when the new installation has been reviewed and deemed acceptable and compliant by Monash Buildings and Property Services Operations.


J - Fire Protection Testing & Certification J 07

On completion of the installation works, provide independent certification in accordance with Authority requirements that all works have been inspected and tested and comply with regulations and standards including copies of all essential services certifications and any commissioning reports. Copies of the compliance certification shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.


J - Fire Protection

Operation & Maintenance

Operating & Maintenance Manual

J 08.01

Provide Operating and Maintenance Manuals including: - Description of the systems; - Equipment lists - Operating instructions for systems and equipment - Manufacturer's Maintenance instructions for all equipment - Spare parts list with manufacturer and catalogue no. - Copies of documentation in accordance with the relevant standards. - Copies of commissioning records. - Copies of all test and approval certificates. - Copies of the independent certification. - Copies of as-installed drawings.


J - Fire Protection

Operation & Maintenance

Documentation Update J 08.02

The contractor is to update all existing as installed documentation including: - As installed drawings in the panel or plant room. - As installed drawings in the maintenance essential safety measures folders. - Zone block plans. - Circuit layout drawings - Schedules - Head end computer graphics where installed.


J - Fire Protection

Operation & Maintenance DLP J 08.03

For new systems the regulatory required maintenance as per the occupancy permit or certificate of final inspection is to be carried out in the defect liability period including the annual routines.


J - Fire Protection

Operation & Maintenance DLP J 08.04 Evidence of maintenance and the annual system condition report as per

AS1851 is required at the end of the defects liability period.


J - Fire Protection

Operation & Maintenance Asset Register J 08.05

Provide update to University asset registers to the Monash University standard and format for the addition and removal of assets: - Fire Detection systems - EWIS systems - Sprinkler systems, - Fire Hydrants & Hose Reel systems - Portables - Fire Compartmentation (fire/smoke doors, pentrations etc)

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical General Design Principles K 01.01

The life cycle cost of the electrical systems is to be considered and minimised. Electrical systems are to be designed such that they are maintainable in an easy, safe and cost effective manner.


56









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Electricity Supply K 02

Adequacy of supply must be assessed prior to proceeding with any electrical design. Point of supply approval is required by Building and Property, Planning. An increase in the maximum demand above that allowed by the power authority is to be requested and approved by the power authority as part of the design.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Metering Metering Density K 03.01

Metering is to be provided at each building to enable effective monitoring of the energy use throughout the building. Metering and submetering is to be provided for: - LV side of each transformer - Each building's incoming supply - Each tenancy - Mechanical services - Substantive energy users (140A or greater) within the building - Separate monitoring of lighting and general power consumption for primary areas (per floor) greater than 200m2. - On generator backed up supplies so to indicate the total demand/load on the generator. This meter must indicate load under normal power and backup power situations.

2

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Metering Meter

Requirements K 03.02.01

Meters must be: - IEC Class 1 approved - IEC Class 0.5 accuracy for 800A and above - WF Energy Controls extended range type CTs with accuracy of AS60044.1 Class 0.5S or approved equivalent - Capable of measuring Voltage (V), Current (A), Energy (kWhr), Power (kW), Total reactive power (KVAr), Total apparent power (kVA), Power Factor (%), total harmonic distortion (THD) and maximum demand (kW) - Backlit 6 digit display for reading V, A , kW, kW, kVAr, kVA, PF% and Max demand kW - Installed with potential fuses and test block.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Metering Meter

Requirements Tenancy K 03.02.02 All tenancies are to be sub metered. The submeter must be current Australian Government National Measurements Institute pattern approved.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Metering Meter Networking K 03.03.01

All metering must be networked to the University’s BAS (see Section K: Appendix - Electrical - Item K1): - Via a BACnet IP interface, (BACnet capable meters or meters connected via modbus, to a BACnet IP interface) - A dedicated controller router must not be shared with other building controls such as HVAC. - Communicate via an appropriate BTL listed controller router with existing University BAS systems via native BACnet/IP. The controller router must utilise the University’s ethernet network. - Device names and metering values named using the Monash University standard naming convention (Campus, Building Number/Name/Address, Location/Plant, Point/Device name) - All BACnet points must follow the University’s BAS naming conventions as described in the University BAS standards. - Must have the flexibility to be updated on any of the university’s BAS systems (Andover, Alerton, Tridium), using a university appointed BAS service contractor.

Section K: Appendix - Electrical - Item K1

Electrical Engineer


The meter monitoring must be: - Setup with trend logs and graphics - Capable of reporting all meters types on a single graph i.e. electricity meter vs gas meter vs water meter. - Able to display meter trend logs vs plant trend logs. i.e. mechanical meter vs VSD speed. - Able to display at least 5 trend logs on the same graph with each trend log assigned a selectable colour and graph scale with selectable unlimited time period. - Graphs and reporting to be user configurable. - With at least 30 days of data stored at local controller router level, with extended logging exported to an open SQL database, providing at least 2 years FIFO. Using maximum 15 minute intervals of logged values.

Electrical Engineer


Following installation all meters must be empirically calibrated and all relevant measurements including CT ratios, kWh/pulse and meter programs forwarded to the university BAS administrator.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Metering Meter Networking K 03.03.04 Single line diagrams of the installed metering network must be generated and

forwarded to university BAS administrator.

Electrical Engineer


Where building energy display screens are required, a scrolling display must be provided. 4 pages displaying live building electricity, gas and water consumption and a page highlighting environmental initiatives such as rain water harvesting. Each page must compare current period to an older period i.e. this week’s consumption vs last weeks consumption and/or this month’s consumption compared to last month’s consumption.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical High Voltage High Voltage

Cable K 04.01

High voltage cabling must be: - 3 core copper XLPE insulated cable rated to the appropriate voltage. - Sized to allow for sufficient load growth in the high voltage rings. Generally not less than 30%. - High voltage rings must be able to support the entire ring load in either direction. - Buried to a minimum of 900 mm. - Minimum of 2 x 150 mm (1 used, 1 spare) and 50 mm (comms/SCADA) conduits per underground run. - Comply with AS2067, AS1125, AS1429 & AS3863


57









feedback

Electrical Engineer


Cable Testing K 04.02

For HV Cable as a minimum the following tests must be carried out at commissioning: - Continuity and phase sequence - to prove all conductors are continuous throughout length of cable and to check phase identification. - Sheath Integrity – to check for damage to outer sheaths - Insulation resistance – to check insulation resistance and pick up major problems with cable. - HV VLF or HV DC - to detect manufacturing, installation or workmanship defects in the cable. - Test results are to be included in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical High Voltage Ring Main Units K 04.03

HV switchgear is to comply with AS2067, AS2650 & AS62271. HV switchgear has been standardised to the Schneider RM6 complete with Sepam protection relays. Ring Main Units must be of modular design complete with: - Internal Arc Protection (Minimum AF classification), - Cable routes via Bottom Entry and Bottom Exit, - Live High Voltage parts to be have minimum IP rating of IP67, - Fitted with DC control circuits, - Minimum of 2 off motorised cable isolators and 2 off transformer feeder circuit breakers. - Cable isolators to be minimum rating of 630A, - Circuit breakers to be minimum rating of 200A, - Transformer feeder circuit breakers to have motor operated, fast acting, stored energy operating mechanisms powered by the substation DC auxiliary supply system and to be controllable by the local control panel and SCADA system, - Cable isolator switches to have motor operated, fast acting, stored energy operating mechanisms powered by the substation DC auxiliary supply system and to be controllable by the local control panel and SCADA system, - Position indicators for each circuit breaker and cable isolator switch, - Earth switches provided for all feeders, located on the cable side of functional device, - Voltage Presence Indicating System (VPIS) for each circuit breaker and cable isolator switch, - Functional key interlocks to prevent closing of live equipment to earth and opening of the dry type transformer enclosure while equipment is live. - Protection relays and CTs for each circuit breaker - SEPAM protection relays - Extensible at least at one end. - Surge arrestors provided for each cable feeder panel. - The nameplate must provide the Purchaser's name, Order number, manufacturer’s name, Item tag number, Year of manufacturer, Rating information such as voltage, current, frequency, short circuit, insulation level, impulse level, IP rating etc. - Identification labels must be attached to each removable cover/door of the switchboard to identify an internal CT turns ratio, class and rating.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical High Voltage Ring Main Units

Testing K 04.04

All HV switchgear must be tested in accordance with all relevant Australian Standards including: - Insulation and contact resistance testing - Secondary protection system and trips - Mechanism functional tests including any remote tripping

Electrical Engineer


Transformers K 04.05

High Voltage Transformers must be: - Cast resin dry type with copper windings. - Oil type when installed externally. - Transformers must be naturally cooled (AN – Air Natural) and able to perform continuously without assisted means in the design enclosure. - Minimum of 11 taps +10% to 5% (in 2.5% increments) - Suitably sized generally 2 MVA to supply the maximum demands of the loads with an allowance for 30% spare capacity (unless otherwise instructed). - Must have the capability (above the spare capacity) to deliver power at 20% overload for a period of two (2) hours in each twenty-four (24) hour period. - Alarms to be connected to the SCADA were available or the BAS system. - Surge arrestors must be provided at the HV terminals for each transformer feeder cable. - Enclosure key interlocked with the HV switch to prevent access while equipment is live. - Comply with AS2067, AS2374 & AS3953

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical High Voltage

High Voltage Transformers Testing

K 04.06

Transformers must be tested and commissioned in accordance with all relevant Australian Standards including: - Insulation resistance testing - Alarm (temperature, fan, etc.) and interface system testing - DGA, acidity, water content, dielectric strength and resistivity testing of oil for oil transformers. - Secondary protection system and trips - Mechanism functional tests including any remote tripping

Electrical Engineer


Battery Banks K 04.07.01

The substation DC supply system shall provide the DC supply requirements for: - Protection Circuits, - Control Circuits, - Switchgear trip and closed circuits and motors, - Indications and alarms, - SCADA system and RTU, - Other applications as required.


58









feedback

Electrical Engineer


Battery Banks K 04.07.02

Substation DC supply systems must: - Be enclosed in a steel cabinet of adequate design for the intended purpose including access to batteries for maintenance. - Have valve regulated, sealed lead-acid recombination cell type battery banks with a minimum design life of 10 years. - Be rated to supply the full substation DC load allowing for additional 50% future load for a 24 hour period with battery charger out of service. - Allow for one operation of every switch and circuit breaker supplied within the 24 hour period with the battery charger out of service. - Lifting handles provided for components in excess of 5 kg.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical High Voltage Substations K 04.08.01 Sufficent access to be provided to substation for the serving and replacement

of equipment.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical High Voltage Substations K 04.08.02

Indoor substations are to be provided with adequate ventilation/cooling to ensure the operation of the equipment. Appripriate filtering is to be provided to reduce the buid up of dust and dirt on equipment.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical High Voltage As Installed

Documentation K 04.09.01 The HV Operation and Maintenance procedure is to be updated.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical High Voltage As Installed

Documentation K 04.09.02 The HV system single line diagram is to be updated and copies mounted in each substation.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

High Voltage SCADA System K 05

The HV SCADA system applies to Monash owned high voltage infrastructure on the Clayton campus only. The HV SCADA control and monitoring system must: - Provide unmanned operation and control of the high voltage system - Support distributed processing architecture, be modular and suitable for future modular expansion (open architecture type with propensity of addition of new boards), - Be programmable and use an industry standard real time multitasking operating system, - Be capable of being used as a stand-alone system for the substation equipment, - Monitor and control, and at the same time integrate with the existing SCADA Master System on site, - Support PC (laptop) interface to the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) for configuration and diagnostic and local Human Machine Interface (HMI) functions emulation, - Capable of monitoring, supervision and control of substation switchgear and ancillaries, while ensuring a minimum number of hardwired cable signals from the field to the RTU, - Capable of protection relay setting download and modification, - Capable of alarm handling, reporting and recording and downloading of alarm and disturbance records, - Notification of alarms via BAS - Fans or electro-mechanical cooling devices must not be used in the RTUs, - Measure, record, store and retrieval of demand data for transformers and cables. - Secure interface with the BAS/BMS system for the transmission of alarms, equipment status and load data. - BAS/BMS must be configured to provide an alert to maintenance staff of critical alarms.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

High Voltage SCADA System Architecture K 05.01

The architecture of the SCADA system must consist of: - Server PC and HMI PC located in the main intake substation, - SCADA system network cable reticulated to each substation, - Local intelligent electrical devices IED/RTUs located in each substation, - Local control panels in each substation.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

High Voltage SCADA System

SCADA Backbone Cable K 05.02 The SCADA backbone cabling must be a single mode 8 core fibre terminated

into the fibre optic patch frame in each substation.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

High Voltage SCADA System Substations K 05.03.01

A suitably sized and IP rated SCADA communications rack must be provided in each substation to house the: - Fibre optic patch frame which is connected to the backbone cable, - 12 port Ethernet switch, - Substation RTU & IEDs, - Space for future active equipment for other monitoring or controlled services (such as BMS, Security, Fire Services Monitoring and the like).

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


RTUs must act as a gateway for all substation signals (including from the IED’s within the substation) and also present all these signals on screens and alarm and event lists at the Intake Substation HMI.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


All data is to be processed where it is generated. The substation RTUs/IEDs are to be fully capable of receiving and processing signals, performing the required tasks and relaying the information through the network to the SCADA server.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


All RTUs/IEDs devices must conduct their protection, control and measurement functions in a real time environment and must be capable of communicating with the existing SCADA system at the HV intake Substation.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

High Voltage SCADA System Substations K 05.03.05 RTUs/IEDs must be capable of being taken out of service without disrupting

other RTUs/IEDs and the overall system.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


All signals and alarms from the HV equipment must be hard wired to the substation RTU and connected to the HV intake substation SCADA system via the SCADA system network.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


The signals and alarms for substation ancillary services such as AC and DC supply systems, room pressurising systems, fire systems etc. must also be hard wired to the substation RTU and connected to the HV intake substation SCADA system via the SCADA network.


59









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


Local Control Panel K 05.04

An be adequately ventilated IP51 rated local control and monitoring panel must be installed in each substation; - To enable the operator to control all RMU switchgear within the substation and - Allow signals to be used for remote monitoring and operation via the campus SCADA system. - Local/ Remote switch or circuit breaker Open/ Close functions, - Switch or circuit breaker open green indicator light - Switch or circuit breaker closed red indicator light - Earth switch closed white indicator light - Transformer high temperature yellow indicating light - Indicating lights, pushbuttons, control switches, relays and indicating equipment appropriately labelled.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


Testing & Commissioning K 05.05 The SCADA system is to be full function tested with all points, alarms, data,

interfaces, controls etc. tested.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Switchboards K 06

All switchboards, switchgear and control gear is to be designed and installed in accordance with all relevant Australian Standards including but not limited to: - AS 1243 - AS 2184 - AS 3111 - AS 3133 - AS 3190 - AS 3439 - AS 3947 - AS 4506 - AS 60269 - AS 60044

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Switchboards Main

Switchboards K 06.01.01

Main switchboards must be designed: - To mitigate against the occurrence of internal arcing faults - Have bus bars and switchgear that withstand a short circuit current for 1 second from its respective supply. - Bus bars sized to the initial load plus 30% - Provided with 10% spare circuit breakers and 20% spare circuit breaker space. - Form 4 segregation for a designed max. demand ≥1600A - Form 3B segregation for a designed max. demand <1600A - Form 2 segregation for a designed max. demand <800A - Form 1 segregation with shrouded incoming terminals where max. demand is <400A and is the only switchboard for the building.

Electrical Engineer


Switchboards K 06.01.02A full set of shop drawings are to be submitted to the Services Consultant and the Buildings and Property Division Planning department for approval prior to construction.

Electrical Engineer


Switchboards K 06.01.03 Doors to the switchboard room or cupboard are to be labelled ‘Main Switchboard’ or ‘Main Distribution Board’ depending on classification.


60









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Switchboards

Main Switchboards Construction

K 06.02

Main switchboard must be constructed by experienced manufacturer's and construction must: - Controls segregated in own compartment. - IP43 protection for internally installed switchboards and IP54 or above to suit conditions for external switchboards. - Allow for easy future extension of busbars without drilling or cutting. - Cubicles designed for ease of access both for initial installation, wiring and testing and for maintenance, removal and replacement of equipment and wiring during the life of the installation. - Divided into a logical layout for quick recognition of functional groups. - Mild steel construction unless other materials, e.g. stainless steel are required. Panels must be furniture grade sheet. Thickness must be adequate to prevent distortion and to withstand the effect of faults. - External/Weatherproof switchboards must be marine-grade corrosion-resistant aluminium or 3CR12 corrosion-resisting steel construction and fitted with a sloped roof extending over the door. Gutters must be formed around door openings. - Rear access to cubicles must be provided by doors or removable panels. - Doors are to be hung on heavy duty lift off hinges with stainless steel pins. Each door to be fitted with a recessed or flush type lever handle. A vertical locking bar system with guides for top and bottom fastenings is to be provided on all doors greater than 1000mm in height. - All door hardware to contain cylinder locks keyed to CL-001 keys. Provide two keys per lock. - Escutcheon plates and panels are to be hinged and removable with chromium plated 'D' lifting handles to assist in lifting off hinges. - Removable panels must be supplied with suitable lifting handles and captive knurl-headed fixing screws. - Heaters with thermostatic control must be mounted in the bottom of cubicles to prevent condensation in adverse environments and where exposed to weather. - Provide ventilation louvres with internal brass mesh screens to prevent entry of insects. - Cubicles are to be painted white internally and electrical orange X15 externally. All steel work must be thoroughly degreased and surface smoothed, treated with rust proofing primer and undercoat and finished with two coats of semi-gloss acrylic lacquer or equal. - Custom colours maybe considered where the switchboard is installed outside or in an open area to fit in with the surrounding aesthetics. Custom colours will require prior approval from the Facilities and Services, Planning. - Where combination fuse switches (CFS) are used, three spare cartridges of each type and rating are to be provided. Ensure units are capable of clearly displaying on/off mode and interlocked safely with the switchboard door. - Current transformers must be able to be removed easily. - Surge protection is to be provided in accordance with AS1768.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Switchboards Distribution

Switchboards K 06.03.01Distribution switchboards must be located in circulation spaces, corridors and foyers in a secure dedicated cupboard/room, dry and free of dust, and connected to an accessible vertical riser.

Electrical Engineer


Switchboards K 06.03.02 Switchboard board cupboard doors are to be labelled ‘Switchboard’.

Electrical Engineer


Switchboards K 06.03.03 Access panels are to be provided in the ceiling near switchboards to provide ease of access for future cabling into the switchboard.


61









feedback

Electrical Engineer


Distribution Switchboards Construction

K 06.04.01

Distribution switchboards must be: - Proprietary constructed - Sized to initial load plus 25% - Provide 10% spare circuit breakers and 15% spare circuit breaker ways - Have a main isolating switch - Minimum form 1 segregation with shrouded incoming terminals. - Constructed from sheet steel of adequate thickness to prevent distortion and to withstand the effect of faults. - IP42 protection for internally installed switchboards and IP54 or above to suit conditions for external switchboards. - External/ Weatherproof switchboards must be marine-grade corrosion-resistant aluminium or 3CR12 corrosion-resisting steel construction and fitted with a sloped roof extending over the door. Gutters must be formed around door openings. - Lift off pintle hinge doors with flush type lever handles keyed to CL-001 keys. - Doors greater than 800mm high are to have three point locking. - Gland plates for top and bottom entry - Ventilation (where required) by means of louvered vents backed with fine bronze wire mesh. - Fitted with hinged and removable escutcheon. - Flush fronted equipment with only toggles, handles, indicators, dials and like equipment for operational use protruding through the front panel - Free standing cubicle type assemblies must have adjacent cubicles bolted together to provide a rigid structure. - Sheet metal segregation barriers enabling arc fault containment between adjacent compartments or cubicles where required to suit the form of construction. - Explosion vents at the top of each segregated compartment. - Minimum 10kA fault level on final sub-circuit breakers. - Use of current limiters to be minimumised. - Busbars type tested to a minimum fault level of 20kA for 0.2 sec. - Busbars sized for a maximum temperature rise of 50oC above an ambient of 40oC. - Heaters with thermostatic control must be mounted in the bottom of cubicles to prevent condensation in adverse environments and where exposed to weather. - Powder coated to BS 381C, 694 Dove Grey gloss finish or alternative A.S.K.185-1968 externally and while gloss internally. - Comply with AS3439.

Electrical Engineer



K 06.04.02

The following distribution board manufacturer's are to be used and be consistent with the existing distribution boards within the building: - Heinemann/Heinelec - NHP/Terasaki - Schneider/Merlin Gerin - Eaton/Cutler Hammer

Mechanical Engineer



K 06.04.03

Mechanical switchboard must be designed: - With at least 25% spare space in all compartments or cubicles - Busbars to be sized to the initial load plus 25%. - A shrouded and insulated incoming unit and line side terminals irrespective of Form. - Form 1 segregation for minor control panels with a supply < 400 amps - Form 2 segregation for all assemblies with a supply ≥400 amps - Minimum form 2 segregation for switchgear associated with fire and smoke control equipment. - Separate compartment for extra low voltage BMS equipment. - Comply with AS3439.


62









feedback

Mechanical Engineer


Mechanical Services Switchboards Construction

K 06.05

Mechanical Services Switchboard must be constructed by experienced mechanical services switchgear and control gear assembly manufacturer and have: - IP54 protection for internally installed switchboards and IP54 or above to suit conditions for external switchboards. - Be capable of withstanding the potential short circuit fault level at the incoming terminals. - Cubicles designed for ease of access both for initial installation, wiring and testing and for maintenance, removal and replacement of equipment and wiring during the life of the installation. - Switchgear mounted such that the 'ON/OFF' and current rating indications are clearly visible with the cover or escutcheon closed. - Mild steel construction unless other materials, e.g. stainless steel are required. Panels must be furniture grade sheet. Thickness must be adequate to prevent distortion and to withstand the effect of faults. - External/Weatherproof switchboards must be marine-grade corrosion-resistant aluminium or 3CR12 corrosion-resisting steel construction and fitted with a sloped roof extending over the door. Gutters must be formed around door openings. - Doors are to be hung on heavy duty lift off hinges with stainless steel pins. Each door to be fitted with a recessed or flush type lever handle. A vertical locking bar system with guides for top and bottom fastenings is to be provided on all doors greater than 1000mm in height. - All door hardware to contain cylinder locks keyed to CL-001 keys. Provide two keys per lock. - Escutcheon plates and panels are to be hinged and removable with chromium plated 'D' lifting handles to assist in lifting off hinges. - Removable panels must be supplied with suitable lifting handles and captive knurl-headed fixing screws. - Heaters with thermostatic control must be mounted in the bottom of cubicles to prevent condensation in adverse environments and where exposed to weather. - Provide ventilation louvres with internal brass mesh screens to prevent entry of insects. - Cubicles are to be painted white internally and electrical orange X15 externally. All steel work must be thoroughly degreased and surface smoothed, treated with rust proofing primer and undercoat and finished with two coats of semi-gloss acrylic lacquer or equal. - Custom colours maybe considered where the switchboard is installed outside or in an open area to fit in with the surrounding aesthetics. Custom colours will require prior approval from the Buildings and Property, Planning.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Switchboards Tenancies K 06.06 Tenancies are to be provied with their own dedicated switchboard. All the

tenant's services are to be supplied from this switchboard.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Switchboards Switchgear K 06.07.01

Switchgear must be: - Mounted such that the 'ON/OFF' and current rating indications are clearly visible with the cover or escutcheon closed. - Air circuit breakers ≥1600A - Moulded case breakers >100A & <1600A. - Miniature breakers ≤100A - Same manufacturer throughout an installation - Selected to achieve discrimination for the required prospective fault levels. Cascading protection is not to be used. - An approved manufacturer Eaton / Cutler-Hammer, Schneider, NHP / Terasaki or Heinemann/Heinelec

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Switchboards Switchgear K 06.07.02

Protection studies are to be carried out to confirm descrimination when upgrading switchboards / switchgear / transformers etc. The protection study is to be provided with the manuals.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Switchboards Switchgear K 06.07.03 Downstream equipment fault levels are to be checked when upgrading

electrical supply infrastructure.

Electrical Engineer


Switchgear - Residual Current Devices (RCD's)

K 06.08

Residual current devices (RCD’s) must: - Be mounted in switchboards only, - Be integrated with a miniature circuit breaker with overcurrent and short circuit current protection, - Be arranged within the switchboard so that the test button is accessible without the need to remove covers, - Not trip on power failure, - Recognise and not trip where dc leakage currents are present. - Operating time and push button tested whenever installed

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Switchboards As Installed

Documentation K 06.09.01 A single diagram is to be mounted in a protective cover in the main switchboard room.

Electrical Engineer


Documentation K 06.09.02

Switchboard manufacturer’s drawings or updates of the existing must include: - manufacturer's name and type of any standard equipment, - general arrangement of equipment, - full details of cabinet construction and dimensions, - busbar dimensions and ratings, - wiring diagrams and schematics of instrument protection and control circuits, - front elevation

Electrical Engineer


Documentation K 06.09.03A new typed switchboard schedule provided when the update would render the existing schedule unreadable or more than 30% of it changed from the original.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Low Voltage Distribution Design Principles K 07.01.01

The low voltage distribution system cabling must be selected in accordance with AS3000 and AS3008 considering: - Current-carrying capacity - Voltage drop and - Short-circuit temperature rise


63









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


Cable voltage drop must not exceed 5% and follow the below profile incorporating for spare capacity: - Building Mains – 1% - Sub mains – 1.5% - Final Sub circuit – 2.5%Where adjustments are required for additional mains or sub mains cables, the voltage drop on the final sub circuit is not to be less than 2.0%.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Low Voltage Distribution Design Principles K 07.01.03 Distribution boards are to be located at a radius of 35m maximum horizontal

distance to the furthest outlet it supplies.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


All cables must: - be adequately fixed and supported with purpose made clips, cleats or saddles, - be installed to permit adequate air circulation around each cable, - be installed between equipment without any joints, - be installed on the loop in, loop out principle without the use of connectors for sub circuit wiring, - be installed so that they can readily be withdrawn for the purposes of relocation and/or rewiring, - be installed such that they are not bent through a radius less than the minimum bending radius recommended by the manufacturer, - where installed together over parallel routes, be spaced apart to provide a gap of one cable diameter, minimum, between adjacent circuit or submain groups for mains and sub mains cabling. Cables to be de rated accordingly. - be fixed to permanent structural components of the building where the cables supply emergency circuits, such as fire services, lifts, emergency lighting, etc. Additionally, these cables must be positioned above ducts, pipes and other building components which may become dislodged and cause interference to the cables. Fixings and supports for these cables must be suitable for the required fire resistant integrity, - be spaced from telecommunication and other wiring systems, - where exposed to the sun be covered or have a UV protected sheath.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Low Voltage Distribution Mains / Sub-Mains K 07.02.01

All mains and sub mains must: - be installed over routes which have been fully co-ordinated with other services, - be identified at each end by approved labels fixed to cable sheaths or conduit and identify the cable size, type and purpose. End labels are to be installed just prior to the cable entering the switchboard. Labels are to be durable and securely fitted. - be sized for to the maximum demand plus required spare capacity (30% mains, 25% submains). - fire rated where required. - have a full size neutral.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Low Voltage Distribution Mains / Sub-Mains K 07.02.02

Cables are to be of continuous single length. Where it is necessary to divert or extend existing sub mains, all joints must be: - Approved by the Buildings and Property Division, Planning - Use a proprietary joining system, - In an approved accessible locations to enable access for thermo scanning - Within an accessible pit for any underground cable joints for thermal scanning under load - Clearly labelled to identify origin of sub mains, i.e., switchboard and circuit details together with cable size and type - Be segregated from gaseous piping systems, especially medical gases, by a minimum of 50 mm in conformance with AS 2896.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Low Voltage Distribution

Final Sub Circuit Cabling K 07.03.01

Final sub circuit must have: - A maximum of five (5) double 10A GPO’s are to be connected to any circuit. - A maximum of 10 outlets (5 doubles) connected to a 20A MCB in an air conditioned space - A maximum of 6 outlets (3 doubles) connected to a 20A MCB in a non-air conditioned space - A maximum of 4 outlets (2 doubles) connected to a 20A MCB in kitchens, serveries and tea rooms. - Dedicated circuits serving equipment rated at more than 1,000VA. - A maximum of 1 off 15A GPO to be connected to a single 20A MCB. - Multiphase switch socket outlets on their own dedicated circuit of appropriate rating. - Dedicated circuit for direct connected equipment appropriately rated. - An isolating switch adjacent to any for any direct connected equipment. - Power 2.5mm2 min. stranded - Lighting 2.5mm2 min. stranded - 4.0mm2 for circuits rated/protected at 20A - 2.5mm2 for circuits rated/protected at 16A

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


Final Sub Circuit Cabling K 07.03.02

A maximum number of lighting outlets per circuit of: - 12 outlets, 1,500VA maximum, 10A MCB - 18 outlets, 2,500VA maximum, 16A MCB - 24 outlets, 3,000VA maximum, 20A MCB

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


Final Sub Circuit Cabling K 07.03.03 Lighting and power outlets on each circuit must be adjusted to avoid RCD

nuisance tripping due to earth leakage in electronic devices.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Low Voltage Distribution Load Distribution K 07.04

Balance load over the three phases as close as possible taking into consideration equipment ratings being supplied from each point. Load is to be balanced at practical completion, once the building is fully occupied and again at the end of the Defects Liability period.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports K 08 Cable routes are to be generally in common spaces within a building (e.g.,

corridors) and supported at all times.


64









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports In-Ground Works K 08.01.01

Underground cables are to be: - Install in heavy duty rigid PVC orange conduit with the appropriate category of protection in accordance with AS3000. - Excavation in sealed surfaces must first be saw cut a minimum of 100mm wider than the trench. - Have draw wires installed in all conduits - Backfill only after the inspection of the installed conduit. - Surface reinstatement to match existing and surrounding surfaces. - Installation of cables into conduits after conduits are installed and backfilling completed. - Provided with cable pits at a maximum of 30 m intervals and at all changes in direction. - Cables required to be winched or drawn in for direct burial shall be installed by the use of cable stockings, cable rollers and cable drum supports to minimise abrasion. - Pulling stress on the cables is to be no greater than 80% of that recommended by the manufacturer.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports In-Ground Works K 08.01.02 Drill neat fitting holes in pits for conduit/pipe entries and 4 x 50 mm holes in

the bottom of the pits for the drainage purposes.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports In-Ground Works K 08.01.03

Cable pits shall be: - prefabricated units manufactured from fibrous cement. In trafficable areas pits must be of precast concrete or cast in situ concrete construction with Gatic l covers or equal to suit traffic loading in accordance with AS 3996. - Fix a 150 x 150 x 1.6 mm brass plate to the cable pit cover. - Suitably engrave the plate according to the service cables within the pit, e.g., power, security lighting, telephone, public address, computer, miscellaneous services and the like. - Pits must be sized to suit the bending radius of the cable. In particular solid pits used for straight through drawing of cables must have a minimum length equivalent to four times the minimum-bending radius of the cable.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports Conduit K 08.02

Conduit must adhere to the following conditions: - Must reduce the use of PVC materials. Use concrete HDPE, galvanised steel or aluminium as alternatives. - ‘Unless otherwise approved by the Monash University Project Manager, Coordinator, no conduit, pipes or conduit fittings must be visible on any wall, floor or ceiling surface. Contractors and consultants must investigate all options for cable reticulation to ensure that the aesthetics, appearance and architecture of the buildings and campus aren't negatively impacted’. - Conduit or piping must be installed so that wiring may be drawn in and out at any future time without damage to the building or disruption of the conduit continuity. - Conduit, deep drawn-in boxes, and couplings only must be cast in concrete. Conduit tees and elbows are not be used. - Corrugated type PVC conduit is not to be used unless specifically required to maintain flexibility at final connections to equipment or as otherwise approved in writing by the Facilities and Services Asset Planning. - Flexible PVC or metallic conduit must only be used to enclose final connections to permanently connected equipment, equipment that vibrates, or to equipment that must be moved for inspection purposes. - Where subject to mechanical damage, exposure to weather or damp conditions, or to ambient or contact temperatures exceeding 60°C, conduit must be galvanized screwed steel. - Conduits must be installed in a manner which will not necessitate penetration or permit the entry or moisture to any portion of the building. - Designed to permit ease of draw through of cables. - Avoid compromising damp proofing of structure. - When conditions could compromise integrity of conduit and cabling, use galvanised screwed steel.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports Cable Ladders &

Trays K 08.03.01

Cable trays & ladders must: - Be sized with at least 50% spare capacity for future additions. - Be of corrosion resistant finish, pressed and folded zincalume finish or galvanised sheet steel. The design must comprise a ventilated rib with side rail and folded edges. Standard perforated cable trays are only acceptable for switchboard work. - Use cable trays where supports are closely spaced to support smaller cables and cable ladders where supports are more widely spaced to support groups of larger cables - Install cable ladder and trays in accordance with manufacturer's providing substantial supports comprising plain or angle mounting brackets of galvanised steel, Unistrut or similar, fixed to walls or floors or suspended from structure where applicable. - The support system is to be positioned to give adequate access for inspecting, replacing, or adding cables. - Cables are to be installed neatly, generally to one side to allow as much free space as possible for future cabling. - Provide removable covers consisting of folded zincanneal finish sheet steel where ladders and trays are exposed in public areas.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports Cable Ladders &

Trays K 08.03.02 All mains and sub mains cables are to be supported by cable tray or ladder. Final sub circuits are to be supported by cable tray along main runs.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports Cable Support

Fixings K 08.04.01

All fixings adopted must be - An approved type and pattern. - Form neatly all fixings holes in concrete or brickwork to a depth equal to the length of plug to be used, excluding plaster or other soft cladding finish. Fixings must not be into joints between brick or block work. Size all load bearing fixings of appropriate size for the anticipated load plus a 50% safety factor. All fixings must be corrosion resistant to suit their installed location and must be the same or of more noble material, in order that they will not corrode.


65









feedback

Electrical Engineer


Fixings K 08.04.02

Fixing and support materials must be as a minimum: - electro galvanised where used indoors and not exposed to weather or corrosive atmospheres - hot dip galvanised or stainless steel where used in locations exposed to weather - stainless steel where used in locations exposed to corrosive atmospheres.

Electrical Engineer


Fixings K 08.04.03All supports must: - have threaded rod hangers,- have galvanised steel brackets,- be approved and suitable for the intended purpose.

Electrical Engineer


Fixings K 08.04.04

All nuts and bolts must: - have heads which are hexagonal in shape,- be provided with suitable washers,- have metric threads,- be of length that when tightened to correct tension, will show at least one full thread

Electrical Engineer


Fixings K 08.04.05

Fixings that rely on a propellant system such as gas or air pressure may be used subject to: - compliance with the manufacturer’s installation methods, - the extent of damage to building substrates and the capability to remove fixings and make good substrates are equivalent to drilled fixings.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports Skirting Ducts K 08.05

Skirting ducts must:- incorporate separate compartments for power and data cables minimum 3 compartments;- an extruded aluminium body;- a drop in rust proof steel lid;- powder coated or clear anodised finish protecting exposed surfaces;- internal isolation shrouds for power outlets;- Use Moduline 3 compartment T series 50/150 or approved equal.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports Floor Boxes K 08.06

Floor boxes must be:- flush mounted as not to create a trip hazard;- sized to suit the number of connections required;- easy and straightforward lid operation;- lid designed to prevent damage to exiting cables and injury to fingers;- lid and frame able to withstand constant operation and heavy traffic load.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports Cable

Terminations K 08.07 All cable terminations must be accessible throughout the installation.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Cable Supports Electromagnetic

Interference K 08.08

The university has facilities that a sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI). The main areas of concern are:- Building 81 and the surrounding area Clayton campus.- Areas of buildings 75, 82 and the surrounding area Clayton campus.The users of these facilities must be consulted when proposing to do works that may provide additional EMI to these areas. The use of additional EMI control measures may be required.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories K 09

Outlets and accessories must be:- Clipsal Series 2000 flush mount.- Clipsal 56 series for three phase- Labelled designating circuit and switchboard number- Clipsal IP56 protected in plant rooms- Mounted not less than 300mm above finished floor level.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Minimum Outlet

Requirements Offices K 09.01.01 Single/shared and open plan offices must have a minimum of 3 double GPO's per office with at least 2 double GPO's per desk.

Electrical Engineer


RequirementsLecture Theatre / Tutorial

K 09.01.02

Lecture and tutorial rooms must have:- A minimum of 3 double GPO's placed with consideration of the teaching position.- A double GPO on either side of the screen- Additional as required for the AV equipment

Electrical Engineer


Requirements Labs K 09.01.03 Power outlets shall be provided to suit the user requirements.

Electrical Engineer


Requirements Labs K 09.01.04

Laboratory emergency stop buttons are to be fitted in accordance with AS2243.7. Where an emergency laboratory isolation button to isolate power is to be provided the resetting and re-energisation of the power circuits must only be able after an appropriately qualified person has determined that it is safe to do so.

Electrical Engineer


Requirements Labs K 09.01.05 Outlets connected to a UPS or generator backup power must be a red coloured outlet.

Electrical Engineer


RequirementsComputer Laboratory K 09.01.06

Computer labs must have: - A minimum of 3 double GPOs between 2 workstations - Additional outlets to service support equipment such as printers.

Electrical Engineer


Requirements

Conference, Seminar and Meeting Rooms

K 09.01.07In conference, Seminar and Meeting rooms place GPO’s around the perimeter of the room to allow the use of audio visual equipment and presentation / display apparatuses.

Electrical Engineer


Requirements Toilets K 09.01.08

In toilets and showers place: - One double GPO adjacent to the vanity - Electric hand dryer GPO adjacent to unit or hardwired as required. A labelled isolator is to be mounted at high level for hardwired units. Dryers to be on individual circuits.

Electrical Engineer


RequirementsCleaners Room K 09.01.09 For cleaners rooms/ cupboards, provide at least one double GPO in an easily

accessible locationElectrical Engineer


RequirementsPlant Room/ Enclosure K 09.01.10 Provide at least one suitably IP rated double GPO in an easily accessible

location in each plant room.


66









feedback

Electrical Engineer


RequirementsCommunications Rooms K 09.01.11

Provide in communication rooms power outlets: - Dedicated switchboard - Outlets to suit eSolutions requirements. - Outlets around the room to serve service equipment. - "do not turn off" labels on outlets as required - UPS to eSolutions requirements.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Dishwashers K 09.02 GPO mounted adjacent to dishwasher with flush control switch labelled

"DISHWASHER" to isolate.Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Drinking Units K 09.03 Accessible GPO mounted adjacent to unit labelled "DRINKING UNIT". GPO

to be IP54 if mounted behind drinking unit. Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Boiling Water

Units K 09.04 Boiling water unit GPO to be mounted adjacent to unit on the same side as the cable entry into the unit.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Hand Dryer K 09.05 Electric hand driers are to use high velocity air rather than electric heating

elements.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Toilet Exhaust

Fans K 09.06Toilet exhaust fans are to be controlled by the BAS system. If no BAS is available then control by the light switch is required. Wire to lighting circuit and provide weatherproof isolator adjacent to motor. Make final connection in flexible conduit.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Kitchen Hood

Exhaust Fans K 09.07 Provide weatherproof isolator adjacent to motor and make final connection in flexible conduit.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Ceiling Fans K 09.08 Wire ceiling fans to local lighting circuit.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Roller Shutter

Doors K 09.09 For roller shutter doors provide a weatherproof isolator adjacent to motor and make final connection in flexible conduit.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Mechanical Plant K 09.10 Provide mechanical plant such as AHU, split systems, pumps etc. that require

power with locally mounted and labelled isolators.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Outlets & Accessories Cleaners Outlets K 09.11

Cleaner outlets shall be provided: - In each teaching space, lecture theatre and lab allowing for the entire area can be serviced from a 10m lead. - Appropriately spaced in open plan offices allowing for the entire area to be serviced from a 10m lead. Single or shared offices should be served from cleaners outlets in corridors. - Provide cleaners outlets in corridors at no more than 20m intervals and in suitable locations to ensure service to all single or shared offices. - Wired to a dedicated cleaner’s circuit and labelled as a cleaner’s outlet.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Lighting K 10

Lighting shall be designed and installed to: - Consider occupant safety and facility security - Comply with AS1680 - Internal - Comply with AS1158 - External - Lux levels not to exceed Australian Standard levels by more that 25% - Appropriate maintenance factor is use. Monash's lighting maintenance strategy is reactive. - Uniformity to Australian Standard standards - Glare eliminated - Light colour in the order of 3000K-4000K Internal - Light colour in the order of 4000K-6000K External - No beam of light generated from within a building or external to a building must be directed at any point in the sky without falling directly onto a non-transparent surface. - Compliance with the relevant Australian Standard relating to minimisation of light pollution must be adhered to. - Fittings positioned to enable ease of maintenance. - Maintenance access to luminaires in high ceilings is to be considered and discussed with the Buildings and Property Division, Services.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Lighting Lamp/Luminaire

Selection K 10.01Lighting is to be LED. Other light sources can only be considered when LED is unsuitable for the application. Prior approval is required. Incandescent and dichroic halogen fittings are not be used.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Lighting Energy Density K 10.02

Lighting density to not exceed the following limits: - 4 W/m2 for spaces lit to 80 lux - 5 W/m2 for spaces lit to 160 lux - 6 W/m2 for spaces lit to 240 lux - 7 W/m2 for spaces lit to 320 lux - 8 W/m2 for spaces lit to 400 lux - 9 W/m2 for spaces lit to 400+ lux

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Lighting Lighting Control K 10.03

The lighting control framework for different space types at Monash University are outlined Section K: Appendix - Electrical - Item K3. As a standard, lighting control is to be achieved via local smart sensors that are adjustable by any qualified electrician. Programmable/networked bus lighting control systems are acceptable subject to Buildings and Property Planning approval for space types that require complex functions, e.g. multiple scene settings. Programmable/networked lighting control systems shall: - Be open nonproprietary - Have controllers and devices communicating using KNX protocol. - Be integrated with the building automation system - Have controller override switches are to be installed to allow lighting to work in the event that a controller fails.



67









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Lighting LED Lighting K 10.04.01

LED fittings must: - Use LEDs manufactured by a reputable manufacturer with proven experience in LED production such as Cree, Osram, Nichea, Xicato and Luxeon. - Use high efficiency LED chips. - Be designed to comply with the LED manufacturer’s specifications - Provide good optical efficiency and adequate thermal management in particular the LED junction temperature - Colour matched in any one area such that LED colour differences cannot be picked up by the human eye. - Within 3 SDCM (standard deviation colour matching) MacAdam steps for internal luminaires and - Within 4 SDCM MacAdam steps for external luminaries. - LED batch bin number must be provided as part of the operation and maintenance manuals or the fittings order/serial number. - LEDs in a fitting are to be replaceable. This is to avoid the need to dispose of the whole fitting in the event of LED failure. - CRI of 80 or greater - Achieve an efficacy of 60lm/w or greater. - LM79 performance testing. - LM80 ageing test & TM21 institu temperature measurement projection report. - Expected life of L70 at 50,000hrs or greater - NATA certified (or equivalent) photometric testing - Certified to Australian Standards and regulations or higher and carry an Australian Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM). - 5 Year warranty

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Lighting LED Lighting K 10.04.02

Drivers must match the optimum and maximum current to suit the LED over the whole range of input voltages with the following minimum features:- automatic reset in the event of a fault- isolation between the primary and secondary sides- dimming with linear characteristics- operation in ambient temperatures of -20oC to +50oC- low power loss- integral electronic overload protection circuitry- integral electronic over temperature protection circuitry- integral electronic short circuit protection circuitry.- Power factor: >0.95- IP20 protection rating minimum- 100,000 hour life time (min)- THD < 20%- 5 Year warranty

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical External Lighting K 11

External lighting must:- Ensure the appropriate provision of lighting for pedestrian walkways, roadways and car-parks,- Comply with AS1158,- Primary walks lit to P1.- Secondary walks lit to P2 or 3 depending upon evaluation of night time usage.- Busy at night car parks lit to P11a.- Other car parks lit to P11b.- Designated accessible parking bays illuminated to P12.- Roadways lit to P3 except on Scenic Boulevard from Wellington Road and Robert Blackwood Hall where it is to be lit to P2.- Pedestrian crossings lit to PX2.- Help points lit to P6 within a 5 metre radius.- Supplied from the main switchboard or dedicated external lighting switchboard. - Minimisation of the highlighting of building features and entrances with any such lighting having the capability of being scheduled off,- No lighting is to be directly exposed to the night sky.- In ground lights are to be avoided.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical External Lighting External Fixtures K 11.01

External light fittings must be: - Low energy consumption, both of individual fittings and overall lighting scheme (incandescent lighting is not acceptable),- Vandal resistant,- High impact resistant lenses- UV stability of component,- Resistant to corrosion,- Robust and durable aluminium alloy or similar approved.,- IP65 rated,- Weather proof,- Easy access for maintenance of lamps,- Energy management provision and controls.


68









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical External Lighting Post Top Fixtures K 11.02

External pole top light fittings must be: - One of the pre-approved external light fittings (Section K: Appendix - Electrical - Item K2) i.e. Versalux - STARLED, Iguzzini - Wow or Weef - RFL500_LED - Match the existing fixtures to maintain uniformity and aesthetics within any one space - Only vary between clearly definable precincts. Consult BPD Planning for direction - Different fittings can be utilised in different streets, walkways and open spaces, however the same fitting must be consistently utilised in any one street, walkway and space. - Mounted on a University approved public realm master palette pole. The University has a custom design public realm furniture palette. The palette includes custom design road and pedestrian light poles. The details of the design are found in the Design and Development Control – Landscape (Part 5 – Furniture Palette). - Wired with staggered circuiting, every second pole on a different circuit to prevent total loss of lighting.


Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscaping

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Internal Lighting Design Principles K 12.01.01

Internal lighting must employ the following control:- Simple uncomplicated 240V lighting control incorporating intelligent sensors - the lighting control framework for different space types at Monash University is outlined in Section K: Appendix - Electrical - Item K3 (Networked bus systems are not preferred.)- Local switches are to be provided to allow occupant on/off control of lights irrespective of any automatic controls.- ADD Factor - Light switches, installed adjacent to doors at approximately the same height as the door handle. - Colour coding: specify with minimum 30% contrast to background, to assist visually impaired persons to recognise control elements e.g. light switches- Motion & Lux sensors- Maximise Daylight harvesting – Use natural light in lieu of or in combination with artificial lighting to reduce energy consumption. Separate circuits and light sensor dimmers for lighting near windows and skylights.- Presence detection – to detect room occupancy and operate lighting accordingly.- Absence detection – to detect room vacancy and operate lighting accordingly.- Logical zone switching limited to 100m2 UFA in larger areas to avoid turning all the lights on when only a small section of the areas is occupied.- Lighting controls and scenes required for audio visual presentations e.g. dimming, zone switching.- Consideration must be given to half switching for cleaning and security purposes.- DALI dimming protocol where dimming is required.


Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Internal Lighting Design Principles K 12.01.02

Fluorescent fittings must be approved prior to design. Where fluorescents have been approved:- Use tri-phosphor or quad-phosphor coating and low mercury content lamps. Lamps shall not exceed maximum mercury content of 4 mg. - Lamps must be initially operated for a minimum of 100 hours at 100% rated lumen output to minimise the chance of flicker, premature blackening and reduced lamp life. Lights may be switched on and off as long as full output for 100 hours is reached. - Incorporate low loss ballasts and be power factor corrected to a minimum of 0.90. - Separate ballasts are to be provided for each lamp. - Ballasts must have an energy efficient rating index (EEI) of B1 for reactive ballasts, A1 for electronic dimmable ballasts and A2 for electronic non-dimmable ballasts.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Internal Lighting Occupancy

Detectors K 12.02

Motion detectors must:- Be capable of constant monitoring. Some sensors on the market only check conditions at prescribed time intervals, and thus if the sensor switches off it will not check conditions and therefore will not come back on until the prescribed time has elapsed, these sensors must not be installed. - Be passive infrared.- Passive infrared detectors must not be used in areas with rapidly changing temperature.- Microwave detectors must not be used in areas where the frequency of the emission may interfere with equipment in laboratories, hearing aids or in areas with lightweight walls or large expanses of glass as they can detect outside the area.- Ultrasonic detectors have recorded issues with hearing aids and must be avoided in areas where this may be an issue.- Detect a 20 cm hand movement (maximum required movement by occupants).- Incorporate acoustic / noise activation in toilets and showers. - Located to provide best coverage of the space- Located or appropriately masked to avoid triggering from external activities.- Have adjustable sensitivity in the on and off mode and be programmable via the lighting control system head end or by wireless remote control at ground level.- Have a switch off delay set between 10 and 15 minutes. If the delay is adjustable it must not be able to be adjusted above 30 minutes. - Have master/slave functionality


69









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Internal Lighting Photoelectric

Detectors K 12.03

Photoelectric detectors must: - Be either integrated into motion detectors or standalone. - Have adjustable sensitivity between 50 and 2000 lux. - Have an inherent time lag to prevent transient operation. - Use Dali dimming protocol. - Be programmable via wireless remote control where not connected to a network lighting control system.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Internal Lighting Dimming K 12.04

Where central dimmers are used, all dimmers controlling the one space must be linked by a common control network. The dimmers must be capable of a minimum of 4 programmed present levels. The dimmer must have a self-monitoring function for the activation of the emergency lighting in the case of dimmer failure. After re-energisation the dimmers must revert to the levels prior to disconnection. The preferred dimming protocol is Dali.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Internal Lighting Fittings K 12.05.01

Recessed light fittings are to be connected to the building wiring via a 3-core, 4-core or 5 core (depending on separate switching of lamps) flexible cable and plug. They are to be arranged with suitable retractable fixing brackets so that the luminaries can readily be removed from beneath the ceiling.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Internal Lighting Fittings K 12.05.02 Light fitting control gear must be fixed so as to allow the removal of any part

from below the fitting and whilst mounted in position.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Internal Lighting Lighting Controls /

Switches K 12.06

Lighting switches are to be:- Located at the entry to each space and at each end of the corridors.- Modular weatherproof type in exposed locations.- Aligned horizontally with adjacent door hands or other controls within a zone of 900mm to 1100mm and positioned to suit door swings.- Vary in type in accordance with lighting control system requirements but in general Clipsal Series 2000 with 15A FLM Series mechanisms suitable for switching fluorescent loads in standard size flush plates (115 mm x 70 mm).- Labelled designating circuit and switchboard number.- Fitted with integral indicators or LEDs that illuminate when the switch is in the off position in spaces that are likely to be blacked out.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Exit and Emergency Lighting System General K 13.01.01

The Exit and Emergency Lighting computer monitored system used on the Clayton and Caulfield campuses must be the Legrand AXIOM with: - Area controllers within a building connected via a dedicated backbone cable. - Connection of the building to the head end PC via the LAN using a Lantronix UDS1100. (One Latronix router per building to ensure system usability is maintained.) - Where only a single fitting is being replaced in a non-monitored area, use the Legrand AXIOM fitting leaving both the wired and wireless accessories attached. - The head end computer is to be updated whenever new installations or modifications are made to an exit and emergency light installation. - All modifications, programming and commissioning to the head end software must be carried out by a suitably qualified and experienced person leaving it in a fully functional condition. All area controller and fitting data is to be entered and complete.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


The Exit and Emergency Lighting computer monitoring system for Peninsula and Berwick must be:- The Famco Master Minder FMX power line carrier for Peninsula.- The Famco Master Minder FMM communications wired system for Berwick.- An ITU unit at each switchboard and one SCU unit per building at Peninsula. - The SCU unit is to be connected onto the LAN via a Lantronix serial to Ethernet device.- Where there is no head end computer available. Commissioning is to be carried out locally via connection to each SCU. - An update of the tracker log is to be provided to Operations.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Exit and Emergency Lighting System General K 13.01.03 The Exit and Emergency Lighting system at Parkville must match the existing

in each building.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


Exit and emergency lighting must be designed and installed: - In accordance with AS2293 - The manufacturer's requirements - LED range of fittings. Non LED fittings may be used where the LED range is not suitable for the application. - Green on black diffusers in theatres - Fittings numerically identified with an approved label with numbers corresponding to the logbook/monitoring system identification and those on the as installed drawings. - All as installed documentation including drawings and log books are to be updated when removing and adding emergency and exit fittings. - Connected to an un-switched active from the adjacent normal lighting circuit. - Illuminate switchboards, FIPs and EWIS panels .

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Power Factor Correction Design Principles K 14.01.01 Provide power factor correction from buildings with a maximum demand

above 400A to correct power factor to better than 0.95.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Power Factor Correction Design Principles K 14.01.02

Power factor correction units are to be provided with: - De-tuning reactors to avoid harmonic problems - General unit alarm connected to the BAS - An allowance for 3 spare steps for 30% load increase - Supply cable rated at 30% spare capacity


70









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Power Factor Correction Testing K 14.02.01

The Power Factor Correction system must be full function tested in accordance with relevant Australian Standards including but not limited to: - The following manufacturer's tests: - Power frequency voltage withstand tests on the main circuit as per AS 3439.1. - Insulation resistance. - Continuity of all wiring and control circuits. - Operation of controller, switches and indicators. - Functional operation and interlock checks of all control circuits including simulated operation. - The following site tests: - Check insulation resistance of all busbars, wiring and capacitor steps and switch each stage into operation separately under manual control. - Verify that the PF correction capacitor bank is being switched in and out correctly to maintain power factor between present limits. - Verify that the dead-band setting of the PF controller is set correctly to prevent 'hunting'. - Determine the level of harmonic voltages present on all phases using a harmonic voltage analyser with print-out. - Determine range of system load current and power. - Determine range of system phase voltages. - Where de-tuning reactors are not fitted, measure the level of harmonic currents in PFC equipment.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Power Factor Correction Testing K 14.02.02 Measurements must be carried out at periods of maximum load and at

average and minimum load.Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Power Factor Correction Testing K 14.02.03 Test and Commissioning records are to be included in the Operation and

Maintenance manuals.Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Lightning Protection K 15 Provide lightning protection in accordance with AS 1768 with test points

identified, labelled and provided in easy to access areas within the building.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Standby Emergency Electrical Generators General K 16.01.01 The standby generator set must be complete with all controls, safety devices

and auxiliaries to provide safe and unattended operation.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Standby Emergency Electrical Generators General K 16.01.02

Where it is assessed that a standby generator is required, generators must: - Comply with AS3000 & AS3009 - Only provide power to essential circuits - Consolidated to avoid the installation of numerous smaller generators for a building - Be sized to consider additional future load being that the maximum connected load is <80% of the generator rating and the minimum connected load is >30% of the generator rating. - Have a fuel tank that provides for 8hrs of full load running. - Have infrastructure designed so the essential load is monitored separately from non essential in normal and power outage modes. - Have a maximum demand meter that monitors the essential load.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Standby Emergency Electrical Generators General K 16.01.03 A load bank connection point rated to at least 80% of the generator rating is

to be provided.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


Generator statuses and alarms are to be monitored by the BAS such that: - Mode status and alarm is monitored to provide an alarm when the generator is not set to automatic and therefore won’t start automatically upon power failure. - Fault alarm is monitored to provide an alarm if the generator fails to start upon power failure. - General alarm is monitored to provide an alarm when the generator has a fault. - An ATS transfer alarm is monitored to provide an alarm when mains to generator or generator to mains transfers fail.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


Incoming supplies and terminals to the ATS are to be segragated to allow safe access for removal and or installation of cabling without the other supply being turned off.


71









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Standby Emergency Electrical Generators Testing K 16.02

Standby generator systems must be tested in accordance with relevant Australian Standards including but not limited to: - The following manufacturer's tests: - Engines must be tested to determine power output and specific fuel consumption in accordance with AS 4594. - Alternators must be tested in accordance with AS 1359. - Fuel tank pressure test/leak test. - Interstitial vacuum test of bulk tanks with secondary containment. - The following site tests: - Insulation resistance and high voltage tests of all electrical switchgear and wiring - Operation of switchgear and associated protection and controls - Function of all instruments and meters - Function of all auxiliary equipment and associated controls - Function of all alarms, protection circuits and safety devices for engines, generators and auxiliary equipment including fuel system. - Check of engine settings, clearances, lubricating oil levels and lubrication system; - Tightness of cable terminations; - Tightness of all engine and piping joints; - Circulation and temperature levels of oil and water circuits; - Oil pressure; - Governor including over speed functions - Voltage regulation - Automatic and manual control features - Capacity and performance of battery and battery charger systems - Testing of all modes of start/stop control - Full load test run including one hour at 10% overload

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Uninterrupted Power Supply Units General K 17.01.01

Uninterruptable power supply units (UPS) are to be designed and installed in accordance with the UPS and Battery manufacturer’s specifications all relevant Australian Standards including but not limited to: - AS2676 - AS3011

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


UPS systems must: - Have a sign located at each entrance to the room indicating battery voltage and the prospective short circuit current for battery systems that exceed 100Ah or the extra low voltage classification. - “Batteries” are to have a suitably designed rack or enclosure and are not to be located on the floor of the room or in a non-approved enclosure. - Both battery system conductors and leads from the housing rack are to be protected by an over current device (i.e. a circuit breaker or fuse). If the battery is larger than 110 volts, additional circuit breakers or removable links must be installed to disconnect the battery continuity for maintenance. - All battery enclosures and racking are to provide adequate access for inspection, testing and maintenance. Generally a minimum of 75mm spacing is to be maintained between the upper most part of the battery terminal and the rack or shelf above it. An exclusory distance of 25mm is also to be maintained between the batteries and the side of the racking - Adequate ventilation is to be provided to ensure a cross flow of air past the battery. Therefore vents must generally be on opposite sides of the room or enclosure. - All battery terminals must be tightened to meet the manufacturer’s suggested torque settings. - Each battery cell or mono block is to be marked with a number starting with 1 being the most positive end of the battery. - Each terminal must be cleaned of dirt and corrosion before connection and a light film of Vaseline applied as a protective moisture resistant layer. - The deflexion on any rack must not exceed 3mm when fully loaded with batteries. - A 900mm minimum clearance must be maintained to allow a safe exit in the case of an emergency. - If the ambient temperature is likely to exceed 30oC a ventilation system must be incorporated in the design of the installation. - An external “Manual Bypass Switch” is to be installed on all systems above 6 KVA to allow maintenance to be performed on the unit without interference to the connected under normal conditions. - UPS alarms are to be connected to the BAS system. - A copy of the manufacturer’s specifications and commissioning report including test values established at setup is to be included in the Operation and Maintenance manuals and in the system’s enclosure. - In accordance with the BCA any battery or batteries installed that have a voltage exceeding 24 volts and a capacity exceeding 10 amp hours are to be fire separated.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical


The UPS must be suitable for supplying electronic equipment with high harmonic content.The UPS rectifier input harmonics must be limited to suit the project specific requirements.


72









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Uninterrupted Power Supply Units

Testing & Commissioning K 17.02.01

UPS systems must be tested in accordance with relevant Australian Standards including but not limited to the following manufacturer's tests: - Insulation resistance tests. - Functional tests of all controls, indicators and alarms including set points. - Load test for minimum of 8 hours at full rated load. - Output Voltage and Frequency recorded graphically to show transient response under all operating conditions and with battery connected. Input and output currents and power factor must be recorded simultaneously. Tests must include: - main supply on and off; - bypass effected automatically by simulated component failure; - bypass effected manually; - 50% to 100% load step with balanced load; - 100% to 150% load step with balanced load; - 50% to 100% load step with one phase 30% unbalanced; - 100% to 150% load step with one phase 30% unbalanced; - 150% overload. - Output voltage harmonic content under no-load and 100% load conditions. - Angular displacement of output phase voltages at 100% load and 50% unbalanced load. - Battery voltage must be measured under all of the above conditions.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical



UPS testing must be carried out during manufacturer and at completion in accordance with the manufacturer's normal test programme. Load and performance tests must be carried out at a power factor between 0.8 and unity. The power factor must be recorded. The following site tests: - Insulation resistance tests of all equipment including wiring. - Functional tests of all controls, indicators and alarms. - A capacity test should be run on the system to determine the UPS’s ability to adequately support the expected load for the required amount of time determined by the manufacturer’s specifications. (i.e. load test for minimum of 6 hours at full rated load. During which the performance of the battery must be checked by switching mains off.) - Waveform of input current and voltage with both mains supply and diesel generator supply at no-load and 100% load and with UPS battery both fully charged and discharged. Waveforms must be analysed for harmonic content. - Test UPS on standby generator supply. The UPS must be connected to the dummy load bank to deliver full load. Tests must include: - Transfer and retransfer from mains to standby generator. - Full load test of UPS.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical



The UPS commissioning report is to include as a minimum:- UPS identification details including manufacturer, model, serial number and location with the building and room number.- Battery identification details including manufacturer, type, number of cells/battery blocks and number of strings.- The initial float voltage and internal impedance of the battery strings and each battery block in each string.- The line conditions of any phases present.- The battery conditions reflecting any defects found need to indicate that the battery terminals have been checked for tightness and are clean of any dirt

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Uninterrupted Power Supply Units Maintenance K 17.03

UPS maintenance is to be carried out in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications during the defects liability period maintenance. Maintenance must be:- Quarterly inspections and as a minimum must include the reporting of:- General appearance and cleanliness of the battery area.- Charger output voltage and current- Cracks or distortion in battery housings and racking- Corrosion of terminals and connections- Condition of ventilation equipment and condition of ventilation vents and filters (If installed)- Voltage, current and surface temperature readings of individual cells/battery blocks and strings.- Cell or individual battery block internal impedance measurements- A yearly inspection which is to include:- Tension tests of the bolts, connections to manufacturer’s specifications regarding correct torque to link connection bolts.(i.e.(9Nm)- A check of the voltage drop across internal connections between cells/blocks- The integrity of the battery stand or enclosure.- Ensure correct signage is displayed on access doors and adjacent to battery banks.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Active Harmonic Filters General K 18.01.01

Harmonic filters must be provided to limit harmonic distortion in accordance with the Authority Service and Installation Rules where required. Where the campus has a Monash’s owned HV network the point of common coupling in addition to that in the Service and Installation Rules is also for Monash’s purposes the main switchboard of each building.

Electrical Engineer


Active harmonic filters must: - compensate both harmonics and reactive power energy, - have the ability to operate in either overall harmonic compensation or individual harmonic compensation modes, - be equipped with RFI filtering.

Electrical Engineer


The active harmonic filters must be placed within the electrical system to best protect the rest of the installation from the areas where harmful levels of harmonics are generated. For example: Mechanical switchboards tend to supply power to a number of non-linear loads that create harmonics. The mechanical electrical system must be designed to limit the harmful harmonic content to the rest of the installation.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Public Address System K 19 Public address system must integrate with building evacuation system


73









feedbackElectrical Engineer

K - Electrical Master Clock System K 20 Consult Buildings and Property, Planning in regards to the master clock

system.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Labelling General K 21.01.01

Labels are to provide to equipment to facilitate operation and maintenance. Labels must be traffolyte or 3 layered laminated plastic generally, White/Black/White, with special or emergency equipment labelled in other colours e.g. Red/White/Red for main switches. Labels must be permanently fixed.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Labelling General K 21.01.02

Size labels to suit the importance and application. Size must be uniform for similar items. The minimum letter size must be 5 mm and 0.3 mm line thickness.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Labelling General K 21.01.03 Labels must correspond to the relevant wiring diagrams.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Labelling General K 21.01.04 A schedule of labels is to be submitted to the Services Consultant and

Buildings and Property Planning for approval prior to manufacturer.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Labelling Switchboard

Naming K 21.02.01Main Switchboard naming must follow:“BUILDING (building number) MAIN SWITCHBOARD" e.g.: BUILDING 40 MAIN SWITCHBOARD

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Labelling Switchboard

Naming K 21.02.02

Distribution Switchboard naming must follow:“DB(level).(sequence number)-(descriptor*)” e.g.: DB 1.4

Mechanical Services Switchboards must follow: “MSSB(level).(sequence number**)-(descriptor*)” eg.: MSSB 4.2

* The descriptor is optional and should be used to provide additional information about what the switchboard supplies i.e. DB2.5-LAB or DB1.2-External LGT. It should generally be used for switchboards that supply a certain area and not for the general floor distribution boards.

** The sequence number is unique to each switchboard. Subsequent digits are to be used to identify the sub switchboard i.e DB 2.5.1 is a sub switchboard supplied from DB 2.5.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Labelling Main


The main switchboard name label must include as a minimum:- Switchboard name- Mains size and type- Origin of mains- Rated current- Rated voltage- Short circuit withstand- Degree of Separation- Degree of Protection- manufacturer- Date of manufacturer

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Labelling Main


Main Switchboard labelling is to include: - Main isolator: Label to include rating- sub mains Protective Devices: Label with name of switchboard or equipment served, sub mains cable size/type and rating of protection (HRC fuse cartridge or CB protection setting).- Special equipment (time switch, contactor, push button, etc.).- Terminal strip labels to indicate function

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Labelling

Distribution and Mechanical Services Switchboards

K 21.04.01

Labelling for distribution boards and mechanical services switchboards is to include:- Switchboard name label mounted on the front of the switchboard - Main isolator- Control switches- Special equipment (time switch, contactor, push button, etc.).- Pole space phase and number identification- Terminal strip labels to indicate function

Electrical Engineer



K 21.04.02Where a circuit breaker within a distribution board or mechanical service switchboard supplies another switchboard or special/dedicated equipment the circuit breaker must be identified by a label mounted next the circuit breaker indicating the switchboard number and its location or the equipment.

Electrical Engineer



K 21.04.03

A typed circuit schedule must be provided for all switchboards. It must: - Be mounted in a suitable holder inside the switchboard door. - Indicate the size and origin of the incoming sub main - Circuit schedules must identify the circuit number, rating and a description of the equipment and relevant room identification codes.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Testing & Certification General K 22.01.01

On completion of electrical installation works, provide certification in accordance with Authority requirements that all works have been inspected and tested and comply with regulations and standards including copies of all essential services certifications. Copies of the compliance certification must be included in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Testing & Certification General K 22.01.02

For major construction works all parts of the electrical installation must be inspected and certified by an independent and qualified Electrical Inspector. Self-certification by the Installation Contractor is not acceptable.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Testing & Certification Work Tests K 22.02

Provide certificates of manufacturer's works tests for the following: - Switchboard type - switchgear in accordance with specified requirements of AS 3439.1; - UPS; - Standby generator set.


74









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Testing & Certification Commissioning K 22.03.01

A thermographic scan of transformer terminations, substation switchboards, main switchboards, mechanical services switchboards and distribution switchboards that are applicable to the project must be carried out 6 weeks prior to the end of the defects liability period. Include in the scans all busbars, isolating links, switches, circuit breakers and cable joints.All components, joints, etc., that show the presence of abnormal temperatures must be checked and the fault rectified. A subsequent thermographic scan must be carried out to prove that the problem has been rectified.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Testing & Certification Commissioning K 22.03.02 Load is to be balanced as evenly as possible over all phases at Practical

Completion, and again at the end of the Defects Liability Period.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Testing & Certification Commissioning K 22.03.03

Commissioning includes but is not limited to the following:- Operating sequences, interlocks and safeties;- Final controls calibration;- System operation under all operating modes and under all conditions of load;- Inter-system operation and correct interfacing connections under all operating conditions and under simulated fire conditions;- Noise and vibration tests;- Thermoscan survey of switchboards;- Environmental audit as required by Authorities;- Rectification and correction of any defects and deficiencies.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Testing & Certification Site Tests K 22.04

Site tests must include but are not be limited to the following:- Insulation resistance tests in accordance with AS/NZS 3000; - High voltage tests in accordance with AS 1931.1 between phases and phase to earth on all switchgear assemblies;- Earth resistance tests in accordance with AS/NZS 3000;- Polarity and connection tests in accordance with AS/NZS 3000;- Earth fault-loop impedance tests;- Verification of polarity and phase rotation;- Functional tests of all switchgear, controls and systems including safety devices.- Testing as specified in Australian Standard 3017.- Correct torque of bolted connections;- Trip tests of protective circuit breakers;- Interlock operation;- Verification of operation of all power outlets and isolators;- Verification of operation of all luminaires and lighting switches. Rectification / replacement of any noisy/defective luminaires;- Testing of all RCD devices;- Verification of all lighting controls;- Intersystem testing and verification for mechanical, fire, security and lift interfaces;- Thermographic scan of all switchboards cable joints and busduct joints;- Harmonic tests for variable speed drives.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Testing & Certification Pre-Energisation

Tests K 22.05

Pre-energisation tests must include but are not be limited to the following:- Tightness of screwed and bolted connections;- Physical integrity;- Correct phasing. Check phase rotation is consistent throughout the project and is the same as the supply;- Insulation resistance tests;- Test operation of all trips, interlocks, motor driven devices, contactors and control circuits and devices by instigating or simulating inputs;- Test reports and certificates must be submitted in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Operation & Maintenance Manuals K 23

Provide Operating and Maintenance Manuals including a: - Description of the systems;- Switchboards list stating exact locations and copies of the circuit schedules;- Emergency and exit light list with description of fittings and maintenance code no's.;- Equipment lists including luminaires with manufacturer's, agents and name plate data;- Operating instructions for systems and equipment- manufacturer's maintenance instructions for all equipment- Spare parts list with manufacturer and catalogue No.- Emergency lighting testing & maintenance requirements.- Copy of any discrimination studies and circuit breaker settings.- Copy of design calculations,- Copies of commissioning records.- Copies of all test and approval certificates.- Copies of as-installed drawings.The as installed drawings or the updating of the existing drawings is to be carried out as part of any works.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical

Operation & Maintenance Manuals

Diagrams & Schedules K 23.01.01

Provide schematic diagrams (SLD) for all major assemblies mounted in a protective cover adjacent to the assembly. Drawing must include:- All equipment including manufacturer, model, ratings and settings;- Size, rating and length of all incoming and outgoing cables and busways.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical



Provide wiring diagrams of all protection, instrumentation and control circuits. Fix in Perspex faced holders in approved locations within cabinet, cupboard or room. Drawings must be cross referenced to labelling and identify:- Equipment;- Wiring;- Terminals.


75









feedback

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical



Provide circuit schedules for all sub-circuits. Type schedules on white card and fix in Perspex faced holders on the back of the switchboard or cupboard doors, or on wall adjacent. Schedules must be cross referenced to labelling and identify:- Circuit;- Location and type of equipment connected;- Rating of protection for fused circuits;- Source of supply- sub mains size.

Electrical Engineer

K - Electrical Asset Register K 24

Provide update to University asset registers to the University standard and format for the addition and removal of assets: - Electrical, includes: light and power, switchboards, generators, LV air circuit breakers, residual current devices, emergency and exit lighting, ring main units, power factor correction units - Transformers - Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) - HV battery banks - HV switchgear - HV Cables

Electrical Engineer

L - Communications

Structure Cabling System Data/Voice L 01

The structured cabling system is managed by eSolutions. Compliance is required with the eSolution's Communications Cabling Manual for compliance.

ArchitectM - Vertical Transportation

General Design Principles M 01

Vertical travel where multiple floor/level buildings are proposed, sufficient means of vertical travel (stairs, ramps, lifts and the like), must be introduced to minimise occupant journey/waiting times, and comply with Statutory Regulations BCA & DDA in terms of use, access & egress, and total number of building occupants. Vertical transport must be designed to minimise operational energy use.


Passenger Lifts Capacity M 02.01 Lifts must have a minimum capacity of 1500 kg or as otherwise noted in the project Technical Specification and include Non Proprietary components.


Passenger Lifts Accessibility M 02.02 Lifts have to be designed in accordance with current Australian Standards and DDA.


Passenger Lifts Energy Efficiency M 02.03.01Machine room-less lifts with regenerative drives are to be used. Energy efficiency is a priority design consideration for equipment and control algorithms.


Passenger Lifts Energy Efficiency M 02.03.02 Lighting to be LED and occupancy detectors are to be used to ensure lights and extraction fans are shut down when lift is not in use.


Passenger Lifts Protective Blanket M 02.04Each lift must include the supply of a protective blanket for the walls of the car. The car interior must be designed to allow easy installation of the blanket.


Passenger Lifts EWIS M 02.05 Connected to EWIS.


Passenger Lifts MCE Networked M 02.06 Controls to be MCE networked control and monitoring system. (Caulfield)


Passenger Lifts Interior M 02.07.01 Provide handrails to side walls. Preference is for finished stainless steel shrouds and skirtings.


Passenger Lifts Interior M 02.07.02 Lift car walls to be non–scratchable, no smear surfaces and allow for easy clean surfaces.


Passenger Lifts Interior M 02.07.03 Floor to be hard wearing, non-slip and allow ease of removal of gum.


Passenger Lifts Sizing M 02.08 Door width to be minimum 900 mm.


Passenger Lifts Operation M 02.09 Visual and audio direction and floor information.


Passenger Lifts Lift buttons M 02.10.01 Lift buttons to be located between 850 mm and 1200 mm above floor.


Passenger Lifts Lift buttons M 02.10.02 Label lift buttons with visual and tactile indicators.


Passenger Lifts Area M 02.11As a minimum, capable of comfortably transporting an elevated work platform and two persons, or an ambulance trolley and three passengers, whichever is the greater.


Passenger Lifts Signage M 02.12 Provide tactile and visual indicators to assist accessibility.


76









feedback


Passenger Lifts Lift machine room M 02.13

Machine room-less lifts must be used, but where this is not deemed practicable, the following conditions prevail:- The machine-room access doors, closer and notice must comply with SAA Lift Code.- Room must be fitted with fresh intake and exhaust fans. All fans must be controlled by VSD’s and thermostat and connected to BAS.- All lift room must be equipped with emergency evacuation lighting.- All lift rooms must have racks and shelves to store technical documentation and drawings.


Escalators General M 03.01.01 Installation of escalators must be considered only if other forms of vertical transportation are not possible or practical.


Escalators General M 03.01.02

For escalators, the following conditions prevail:- Provide tactile strips at entry and exit.- Provide barrier flags at entry and exit.- Provide colour contrasting steps.- Provide floor indication.- All motors to be VSD controlled,- Presence detection allowing speed set-back or stopping of escalators when not in use must be included in designs


Stairs Designating stairs for everyday use M 04.01

Designating stairs for everyday use:- Provide one or all stairs in a building for everyday use, whether in the form of a grand staircase or fire stairs that also serves as the principal means of travel.- Focus on stairs rather than lifts as the principal means of vertical travel for those who are able to climb stairs.- In high-rise buildings, provide an integrated vertical circulation system that incorporates stair use for travel between adjacent floors, so that lifts are used primarily for vertical travel of four floors or more.- Integrate the stairs with the principal areas of orientation and travel within the building.


Stairs Stair location and visibility M 04.02

Stair location and visibility:- Locate stairs near the building’s entrance.- Locate an appealing, visible stair directly on the building’s principal paths of travel- Design stairs to be more visible. Use one or more of the following:- Fire-rated glass enclosures instead of traditional opaque enclosures.- Open stairs between two or more floors with either the same or associated tenancies.- ADD Factors- Stairway overhangs - Ensure they can be easily detected by visitors especially visually impaired persons to avoid injury at head height (e.g. by enclosing or provision of TGI's)- Handrails - Install with 30% contrast to background surfaces


Stairs Appealing stair environment M 04.03

To create an appealing stair environment:- Incorporate architecturally articulated and unique stair compositions which provide an exciting and appealing proposition for users.- Highlight interesting views, such as prospects onto nature or indoor gathering areas.- Incorporate artwork into the stair environment.- Incorporate natural ventilation.- Select bright, inviting colours.


Stairs Design safe stairs M 04.04

Design safe stairs:- Provide colour or textural contrasts at tread nosings.- Provide well-lit stair environments.- Incorporate natural daylight into the stair environment.- Provide illumination levels of 75 percent to equal that of adjacent corridors

Mechanical Engineer

N - Special Services & Central Energy Systems

Cool Rooms N 01

Cool rooms must adhere to the following conditions:- The thickness of the cool rooms’ wall must be not less than 75 mm.- Slip Resistant Industrial Floor Plates must be used for the cool room flooring.- Appropriate warning or hazard signage to be installed at point of entry.

Mechanical Engineer


Compressed Air General N 02.01

Compressed air systems must adhere to the following conditions:- Use “Compair” compressors or equal, with air cooled after-cooler.- Size receiver to start four times per hour on a differential of approx. 200 kPa- Provide oil filters to discharge side of compressor before the air receiver.- Provide refrigerated non-cycling air dryer and line filter after air receiver.- Screw style air compressor to be considered as an option.- Compressor must be BAS controlled and monitored.

Mechanical Engineer


Compressed Air Vacuum Systems N 02.02Provide 240v supply for a vacuum pump where required with on/off isolator and remote switch with neon indicator mounted on skirting wiring duct over fume cupboard (generally one pump for two fume cupboards).

Mechanical Engineer


Compressed Air Sanitary Incinerators N 02.03 Sanitary Incinerators must be not used, unless specified.

Mechanical Engineer


Centralised Energy Systems

Refrigeration Plant – Chillers N 03.01 The refrigeration plant must comply with the requirements outlined in Section

I - HVAC, specifically under the Chilled Water Systems category.


77









feedback

Mechanical Engineer


Centralised Energy Systems Boilers N 03.02.01

Boiler to be gas fired and fully automatic condensing type with the following combustion control: - Air to fuel ratio control with programmed set-points at full and part load operation, - Air to fuel ratio controller with oxygen trimming and variable speed combustion air fan. - Modular configuration

Mechanical Engineer


Centralised Energy Systems Boilers N 03.02.02

Boilers will need to meet the following conditions: - Have fully modulating burners - Low NOx burners - Have flue gas heat recovery options - Provide an appropriate flame failure testing system - Ensure each boiler appropriately identified - Use condensing boilers with COP of 0.9 or greater

Mechanical Engineer


Centralised Energy Systems Boilers N 03.02.03 The start button is to be mounted and covered to avoid accidental operation.

Start function controlled by campus/building BAS.

Mechanical Engineer


Centralised Energy Systems Boilers N 03.02.04 Ensure mounts do not transfer vibration to building fabric.

Mechanical Engineer


Centralised Energy Systems Boilers N 03.02.05 Provide test points at appropriate locations.

Mechanical Engineer


Centralised Energy Systems Boilers N 03.02.06 All new boilers, pumps and pipe work must have 20% redundancy for future

expiation.

Mechanical Engineer


Centralised Energy Systems

Heat Exchange Plant N 03.03 Heat exchangers are to be (preferably) free Flow Plate type.

Electrical Engineer


Electricity Generating Plant

Standby Power Generators N 03.04 The Standby Power Generators within Electricity Generating Plants must

comply with Section K

Electrical Engineer



Photovoltaic (PV) Arrays N 03.05.01

Only SMA grid-tie DC-AC inverters must be used. The grid-tie DC/AC inverter(s) must have capacity rated to match the PV array and must meet AS 4777. It should also have the ability to synchronise with the mains supply through PV distribution board. This must not feed back into the building electrical supply system in the event that the building electrical system is de-energised. Surge protection mechanism, connection to earthing, BCSE Approval being the other requirements.

Electrical Engineer




PV arrays must include a Sunny Sensorbox weather sensor. This must read as a minimum irradiance, module temperature, ambient temperature and wind speed. The sensor must be hardwired – Bluetooth is not to be used.All PV, inverter and weather station data must be communicated to a single Sunny Webbox, which must then in turn transmit to/from an external SMA Sunny Portal website.

Electrical Engineer




Automatic anti-islanding protection is to be provided – this protection must detect a loss of mains power and immediately shut down supply from the system to the point of connection with the building. This must occur without manual intervention. Where this protection is to be provided by the inverter, documentation is to be provided to prove this capability. The contractor must provide a practical demonstration at the completion of works to confirm that the system meets this requirement.

Electrical Engineer




Scope of works must include all liaison and coordination with authorities, area electrical distributors and retailers on the University’s behalf. This must include production of all drawings/schematics required by authorities, distributors and retailers prior to, during, and following construction. The contractor must act on the University’s behalf to arrange electrical connection agreements and configuration of utility meters to be solar-capable.

Electrical Engineer




The mounting frames must be light, strong enough to support the module loading and corrosion resistant as appropriate. The frames and fixtures must also comply with relevant wind loading requirements. The framing must come with full certification, including wind loading certification. The installation itself must come with wind loading certification, specifically certifying the installation’s suitability to the building. The method of fixing and actual installation must be certified to be safe and suitable for the roofing onto which it is being fixed. Where the roof structure permits, a system which minimises roof penetrations is desirable.

Electrical Engineer




Phase balancing is to be provided as part of the system. This may be achieved by use of appropriate 3-phase inverters with inbuilt balancing capabilities, or another form which provides phase balancing across the installation. Phase balancing must meet all requirements set by the area electrical distributor.

Electrical Engineer



Photovoltaic (PV) Arrays N 03.05.07 Provide necessary, testing commissioning, labelling and certification as per

Australian Standards.


78









feedback

Electrical Engineer



Photovoltaic (PV) Arrays N 03.05.08 Provide training/demonstration of the system to University maintenance staff

during and after installation.

Electrical Engineer




As built electrical schematic/layout drawings, estimated annual energy output analysis, wind loading certifications, Certificate of Electrical Safety, all other relevant certifications, data sheets etc. This information, as well as any other relevant data, must be provided in a bound Operation & Maintenance Manual. A total of one (1) Operation & Maintenance Manuals must be provided in hard-copy form at conclusion of the works. The manual must also be provided in two (2) copies in softcopy form on CD, with all as-built drawings in AutoCAD or agreed equivalent and all documentation in MSWord or MS Excel format as appropriate.

Electrical Engineer



Photovoltaic (PV) Arrays N 03.05.10 All penetrations and damage caused to the building must be sealed or

repaired to prior condition.

Electrical Engineer




The supply and installation must comply with all applicable standards, codes and regulations, including but not limited to, the following standards: - AS 5033 Installation of Photovoltaic (PV) Array - AS 4777.1 Grid Connection of Energy Systems via Inverters: Installation Requirements - AS 4777.2 Grid Connection of Energy Systems via Inverters: Inverter Requirements - AS 4777.3 Grid Connection of Energy Systems via Inverters: Grid Protection Requirements - AS 3000 SAA Wiring Rules - AS 1170.2 Structural Design Actions – Part 2: Wind Actions - IEC 61836 Solar Photovoltaic Energy Systems Terms, Definitions and Symbols - IEC61215 Design qualification and type approval class (II) - IEC 61730-2 Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification - Part 2: Requirements for testing - Building Code of Australia

Electrical Engineer




Photovoltaic (PV) modules will be IEC certified, provided with the appropriate number of bypass diodes, provided with appropriate performance and mechanical warranty, light (weight) as far as possible, produced under ISO certification, and included in BCSE Approved List.

Electrical Engineer




The system must be sufficiently accessible for maintenance purposes, and must have sufficient clearances from roof edges to allow for practical maintenance of the building.

Electrical Engineer



Photovoltaic (PV) Arrays N 03.05.14 DC and AC Isolators will be designed as per BCSE guidelines and will meet

present BCSE requirements.

Architect & Civil Engineer

O - Grounds & Landscaping

General O 01 Section O - Grounds & Landscaping must be read in conjunction with the Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL)

Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL)



General Design Principles O 01.01.01

Greenfield sites must not contain threatened or vulnerable species. Where such species exist adequate protection shall be provided. Necessary protection measures shall be determined through liaison with the relevant Monash university Project manager / coordinator and any applicable Australian standards and/or environmental legislation.




General Design Principles O 01.01.02

There is to be no net reduction in native vegetation and tree canopy cover. Where existing trees are approved for removal in accordance with University Tree Policy, tree canopy must be maintained by means of replanting so as to achieve coverage, upon maturity. The Environmental value of the site is not to be diminished beyond its previous state (refer EcoAccord).




General Design Principles O 01.01.03Plantings will consist of vegetation suitable for the intended application and generally be an Australian native species in accordance with the University Planting Policy.



General Design Principles O 01.01.04Plantings will enhance biodiversity through the provision of local specific species and habitat structures that attract desired native fauna and maximise benefits to the broader ecosystem.



General Warranty Periods O 01.02

It is expected that the following warranty periods are provided: - Paving – 5 years - Asphalt tanking – 15 years - New or replacement Shrub planting – 3 months - New or replacement Tree/Palm planting - 12 months



General Design Life O 01.03It is expected that the following design life are provided: - Civil Works – 60 years - Electrical Works - 15 Years - Mechanical Works - 25 Years


79









feedback



Site PreparationConstruction & Demolition: Root Zones

O 02.01.01

A tree assessment of all trees with the construction foot print needs to be carried out by a qualified Arborist and report tabled. The default stance is retention of all trees on site but where any removal is necessary, approval must be sought from the Executive Director, Buildings & Property, Monash University in accordance with University Tree Policy. As per AS4970, all trees within construction sites must be protected and Project Arborist engaged pre-construction, during construction and post-construction. A bank guarantee for the value of trees as per CTLA tree valuation method within the construction site, may be required by the University. All landscape/grounds elements trees within construction site and fencing including trees, gardens, irrigation, furniture, is the responsibility of the contractor/builder to maintain. Reinstatement and reparation must be carried out prior to site handover back to the University. A formal inspection and/or meeting will be organised prior to the expected handover. Where reinstatement or reparations are inadequate, liability will still remain with contractor/builder.



Site PreparationConstruction & Demolition: Root Zones

O 02.01.02 Erect protective fencing and signage in accordance with AS4970 for the protection of trees and their root systems during construction.



Site PreparationMinimisaing Stormwater Pollution

O 02.02

Where any Building Work is being carried out, the person in charge of a building site must ensure that the building site is developed and managed to minimise the risks of stormwater pollution, through contaminated runoff of chemicals, sediments, or other associated Builder's refuse in accordance with best practice guidelines as issued by EPA Vic, and Melbourne Water. ie: - Construction techniques for sediment pollution control, EPA Vic Best practice environmental management series, Pub No. 275 - Environmental guidelines for major construction sites, , EPA Vic Best practice environmental management series, Pub No. 480 - KEEPING OUR STORMWATER CLEAN - A BUILDER’S GUIDE. Information to help you control sediment and litter from your building site and comply with Council and State regulations -Melbourne WaterThis includes measures to: - minimise the amount of mud, dirt, sand, soil or stones deposited on the abutting roads, adjoining land or washed into the stormwater system, - prevent building clean-up, wash down or other wastes and Builder's refuse being discharged off site or allowed to enter the stormwater system, for example runoff from concrete cutting. - ensure all wastes from builders site sheds, including kitchen waste are contained on site or discharged to sewer - ensure all vehicles delivering materials to the site are prevented from depositing mud, sand, soil or stones onto Monash University’s road network, - ensure that any waste which has spilled onto the road, nature strip or surrounding area is removed as soon as practicable so that any residues are prevented from entering the stormwater system and to avoid traffic hazards, - ensure that any footpath adjacent to the building site or likely to be affected by the building work is kept clear of mud and dirt at all timesNote: As per Section B - Design Controls - Item B 01.11, large construction works require a Water Management Plan to be prepared for review by the Sustainability Compliance & Integration Officer.



Site Preparation Restricted Material O 02.03 No polystyrene to be used in the construction of stormwater system.



Site Preparation Safety O 02.04

Building work must not cause an impediment or detriment to, or be carried out in an unsafe manner so as to pose a risk to the safety of, pedestrians and vehicles. For the purposes of this clause, impediment, detriment and risk to safety to pedestrians or vehicular traffic may be caused by: - mud or debris on a road or footpath; - material referable to building work on a road or footpath; - equipment referable to building work on a road or footpath; - excavation on or immediately adjacent to a road or footpath; - damage referable to building work on, or directly adjacent to, a road or footpath; or - building work on a road or footpath.



Site Preparation Traffic Management O 02.05

Works required to be undertaken within the road may be subject to the requirement of a traffic management. For every instance where works either include roadways, pathways or bicycle lanes or it is envisaged that plant and equipment will spill onto these areas the contractor must prepare a traffic management plan. The plan shall detail what mitigation measures will be employed to manage traffic, pedestrian and/or cyclists and provide safe alternate routes for the entire duration of works. The traffic management plan shall be submitted to the relevant Monash University Project manager/ coordinator for approval prior to works commencing.



Site Preparation Demolition O 02.06.01

A waste management plan must be provided to the university prior to demolition. The waste management plan shall include the following:i. How all waste generated on the site will be measured;ii. Types of waste that will be collected for reuse, recycling or for landfill;iii. The waste contractor(s) engaged to collect and dispose of the waste;iv. How reuse and recycling of the demolition will occur, andv. The person responsible for each of the parts in the plan.



Site Preparation Demolition O 02.06.02

Waste streams are to be segregated and recycled appropriately. A target of 90% (by weight) of demolition waste to be diverted from landfill. As per B1.01.04 Monthly waste and recycling data must be provided and forwarded to the Sustainability Compliance & Integration Officer. Copies of EPA waste transport certificates must be provided to the Sustainability and Compliance officer for the disposal of EPA prescribed industrial wastes, examples of which include, asbestos, contaminated soils, waste sludges, waste oils etc.


80









feedbackArchitect & Civil Engineer


Site Preparation Site Clearance O 02.07.01If works, trenching, scaffolding etc. is unavoidable within the Structural Root Zone 'SRZ' or Tree Protection Zone 'TPZ', advice from the Project Arborist must be sought as per AS4970.



Site Preparation Site Clearance O 02.07.02 Any pruning, either branches or roots must comply with Australian Standard 4373-2007, be carried out by a qualified arborist



Site Preparation Site Clearance O 02.07.03Payment of damages must be the replacement costs. If replaced with a smaller tree the difference between replacement costs will be assessed as damages costs. Tree values shall be based on CTLA (Council of Tree and Landscape Appraises) method.



Site PreparationExcavation of Topsoil and Stockpile of Spoil

O 02.08.01

No stockpiles of materials or storage on garden beds or grassed areas without prior approval of the Grounds Curator. The contractor will be responsible for the reinstatement of all Monash garden beds or grassed areas to the same level or better than was previously there. Where turf is damaged, they must be re-sodded with “Kikuyu” grass in amenity lawns or 'Santa Anna' Couch grass in sporting fields. Contractor will thereafter be responsible for watering and establishment of the turf for a period up to 4 weeks. Subject to approval by the Grounds Curator, hydroseeding or broadbacsting turf seed may be permissible for short term coverage only during winter months but must be re-sodded subsequently during warmer months or when sod becomes available.




O 02.08.02All Topsoil must be separated from the construction site and protected from degradation for reuse at the completion of the project. There should be no net change in the volume of topsoil on the site.




O 02.08.03 At the completion of any works all rubble and equipment must be removed and the area left in a clean and tidy condition.



Site Preparation Reduced Level Excavation O 02.09.01

The excavation must be finished off with an even surface and thoroughly consolidated until a firm and uniform subgrade has been obtained throughout the entire area. Depressions which develop during rolling shall be filled with sand.




The existing soil must be graded and trimmed to the extent necessary to conform with the finished levels, grades and cross sections indicated, and shall allow for the placing of topsoil, paving and new structures.




Any over-excavation performed by the Contractor for any purpose or reason, except as may be directed by the Superintendent and whether or not due to the fault of the Contractor, must be at the expense of the Contractor. All such over excavation shall be refilled as directed by the Superintendent and the cost of furnishing and placing this fill shall be at the expense of the Contractor.




The Contractor must effectively and properly stabilise all excavations to prevent any fall or run off the ground resulting from the excavation and to prevent settlement or damage to structures adjacent to the excavation.



Site PreparationFilling to Make Up Garden Bed Levels

O 02.10 Use clean, weed free top soils for all non-load bearing fill.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Roadways O 03.01.01 All road and kerb design and construction must comply with relevant

standards and codes.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Roadways O 03.01.02

Provide opportunities for a variety of construction techniques, materials and treatment of roadways e.g. the use of porous pavements or cobbled stone effect to reduce car speeds and improve aesthetics.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Roadways O 03.01.03 Provide vehicle set down points adjacent to the entrances to buildings where

appropriate

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Roadways O 03.01.04 Public transport stops to provide adequate shelter from prevailing weather

conditions.

Civil Engineer



Disabled parking to be appropriately designed and located close to building entrances and major pedestrian routes to provide convenient access for people with disabilities.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Roadways O 03.01.06 Kerbs should not present barriers to pedestrian or cyclist movement paths.

Civil Engineer



Provide properly identified services conduits under roads at appropriate locations for future expansion, and ensure locations and conduit sizes are documented.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Speed Humps O 03.02.01 Speed humps must only be used on paved roads where passive means of

slowing vehicles is not available.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Speed Humps O 03.02.02 All speed humps must be constructed, signposted and marked in accordance

with the relevant Australian Standard, preferably of recycled content material.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Crossovers O 03.03 Reinforce vehicle cross-over points.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas

Pedestrian Crossings O 03.04

Pedestrian crossings to be designed in accordance with Australian Standards and DDA requirements. Pedestrian crossings near driveways must be minimised and any adjacent bushes or shrubs shall not obscure the view of motorists or pedestrians approaching the crossing. Raised pedestrian crossing with at-grade interface with top of kerb is preferred to provide ease of access for cyclists, pedestrians, prams and wheelchairs.


81









feedback

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Bollards O 03.05.01

Bollards are to be manufactured and installed in accordance with the Monash University master plan public realm furniture and fixtures palette which is further defined under the Landscape Design Development Controls.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Bollards O 03.05.02 Removable bollards must also have a spare gib and socket installed adjacent

to pathway for housing the bollard when removed from its typical location.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Bollards O 03.05.03

The intent of any bollard installation must be properly considered. Any area requiring impact protection must propose an alternative barrier type to be approved by the Monash University Project Manager/Coordinator.

Civil Engineer



Paths & Paved Areas O 03.06.01 Design to eliminate trips, slips and falls. Adopt accessible gradients in

accordance with current standards and safe separation of bicycles.

Civil Engineer



Paths & Paved Areas O 03.06.02 Design to ensure accessibility at kerbs when paths intersect with roadways.

Civil Engineer



Paths & Paved Areas O 03.06.03

Provide hazard and/or directional tactile indicators for visually impaired at required locations from the Warning TGSI selection in the Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (Part 2)

Civil Engineer




Major pedestrian paths must consider the need for emergency vehicle access and manoeuvrability. Swept path analysis must be completed on all landscape areas with consideration to the likely vehicles and their frequency accessing the pathways.

Civil Engineer




Roads, footpaths and paved areas to comply with the type (standard, custom or bespoke) specified in the Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL)

Civil Engineer




The use of permeable pavements, where possible, is encouraged however consideration must be given to its limited structural strength compared to conventional pavement.

Civil Engineer




All trafficable paths and roadways, including emergency vehicle access routes, must be designed, at a minimum, to carry an MFB Scania Car 115 Pumper Tanker with a rear axle load of 10.94 tonne (total gross load 17.62 tonne). Design safety factors are to be applied on top of these loads, in accordance with good design practice and the appropriate Australian Standards.

Civil Engineer




Any concrete or pathway saw cutting and replacement must be done on whole panels to ensure replacement sections tie in neatly with existing. All replacement panels shall be dowelled into the existing concrete using 12mm dowels at 250mm centres. Dowels shall be chemically set a minimum of 250mm into existing concrete prior to the new concrete pour.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Car parks External Car

Parks O 03.07.01 Water Sensitive Urban Design must be implemented for all car parks.

Civil Engineer



Parks O 03.07.02 Use landscaping to screen, shade and enhance the appearance of car parks. Tree planting must target 20% shade cover within 5 years.

Civil Engineer



Parks O 03.07.03 Provide opportunities for a variety of construction techniques, materials and treatment of parking areas e.g. the use of porous pavements.

Civil Engineer



Parks O 03.07.04 Provide appropriately designed car parks to meet the need of special users including people with disabilities.

Civil Engineer



Parks O 03.07.05 Ensure safe and convenient pedestrian access from vehicles and facilities.

Civil Engineer



Parks O 03.07.06 Ensure safe and convenient traffic circulation.

Civil Engineer



Parks O 03.07.07 Minimise conflict between service vehicles and other car park users.

Civil Engineer



Parks O 03.07.08 Provide sufficient turning areas on site to ensure vehicles can exit in a forward direction.

Civil Engineer



Parks O 03.07.09 Use ‘Replas’, or approved equal, recycled plastic parking wheel stops, coloured yellow.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Bicycle facilities O 03.08.01

Provide bicycle racks at convenient locations to each building, based on 1 bicycle bay per 1,000m2 of floor area, and adequately designed to prevent theft.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Bicycle facilities O 03.08.02 Bike rails and bicycle racks to be visible, well lit, protected from weather and

meet requirements of class 3 (secure) parking facilities of AS2890.3.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Bicycle facilities O 03.08.03 Bicycle racks are to be manufactured and installed in accordance with the

Monash University master plan public realm furniture and fixtures palette.

Civil Engineer


Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas Bicycle facilities O 03.08.04

Design interconnected bicycle pathways and establish an underpinning network of unbroken through routes across the campus, consistent with the Masterplan (Access and Wayfinding Strategy).


82









feedback

Civil Engineer


Boundary walls, Fencing and gates Retaining Walls O 04.01.01

Retaining walls above 1m require structural engineer design and approval. All retaining walls to have adequate drainage layer behind the wall. Drainage layer to be a uniform 20mm aggregate free from organic matter or fines. For walls exceeding 400mm timber retaining walls must not be used.Refer also to the Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL).

Civil Engineer



The Contractor on completing the retaining walls must backfill the wall with compacted soil to within 75mm of the top of the wall if the retained area is to be mulched or to within 5mm of the top of the wall if the retained area is to be seeded down or turfed

Civil Engineer



Following placement of backfill the area must be raked to blend into the existing profile of the surface behind the retaining wall and to either side of the terminating ends. All off cuts and debris shall then be removed from the site.

ArchitectO - Grounds & Landscaping

Boundary walls, Fencing and gates Fencing O 04.02.01 Design for low maintenance where practical.


Boundary walls, Fencing and gates Fencing O 04.02.02 Use low level massed planting groups in lieu of fencing where appropriate.


Landscaping Principles Landscaped Areas O 05.01

Landscaping principles must include: - Creation of a distinctive campus character, with a diversity of flora and fauna under the requirements of the Monash Design and Development Controls – Landscape (DDCL) - Identification of landscape zones, and linkages of them. - Respecting existing cultural and historical evolution.- Responding adequately to climatic and environmental characteristics of site.


Landscaping Plantings Landscaped Areas O 05.02.01 Species to be selected from the planting palette of the Monash Design and

Development Controls – Landscape (Part 3).


Landscaping Plantings Landscaped Areas O 05.02.02

When designing a new landscape which requires planting of new trees, shrubs or garden beds, it is incumbent upon the designer to ensure that: - No new plantings occur over existing in ground mains services including, sewer, storm water, potable water, harvested rain water, electricity, gas, telecommunications, fire services and thermal services, with a minimum clearance from either side of the outermost in ground service being 2 metres to the new planting, excluding any service contained within an existing service tunnel. - Positioning of all new plantings in proximity to any built structure must ensure that the fully mature planting will not impact the built structure to cause damage and wear and that there is adequate space remaining to allow access for an elevated work platform to be maneuvered between the planting and the built structure in order to carry out maintenance of the façade and external fittings. - Positioning of all new plantings in proximity to any pathway or roadway will not constrain the future trafficability of the pathway when the new planting is fully mature.


Landscaping Tree Stakes & Ties

Landscaped Areas O 05.03.01

Stakes to be durable hardwood, straight, free from knots or twists and pointed at one end. Stakes should be positioned in place without penetrating the root ball of the tree. Tree ties to be woven polypropylene webbing (50 mm wide), tied in a figure eight.


Landscaping Tree Stakes & Ties


Installation numbers to be as follows: - Plant Height | Stake Number | Stake Size, - >3.5m | Minimum 3 | 50 x 50 x 3000 mm - 2.0 – 3.5M | Minimum 2 | 50 x 50 x 2400 mm


Landscaping Soil Landscaped Areas O 05.04

In general regarding soil: - Recycle soil where possible, provided that it does not contain subsoil material. - Use local screened soils for garden beds if soil needs to be imported. - Use well-draining soil or soil mixes must comply with Australian standards (i.e. AS 4419)


Landscaping Topsoil Landscaped Areas O 05.05

A minimum depth of 300 mm of topsoil is required for garden beds and a minimum depth of 100 mm topsoil for turfed or seeded areas. A minimum depth of 1 m of topsoil is required for planter boxes and beds within paved areas.


Landscaping Mulch Landscaped Areas O 05.06.01

Mulch must comply with AS 4454 and be of the following types: - Shredded pine flake, - Woodchip/leaf mulch mix with a minimum of 70% woodchip content.


Landscaping Mulch Landscaped Areas O 05.06.02

Mulch must meet the following conditions: - Forestry products to be from plantation sources only. - The selection of garden mulch type is to be approved by Grounds curator. - Depth of mulch must be that as recommended based on mulch type.


Landscaping Fertiliser Landscaped Areas O 05.07

The following principles apply in regards to the use of fertiliser: - Avoid the use of fertilisers when planting trees and shrubs. - Use low phosphorous formulations on turf areas containing or near to native trees. - Use fertilisers which minimise the potential to rapidly enter the water table and waterways.


Landscaping Horticultural chemicals

Landscaped Areas O 05.08.01 Minimise use of herbicides, fungicides and insecticides, particularly those

which leave a residue.



Landscaped Areas O 05.08.02 Avoid use of chemicals when there is potential for them to enter waterways.


83









feedback




Should herbicides be required for weed elimination, they must be approved by the Grounds Curator and organic, non-mineral compounds are preferred. Application of herbicides must be carefully controlled with no overspray impacting on human, fauna or adjacent plant life.


Landscaping Edging Landscaped Areas O 05.09 All timber edging to be 50 mm treated pine or similar. Prior approval by

Grounds Curator required.


Landscaping Concrete Landscaped Areas O 05.10

Use permeable paving as an alternative to concrete for internal and external pedestrian and vehicular environments, including tree surrounds, driveways, car parks, and water feature surrounds. Use StoneSet or approved similar product.


Landscaping Paving Landscaped Areas O 05.11

All paving must comply with slip resistance testing. Where possible, pervious paving should be used, particularly in pedestrian and lightly trafficked areas. This will: - Prevent water collecting in puddles in wet weather, - Reduces stormwater run-off and nuisance flooding in small storms, - Recharge the aquifer, - Reduce irrigation loads in areas adjacent to paving.


Landscaping Steps and Ramps Landscaped Areas O 05.12.01 All steps and ramps are to comply with Australian Standards.


Landscaping Steps and Ramps Landscaped Areas O 05.12.02 Face brickwork and open treads MUST NOT be used for stairs and steps.


Landscaping Steps and Ramps Landscaped Areas O 05.12.03 Where stairs/steps are sufficiently wide, a central handrail must be used

rather than a handrail on one or both sides.


Landscaping Steps and Ramps Landscaped Areas O 05.12.04 All tread nosings must be in a contrasting colour.


Landscaping Steps and Ramps Landscaped Areas O 05.12.05

Handrails must comply with Australian Standards and in particular, must project a minimum of 300mm beyond the top riser and one tread width plus 300mm beyond the bottom riser.


Landscaping Steps and Ramps Landscaped Areas O 05.12.06 Handrails must also be curved over in line with DDA requirements.


Landscaping Steps and Ramps Landscaped Areas O 05.12.07 All steps and ramps must have a kerb edge or guard rail on both sides.


Landscaping Steps and Ramps Landscaped Areas O 05.12.08

Single steps are to be avoided. Where a single step is unavoidable, a kerb ramp must also be provided. A flight of 3 risers should be a minimum. With long flights of stairs, provide a landing every 10 risers.


Landscaping General Seating & Furniture

Landscaped Areas O 05.13

Public realm furniture is to be manufactured and installed in accordance with the Monash University master plan public realm furniture and fixtures palette. These items are to be procured by university contracted suppliers only.


Landscaping Barbeque Landscaped Areas O 05.14

Barbeques are prescribed in accordance with the Monash Design and Development Controls - Landscape (DDCL). For outdoor barbecues without overhead shelter, fixed/hinged lids must be installed over heating surfaces.



Landscaping Bin Enclosures Landscaped Areas O 05.15

Waste enclosures are to be manufactured and installed in accordance with the Monash University master plan public realm furniture and fixtures palette. These items are to be procured by university contracted suppliers only.



Landscaping Water features Landscaped Areas O 05.16.01

No water features are permitted that require the use of potable water as its main or backup source. A water feature that does not have an "alternative water"source must be designed in such a way as to remain aesthetically pleasing when dry.


Landscaping BA Landscaped Areas O 05.16.02

It is encouraged that any water feature should follow the principles of Water Sensitive Urban Design, WSUD. Water features must: - Avoid sites prone to collecting debris in feature, - Ensure ease and safety of access to pit and pumps for maintenance, - Provide drainage valve, - Provide overflow outlet.


Landscaping Water features Landscaped Areas O 05.16.03 Link to building roof rain water outlets (maximise rainwater harvesting) or the

campus wide harvested storm water network


Landscaping Timber Decking Landscaped Areas O 05.17.01

All timber decking must satisfy the requirements of DDCL (Part 2) section covering timber decking, including provision of documentation certifying compliance with FSC standards and timber grading.



As a minimum, the structural bearing capacity of the timber decking design must accommodate an electric buggy towing a fully laden trailer transporting 20 full X 240 litre landfill or comingle bins. Where the timber decking is in the vicinity of a building façade or any elevated structure, then the timber decking and support structure must be capable of supporting any elevated work platform required to maintain these elevated structures.



All timber decking is to be designed to allow ease of access to any in ground or above ground service that may exist under the decking. This includes lift off sections of decking to allow access to any pit covers located under the deck.



The proposer of any timber deck must submit a fully costed annual maintenance procedure which will allow the proposer to provide a 10 year warranty for the timber deck, assuming that Monash University adheres to the annual maintenance procedure.


84









feedback


Landscaping Defects Liability Period O 05.18.01

For all projects involving refurbishment or creation of new landscaped areas with associated hard and soft landscaping, an appropriate Defects Liability Period (DLP) term will apply, during which the Builder/Contractor is expected to maintain the landscaped areas for a period not less than 13 weeks and up to 52 weeks. The DLP term of 13 weeks will apply instances where the monetary value of landscaping is under $200,000 and comprising predominantly softscape works. In all other scenarios, the DLP term of 52 weeks will apply.


Landscaping Defects Liability Period O 05.18.02

During the DLP term, the Builder/Contractor will be expected to maintain the grounds and open space to the same Service Levels and frequency schedules, as prescribed in the Grounds Maintenance Service Contract. This will be determined in consultation with Grounds Curator and appropriate financial allowance made in the project to ensure no drop in perceivable quality and maintenance of the space during DLP. Builder/Contractor will be expected to furnish regular reports of maintenance activity.


Irrigation Overview Landscaped Areas O 06.01.01

Adopt water saving smart technology in irrigation systems, i.e. weather station driven controllers, drip and micro systems. All new landscaped areas must have their irrigation requirements met via a non-potable water source – either a precinct ring main or from dedicated rainwater or grey water harvesting. All new irrigation systems subject to pre-approval by the Grounds Curator.


Irrigation Overview Landscaped Areas O 06.01.02

Where possible, irrigation systems are to have a single point of connection to the water supply for each controller. A master valve and flow sensor is to be installed at this point and connected to the controller to enable flow monitoring and error reporting.


Irrigation Design Principles Landscaped Areas O 06.02.01

Irrigation to be designed as to apply the appropriate amount of water to the plant and soil. Design is to incorporate multiple stations for effective water management of different zones, e.g. lawn areas, garden beds.



Uniformity of application is essential to ensure efficiency of the irrigation system. System design should ensure the following uniformity coefficients are achieved:Distribution Uniformity (DU) > 75%Christiansen Coefficient of Uniformity (CU) > 84%Scheduling Coefficient (SC) < 1.33



The following irrigation design must be applied to the relevant applications: - Garden beds: Depending on the area and type of planting garden beds will be irrigated by drip irrigation, pop up sprinklers with spray or rotator heads, or heads on fixed risers. - Trees: Drip tube installed in a circular layout around the trunk to cover the root area, or poly pipe with multiple drip emitters installed in the root area. - Turf areas: Pop up rotor sprinklers.



All works shall be carried out to the appropriate Australian Standards for installation of the total system other than conditions covered in these specifications. Wherever there is conflict between these specifications and the Australian Standards, the Australian Standards shall be adopted.The following standards apply:-1. Municipal Water Supply By-Laws.2. Local By-Laws & Regulations.3. AS4765, MPVC pipes and fittings manufactured for pressure application, 4. AS2033 & interim AS4130, Installation of polyethylene pipe systems, 5. AS 2032, Codes of practice for installation of UPVC.6. AS 1477, UPVC pipes and fittings manufactured for pressure application, .7. AS. 35001, Latest edition of The Electrical Rules & Regulations.8. AS/NZS 3500: 2003-Plumbing & Drainage.9. AS2053, UPVC wire conduits.10. Australian Electrical Authority, electrical specifications and codes.11. AS 1345, Identification of the contents of Pipes, Conduits and Ducts.12. Any other relevant or Australian Standard or code of practices associated with supply and installation of any components proposed.


Irrigation Drawings and Documentation


The contractor shall maintain one set of plans to document Draft "Works as Executed" changes during the progress of installation. All the following items shall be surveyed and drawn up in AUTOCAD for the Client by the Irrigation Contractor unless otherwise advised. The following items shall be documented:- Sprinklers.- Valve boxes.- All pipework.- Changes of direction of mainline.- Intersection points of mainline.- QCV's.- Air Valves.- Isolation valves- Scour valves.- Pressure Regulation Valves- Cable paths.- Any other significant items.


85









feedback


Irrigation Drip Tube for Garden Bed


The drip pipe will be supplied as 13mm or 19mm LDPE with integrated emitters. For dense planting drip tube is to be installed in parallel rows with the pipe runs up to 40cm apart.For sparse planting, tree ferns and other plants that require them, individual drip emitters to be installed or alternatively a ring of drip tube placed around the base of the plant. Individual pipe run lengths not to exceed manufacturer’s recommendation. Each drip station to have pressure regulated control valve, inline filter, air valve and flushing valve. Drip tube to be pegged every 3 metres. Where garden beds are mulched drip tube is to be installed beneath the mulch layer. Drip tube to be installed is Netafim Techline or equivalent (40cm spacing and 2.3 litres per hour).


Irrigation Sprinklers for Garden Bed


Sprinklers for garden beds to be: - Rain Bird 1800 - Hunter Pro Spray - Toro 570ZAll sprinklers to be furnished with integrated check valve and pressure regulator, fitted with ‘Rotator’ type nozzles and 300mm (12”) pop ups for perimeter areas and 300mm pop ups or fixed risers within garden beds to suit the type of planting.


Irrigation Sprinklers for Small Turf Areas


Sprinklers for small turf areas up to 9 metres radius to be:- Rain Bird 1800 - Hunter Pro Spray - Toro 570Z All sprinklers to be furnished with integrated check valve and pressure regulator, fitted with ‘Rotator’ type nozzles and 150mm (6”) pop up.


IrrigationSprinklers for Medium Turf Areas


Sprinklers for medium turf areas up to 12 metres radius to be:Rain Bird 5000Hunter I20Toro T5All sprinklers to be furnished with integrated check valve.


IrrigationSprinklers for Large Turf Areas and Sports Turf


Sprinklers for large turf areas to be: - Rain Bird 6504 or 8005 - Hunter I25 or I40 - Toro T7 or TS90All sprinklers to be furnished with integrated check valve. All pop up sprinklers are to be installed on articulated risers.


Irrigation Central Irrigation Control System


Satellite Controllers are to be linked to the Toro Sentinel Central Control System Computer via either GRPS or short range radio communication if applicable to the site. Satellite controllers are to be either conventional 12, 24, 32 or 48 station or Decoder where suitable. Weather stations are installed at Clayton, Caulfield and Peninsula campuses and are linked to irrigation programs to provide automatic rain shutdown and seasonal or ET program adjustment. Each controller is to be positioned in a secure location in a lockable cabinet rated to IP54, (refer to AS 60529) mounted at a height for ease of access at ground level.




The following conditions apply in the selection of solenoid control valves: - All Station Control Valves to be Rain Bird, Hunter or Toro with pressure regulators. - Each system shall be fitted with a Master Control valve and flow control Valve where there is a single water source. All Master Control Valves to be Rain Bird, Hunter or Toro with pressure regulators.



Landscaped Areas O 06.09.03 Fit backflow prevention devices as per relevant Victorian water supply and

sewerage plumbing regulations.




Install isolation valves to mainlines immediately downstream of water source for small systems and lateral isolation valves upstream of station solenoid valves for large sports fields systems. (i) Mainline:Valves shall be cast iron fusion bonded epoxy coated Resilient seat, either gate or sluice, sized the same as the pipe diameter on which it is to be installed. Valves shall be selected to have pressure losses not exceeding the equivalent of 10m of pipe. All valves up to 80mm diameter may be threaded. All valves greater than 80mm diameter shall be flanged to Table D.All valves to have metal tags marked with the area of isolation (eg. Soccer Field 2).Valves shall be Crevet flanged type or similar(ii) Laterals and off takes for Quick Coupling Valves:Valves shall be FIP Plastic ball type. All valves shall be constructed with materials suited to the site water and soil conditions and rated to not less than 1000 kPa.



Landscaped Areas O 06.09.05 Air valves shall be A.R.I. 'Barak' Model D-040 (50mm) double acting including

ball valve.




Mainline pipework shall be either rigid “Rhino” PVC to AS 1477 and shall be rubber ring jointed, and shall be rated for pressures of 120.0 metres (minimum) or butt welded Polyethylene PE100 PN12.5 SDR 13.6 as an alternative.


86









feedback




Lateral pipework shall be either rigid PVC AS 1477 and shall be Solvent Welded for sizes 50mm and below, also rated for pressures of 120.0 metres (minimum) or MDPE PE100 PN12.5 SDR 13.6. Fittings for PVC mainline pipe shall be Ductile Iron rubber ring jointed. .(other than lateral pipe offtakes for valve-in-heads and QVC’s for which cast iron or gunmetal tapping saddles are suitable). All mainline fittings for MDPE shall be butt welded or electro-fusion. Fittings for PVC mainline pipe shall be cast iron above 50mm and PVC for 50mm and below. All PVC lateral fittings shall be solvent weld. All MDPE lateral fittings shall be compression.


Irrigation Cabling Landscaped Areas O 06.10.01

24 Volt Station Wires - Low voltage cable to be either single conductor with polyethylene insulation or multi-core cables with polyethylene insulation with PVC sheathing. Cables whether single or multi-core are to have 1.5mm2 conductors.


Irrigation Cabling Landscaped Areas O 06.10.02 Common Wires are to be single conductors with polyethylene insulation and

to have a minimum conductor size of 1.5mm2.


Irrigation Cabling Landscaped Areas O 06.10.03 2-Wire paths for Decoder satellites are to be to be a twisted pair of

polyethylene insulated 2.5mm2 conductors.


Irrigation Cabling Landscaped Areas O 06.10.04

240 volt power cable joins must be made in accordance with Australian Standards. 24 volt cable joints shall be DBRY type. Communication cable joins in Satellite Units or Weather Station only. 2-wire path cable joints shall be DBRY.


Irrigation Installation - Sprinklers


All sprinklers shall not be installed until all mains and lateral lines have been thoroughly tested and flushed. All sprinklers shall then be mounted on swing joint risers of the types specified and the contractor shall ensure all joints are tightened to prevent leaks. All sprinklers shall be set flush with the surface and the soil around sprinkler must be compacted to same density as adjacent soil using existing soil or sand.


IrrigationInstallation - Automatic Control Valves


All automatic valves shall be installed in valve boxes (rectangular) with adequate timber, concrete or brick support under valve box to prevent heavy maintenance machinery knocking the valve box out of alignment or onto the pipework. Support for these boxes shall be either timber, concrete or brick and the bottom of the support work, as well as a weed-mat type cloth wrap, shall ensure that no backfill material or soil is allowed to enter the valve box. Furthermore a 100mm bed of gravel shall be compacted and used as a base for the box support. Alignment of the valve box shall make sure the valve is centrally located. Control wire should be of adequate length and coiled to allow easy removal of solenoid coil if service is required. Pressure regulators should be adjusted to provide the specified sprinkler operating pressure.


Irrigation Installation - Quick Coupling Valves


All quick coupling valves shall be installed on threaded O-ring seal swing joint risers and rotation of the valve must be prevented when being opened. This shall be achieved by using an anti-rotation collar. This shall be achieved by driving a 1.0m. long angle iron into virgin soil and clamping the valve to it by means of a 'U'-bolt clamp. Soil must be compacted around valve to same density as adjacent soil.


Irrigation Installation - Control Equipment


The satellite unit shall be wall mounted and shall be furnished with an incoming power isolation switch as well as lightning/ surge protection. The unit shall be wall mounted at a suitable viewing height.The central, interface units must have lightning protection equipment provided on incoming and outgoing circuits as well as grounding grids at each location. Also, protection for the power supply and communication cable is required, as recommended by the controller manufacturer. The communication cable path shall have the control system manufacturer’s recommended lightning protection from the central end and at the Interface Units end. The minimum protection for the control system is specified below or as recommended by the manufacturer.(i) Power supply240 volt isolation switch.(ii) Decoders & Wire PathsToro Sentinel System:Decoder Surge Devices need to be placed along the 2-wire path and at no more than 250m interval along the 2-wire path. This means that the maximum distance from a Surge Device to a decoder outlet is 125m in either direction from the Surge Device.


Irrigation Installation - Risers


All risers must be installed to ensure correct sprinkler height. All threads must be adequately tightened (but not over tightened) to ensure there are no leaks. In the case of the O-ring seal type, if the riser is to be totally assembled by the contractor.


Irrigation Installation - Isolation Valves


All isolation valves on the mainline must be installed with spindles or levers having adequate room to be operated and install top of valve no less than 100mm from top of valve box. All mainline valves must be thrust blocked and strapped to thrust block. Straps shall be galvanised steel rod.


87









feedback


Irrigation Installation - Valve Boxes


Valve boxes are to be installed with lids flush with finished grade. Each box must have either bricks or concrete blocks placed under to support box and prevent the box from resting on pipework. This support work as well as plastic or other sheet material must ensure that backfill material or surrounding soil does not enter the valve box. Furthermore, a 100mm bed of gravel shall be compacted to support the bricks or timber base of the box.


Irrigation Installation - Air Valves


Air valves may be installed above ground where they are not obtrusive. In prime viewing areas, place valve underground in a rectangular valve box. A 25mm. hole should be drilled into the valve box lid to allow air to vent from the box.


Irrigation Excavation and Backfill


In general, the contractor must excavate in materials as found in the sub grade to a sufficient depth to ensure a minimum cover of 450mm over mainlines and 300mm lateral pipework to the finished surface level. Backfill material shall be placed in layers of 150mm compacted to the same density as adjacent soil to eliminate any subsequent subsidence. Where excavation is in clay, the pipework shall be laid on a bed of sand and sand placed around the pipe to a depth of a minimum of 50mm above the top of the pipe. Then selected backfill shall be used for the remainder. Furthermore if the base material is clay it should not be mixed with top soil and used as backfill material for the entire profile. If topsoil is a different material to base material then the trench shall be backfilled with the excavated material to the existing level of the base and the remainder shall be backfilled with topsoil. If rock is encountered, then approved friable backfill material or sand shall be used as bedding material. In rocky areas the trenching depth shall be 50mm below normal trench depth to allow for this bedding. Sand or selected backfill shall be placed to 50mm above the pipe and the remainder of the backfill shall contain no lumps or rocks larger than 50mm. The top 150mm of backfill shall be free of rocks larger than 25mm. All trenches that are opened during any particular working day shall be closed and backfilled on the same day after Works As Executed information has been collected. No open trenches or partially backfilled trenches shall be left overnight. Backfill material shall be placed in layers of 150mm compacted to the same density as adjacent soil to eliminate any subsequent subsidence. The Contractor shall remove all excess trench material and incorporate in earthworks in general as part of the price. Mainline pipework shall be open trenched with a chain digger or excavator and lateral pipework can be either open trenched with chain digger or mole ploughed. See Section O: Appendix - Grounds & Landscaping for diagram.


Irrigation Pipework Landscaped Areas O 06.20.01

Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, the construction of sprinkler lines and installation of control cables shall include excavation and backfill compaction, the furnishing, installing and testing of pipework and restoration of existing utilities and all other works in accordance with the plans and specifications. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or required, all pipework shall be installed with a minimum cover of 450mm over all mainline pipework and 300mm over lateral pipework based on finished surface level. Generally, piping under concrete or asphalt shall be installed by jacking, boring or hydraulic driving. Where any cutting or breaking of pathways, concrete and/or asphalt is required approval shall be obtained from those having proper jurisdiction. Where piping is shown under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted or turf areas, the intent of the drawing is to install the piping in the planted or turf areas. Minimum cover under roadways or paving shall be 600mm and pipe shall be bedded and covered with sand to a minimum of 100mm above the pipe. The remainder shall be backfilled with DBG20 crushed rock compacted to 100% standard dry density and all road or path surfaces must be restored to its original condition. Pressure pipes to be inserted within enveloper pies and have no joints within enveloper section. Where conduits are required under roads, they shall be installed as described in the above paragraph.Plastic pipe shall be installed in a manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with the Australian Standard.


88









feedback


Irrigation Pipework Landscaped Areas O 06.20.02

A Tracer Wire of polyethylene insulated 1.5 mm2 single strand copper is to be buried with all pipework to facilitate future location. (a) Rubber Ring Jointed Pipework:All mainline pipework shall be thrust blocked in accordance with the Australian Standards (or the guide inserted as appendix A in this specification) at all changes of direction of the pipework, pipework junctions, pressure regulation valves and isolation valves.Installers must use the manufacturer’s lubricant and observe the witness mark on the spigot end.If pipes need to be cut the spigot end must be chamfered with a taper of approximately 15 degrees and inserted into the socket end minus the rubber ring and pushed home. A pencil mark should be made on the outside of the spigot end in line with the socket mouth. A further bolder pencil mark should be made after withdrawing the pipe 10mm. The pipe is then withdrawn and the procedure below is to be followed:-(i) Clean any dirt or grit from socket (particularly ring groove).(ii) Insert rubber ring so it seats evenly.(iii) Clean spigot back to witness mark and apply lubricant to chamfer. Do not apply lubricant to rubber ring as this could cause misplacement when spigot is inserted.(iv) Align spigot and socket and push pipe home until witness mark is just visible at socket mouth.

(b) Solvent Welded Pipework:The following solvent cement types shall be used:(i) Fast- For small diameters and cool conditions.(ii) Medium - For general purpose and ambient temperatures below 30 degrees C.(iii) Slow - For large diameter(200mm upwards) and hot conditions.Joints made with fast or medium solvent should not be disturbed for 10 minutes or pressure tested for 24 hours. Joints made with slow solvent should not be disturbed for 20 minutes or pressure tested for 30 hours.Procedure:(i) Ensure spigot end is cut square.(ii) Mark spigot with pencil where socket mouth will end.(iii) Clean and degrease both inside of socket and outside of spigot with priming fluid.(iv) Using a clean dry brush apply an even coat of solvent cement, first to the socket, then to the spigot. Care should be taken to prevent ponding of solvent cement at back of socket.(v) The spigot should be quickly pushed into the socket squarely and held for a few seconds.(vi) Wipe off excess solvent cement.

(c) Butt welded and Electrofusion Pipework:All mainline pipework shall be thrust blocked in accordance with the Australian Standards at all changes of direction of the pipework, pipework junctions, pressure regulation valves and isolation valves.

(d) Thrust BlocksAll mainline pipework shall be thrust blocked in accordance with the Australian Standards at each change of direction of the pipework, pipework junctions, pressure regulation valves and isolation valves.Plastic sheeting must be placed between the fitting and the concrete to simplify access to fittings in the event repair work is required in the future.


Irrigation Pipework Landscaped Areas O 06.20.03 All irrigation pipework fittings and valve boxes to be lilac.


Irrigation Electrical Cables Landscaped Areas O 06.21

(a) 415 & 240 volts :All 415 volt and 240 volt cable must be installed in underground conduit strictly in accordance with the relevant Electrical Authority Code and Australian Standards. All cable paths shall have indicator tape placed above the cable 250mm below the surface level.

(b) 2-Wire Decoder Wire Path Cable :The 2 wire cable shall be carefully installed alongside the mainline pipework with expansion loops at each change of direction and at each point where decoders are to be installed. Adequate slack must be allowed along the trench lines to prevent stressing the cables during the backfilling process.

(c) Decoder to valve or valve-in-head wiring shall be direct buried alongside pipework and coiled at each solenoid valve or valve-in-head. All changes of direction shall incorporate an expansion coil. Adequate slack must be allowed along the trench lines to prevent stressing the cables during the backfilling process.

Civil Engineer

P - Site Infrastructure

General Design Principles P 01.01.01Reduce the use of PVC materials. Use concrete, vitrified clay, HDPE, zinc, cast iron, copper, galvanised steel or aluminium as alternatives. Where PVC is used, it must be sourced in accordance with the GBCA's 'Best Practice Guidelines for PVC in the Built Environment - Verification Guidance'

Best Practice Guidelines for PVC in the Built Environment - Verification Guidance

Civil Engineer


General Design Principles P 01.01.02The principles of water sensitive urban design (WSUD) must prevail for all relevant works. Runoff to stormwater systems is to be minimised and designs realised that reduce peak flows and reduce the risk of contamination of natural waterways.


89









feedback

Civil Engineer


General Design Principles P 01.01.03 Rainwater harvesting of roof area must be incorporated into any new building or substantial redevelopment of a building (greater than 30% of UFA).

Civil Engineer


General Warranty Periods P 01.02It is expected that the following warranty periods are provided: - Stormwater drainage – 10 years - Sewer drainage – 10 years - Other building waterproofing – 10 years

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Construction P 02.01.01

In-ground stormwater construction to be in accordance with the local city council in which the campus is located, pipe material can be of the following types: - reinforced concrete (RC), - fibre reinforced cement (FRC) or - polyvinyl chloride (PVC). - RC and FRC to be spigot and socket jointed. PVC to be solvent welded.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Construction P 02.01.02 Where absolutely necessary, siphon drainage systems may only be used with

prior approval by relevant Monash University BPD Planner.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Construction P 02.01.03

Where buried PVC pipework is greater than 2.5 m below finished surface, side support and overlay must be inspected and approved before backfilling. Pipe work strength class and installation must be in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and to the relevant authorities’ standards. Stormwater pipe shall not pass under another building and is to be installed with a trace wire.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Piping Size P 02.02

Minimum pipe size to be 225 mm diameter. In all cases, piping to be designed to accommodate maximum foreseeable static and dynamic peak flows of appropriate runoff return periods.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Entry Pits P 02.03.01 Cast in situ or precast reinforced concrete with 200 mm deep silt sump below

lowest pipe invert and knockouts for pipe entries.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Entry Pits P 02.03.02

Internal sizes to match cover and surround dimensions, make good pipe connections with watertight 100 mm (min) thick epoxy concrete collar. Make connection with cover surround watertight using epoxy concrete or grout.

Civil Engineer



Grated pits located within hard pavements stands are to be flush with their surroundings. Pavements must grade towards grates to promote proper drainage of the area.

Civil Engineer



Grated pits and lids located in garden beds must sit minimum 50 mm proud of their surrounds to prevent general garden mulch and leaf litter from entering pits. Garden beds must be shaped so that they grade towards pits and runoff can pond around the pits during periods of intense rainfall.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Entry Pits P 02.03.05 Downpipes to discharge over a 300 mm square grated pit with a 150 mm

wide concrete dished surround.

Civil Engineer



Stormwater pit covers must be lightweight lockable fiberglass reinforced such as Terra Firma manufacturer, or approved equivalent. Covers must be of strength class suitable to their location. Strength class must consider all types of scenarios, including emergency vehicle access routes or heavy cleaning equipment.

Civil Engineer



Identify pits classified as confined spaces, in accordance with Monash’s standard labelling system. The Project Manager/ Coordinator will provide details.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Entry Pits P 02.03.08 Provide concrete junction or grated pit at all changes of direction for pipes

equal to or greater than 225 mm diameter.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Sumps P 02.04.01

Sump and pumps for groundwater disposal to be located externally. Potentially contaminated groundwater is to be pumped to sewer. Basements to be externally tanked.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Swales P 02.04.02 Design swales in accordance with water sensitive urban design requirements.

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage Pumps P 02.05 Submersible pumps to be stainless steel. provide local level control and local

on/off control pnel connected to campus BAS

Civil Engineer


External Stormwater Drainage

Water Harvesting Systems P 02.06.01

A risk assessment including reliability of supply; water quality; requirements for the end use and associated treatment requirements; collection, storage and distribution issues must occur prior to detailed design activities. Water treatment must be appropriate to both the incoming water quality and the end use of the harvested water and include integrated water management principles. This risk assessment and detailed design should reference: - National Water Quality Management Strategy Australian Guidelines for Water Recycling: Managing Health and Environmental Risks (Phase 2) Stormwater Harvesting and Reuse - Review of the Regulatory Framework for Alternative Urban Water Supplies November 2009, DSE & Dept of Health

Civil Engineer



Water Harvesting Systems P 02.06.02

Harvested water storage systems must: - be designed for reliability and maintainability and metering included to monitor the volume of water harvested and consumed as well as any potable make-up water. - be sized to match both the available resource collection area and the projected beneficial end use. - include provision for interconnection to a campus-wide non-potable water ring main and be installed with a trace wire above with suitable location of isolation valves in valve boxes at regular intervals.


90









feedback

Civil Engineer



Commissioning and Handover P 02.07

All stormwater lines are to be inspected with closed circuit television (CCTV) prior to handover. CCTV footage is to be handed over as part of the as-built package. Stormwater lines are to be handed over free from debris or silt in lines, it is the responsibility of the contractor to jet clean and vacuum truck any silt or debris from the constructed lines prior to handover, if deemed necessary by a suitable Monash Project Manager/ Coordinator.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Sewer P 03All sewer works to be designed and constructed in accordance with the sewerage code of Australia WSA02-2002-2.3 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 1.0.

Hydraulic Engineer


External SewerPiping Minimum Size and Strength Class

P 03.01Minimum pipe size of external sewer to be 150 mm diameter sewer quality PVC class SN8 with rubber ring joints or of higher strength class depending on engineer’s calculations and site specific conditions. Sewer pipe must not pass under nearby or adjoining buildings.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Sewer Inspection Pits P 03.02.01Provide concrete junction sewer grade pits at all changes in direction or grade. Alternative smart sewer junctions may be installed with prior approval from a relevant Monash University Project Manager/ Coordinator.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Sewer Inspection Pits P 03.02.02All inspection chambers to be constructed and adequately backfilled and compacted in accordance with sewerage code of Australia WSA02-2002-2.3 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 1.0.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Sewer Grease Arrester Pit P 03.03.01

To be precast concrete arrester similar to C.I.& D c/w with heavy duty concrete lid with Gatic covers and frames . Coat all internal surfaces with acid and alkaline resistant epoxy. Brace internally during backfilling operations.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Sewer Grease Arrester Pit P 03.03.02

Provide ground vent and duct vent as required. Take care to extend the duct vent up to a height to release gases away from habitable areas and prevent offensive odours entering buildings.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Sewer Covers P 03.04Covers to be round cast iron and of appropriate strength class depending on location. Strength class must consider all types of scenarios, including emergency vehicle access routes or heavy cleaning equipment.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Sewer Treatment Systems P 03.05

Purpose of pre-treatment to be identified and treatment system designed accordingly.Show on the drawings the basis of design of pre-treatment pits and chemicals known to be discharged at the time of design.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Sewer Labelling and Identification P 03.06

Identify pits classified as confined spaces, in accordance with Monash’s standard labelling system. The Project Manager/ Coordinator will provide details.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Sewer Pipe Testing and Commissioning P 03.07

Pipe testing and commissioning is to be in accordance with sewerage code of Australia WSA02-2002-2.3 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 1.0. All sewer lines are to be inspected with closed circuit television (CCTV) prior to handover. CCTV footage is to be handed over as part of the as-built package. Sewer lines are to be handed over free from debris or silt in lines, it is the responsibility of the contractor to jet clean and vacuum truck any debris or silt from the constructed lines prior to handover, if deemed necessary by a suitable Monash Project Manager/ Coordinator.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Potable Water P 04All pressurised water works to be designed and constructed in accordance with the water supply code of Australia WSA03-2011-3.1 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 2.1

Hydraulic Engineer


External Potable Water Piping Size P 04.01 Pipe size to be determined based on achieving satisfactory operating velocities, reduce stagnation and minimise system head losses.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Potable Water Piping Pressure Class P 04.02

Pipe and fittings pressure class to be selected based on anticipated operating pressures, and in accordance with the water supply code of Australia WSA03-2011-3.1 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 2.0 and relevant Australian Standards.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Potable Water Fittings P 04.03

All fittings to be compatible with the pipe material selected. Fittings must be a strength class as determined by anticipated operating pressures, and in accordance with the water supply code of Australia WSA03-2011-3.1 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 2.0 and relevant Australian Standards.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Potable Water Valves, Surface Boxes and Fittings P 04.04

Install valves, surface boxes and fittings, including covers and surrounds, of type, size and locations in accordance with the water supply code of Australia WSA03-2011-3.1 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 2.0.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Potable Water Detector Tape P 04.05All external potable water pipelines constructed through open trench techniques are to have detectable tape with tracer wire installed above the first backfill layer above the pipework.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Potable Water Scours P 04.06 All scours to discharge to the closest stormwater chamber.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Potable Water Pipe Testing P 04.07Pipe testing and commissioning is to be in accordance with the water supply code of Australia WSA03-2011-3.1 Melbourne Retail Water Agencies Version 2.0.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas P 05 External gas lines to be supplied and installed in accordance with the relevant gas authority and Australian Standards.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Pipework P 05.01

Pipework to suit test pressures of 500 kPa. Pipework materials to be Nylon, polyethylene or copper, Denso or polyethylene sleeve copper pipes. Where open trenching techniques have been employed for non-copper pipes, then a detectable tape with tracer wire must be installed above the first backfill layer above the pipework.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Isolation Points P 05.02.01

Provide wall-mounted manual shut-off valve at the point of entry to each building. The valve is to be accessible and external to each building. Each branch or junction off a service main to a building is to also include an isolation valve both upstream and downstream of the "T" junction, as well as the isolation valve on the "T". All valves are to be suitably protected and accessible in a valve box.


91









feedback

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Isolation Points P 05.02.02A durable and permanent sign is to be provided in a prominent position adjacent to the valve and chained around the valve stem. The sign with black lettering 25mm high on yellow background is to include the following wording: “GAS VALVE”.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Isolation Valves P 05.02.03 Below ground valves to be similar to 'Richards Spherical Ball Valves' and installed under a cast iron surface box.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Isolation Valves P 05.02.04 Valves to be quarter turn ball type. Valves up to 50mm to be screwed; 65 mm and larger to be flanged.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Labelling P 05.03Provide surface markers at each change of direction or pipeline end. Markers to be directional arrows engraved on a brass plate, mounted on a concrete block or in concrete pavement and installed flush with the finished surface.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Regulators P 05.04.01 Low and medium pressure regulators must be diaphragm type similar to 'Jeavons'

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Regulators P 05.04.02 On major supply systems, provide two full capacity regulator installations in parallel so that supply to the building will be maintained during servicing.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Regulators P 05.04.03No by-passes to the regulators are permitted. Where supply is to continuous flow water heaters or Bunsen burners, provide additional step down regulator to 1.75 kPa.

Hydraulic Engineer


External Gas Regulators P 05.04.04 Provide test point on the inlet and outlet.

Fire Protection & Hydraulic Engineer


External Fire Protection Pipework P 06.01.01 Above ground pipework inside and outside buildings must be hot dipped galvanised after fabrication.



External Fire Protection Pipework P 06.01.02In-ground pipework must be ductile iron cement lined, welded steel, welded copper, welded HDPE or UPVC polyethylene. All pipework and fittings must conform to the Australian Standards. Ductile iron cement lined and uPVC pipelines must utilize rubber ring joints.



External Fire Protection Pipework P 06.01.03

External pipework directly buried under concrete slab must have a minimum cover depth of 75 mm from the underside of the concrete slab. Brass engraved marker tile must be installed on concrete surface over alignment of fire pipework clearly stating “buried fire main directly under slab”. All non-metallic buried fire main is to incude a trace wire above the pipe.



External Fire Protection Pipework P 06.01.04All pipelines must be capable of withstanding working pressures of up to: - 1400 kPa for non-boosted pipelines - 1700 kPa for boosted pipelines (Clayton)



External Fire Protection Booster Pumps P 06.02.01

Booster pumps must meet the following conditions:- Pumps must be and approved single and/or multi staged centrifugal pump with close coupled TEFC, non-overloading, motor.- The pump must be of back pull out design and sized to allow for a 10% upgrading of the maximum impeller size.- Pumps to incorporate dip wells and screwed outlets under the exposed ends of the glands. Copper drain pipework must run from each drip well to discharge over the waste point.- The base must be bolted via vibration isolating mounts to the 150mm high concrete plinth.



External Fire Protection Booster Pumps P 06.02.02

Diesel engines must meet the following conditions:- The pump set must be a proprietary manufactured fire booster pump system, complete with control panel, safeties, starting system and fuel storage.- Must be multi cylinder, water cooled complete with fuel tank, starter motor, batteries (two sets), generator, voltage regulator and exhaust system.- The engine must be mechanically governed, have direct fuel injection and be continuously rated for 24 hours operation.- The engine must be fitted with thermostatically controlled electric crankcase or water jacket heaters to warm the engine for full load capabilities directly after start up.



External Fire Protection Booster Pumps P 06.02.03The pump must be electric low flow, high pressure jacking pump, complete with a self controlled cut in/out mechanism. The pump must draw water from towns mains supply.



External Fire Protection Static Storage Tanks P 06.03

Static storage tanks must meet the following conditions:- Water storage tanks must be constructed from prefabricated epoxy coated steel.- The tank must be constructed on site from hit dip galvanised High Tensile steel sectional plates. Side plates must be bolted together externally using galvanised or stainless steel bolts.- The tank must be internally braced as necessary to suit the application.- A membrane of approved non corrosive insulating material must be installed between the plinth and the bottom tank plates.



External Fire Protection Booster Connections P 06.04

Booster connections and their location must be in accordance with the Australian Standards and requirements of the local fire authority. Booster must also meet the following conditions:- The Booster connections must be provided with Storz couplings to suit.- Pressure gauges must be provided to indicate booster pressure.- If the booster connections are enclosed, the enclosure must be suitable labelled externally.- Block plan of the site, the installation, working and test pressure must be provided within the enclosure.


92









feedbackFire Protection & Hydraulic Engineer


External Fire Protection Hydrants P 06.05.01 External hydrants to be dual head standpipes complete with Storz couplings.



External Fire Protection Hydrants P 06.05.02Provide isolating valve on branch line to permit landing valve servicing. Wrap pipe with Denso tape to isolate from concrete and install concrete anchor block at tee and bend and provide 100 thick x 450 square concrete pad around standpipe. Top surface to be level with finished ground level.

BAS & Mechanical Engineer

Q - Building Automation Systems

Introduction General Q 01.01.01The Building Automation System to be used on any project must be confirmed by the Asset Planning Engineer - Mechanical Services at Project Concept phase.



Introduction General Q 01.01.02

Any proposed refurbishment/upgrade works that are likely to impact on a current BAS installation is to be discussed with and approved by the Campus BAS Coordinator and Asset Planning Engineer – Mechanical Services or the relevant campus Maintenance Manager. They must be consulted prior to any (RFT) Request for Tender to ensure that the proposed works will comply with the University’s BAS Strategy and will not compromise / conflict with an existing BAS installation and the relevant building’s BAS migration/upgrade plan.The same applies to the design and construction of any new building.



General BAS Requirements

BAS Front End Interface Q 02.01.01

Any system proposed must have the ability to seamlessly integrate into the University’s approved front ends either Andover Continuum or Alerton Envision/Web Talk-or Tridium Niagara.




BAS Front End Interface Q 02.01.02

The BAS must have the ability for multiple users to access the system via a web interface without the need for workstation licenses or dongles. At least 6 concurrent users must be able to access programming and at least 30 operators via a web interface. The functionality and supplier’s technical capability of implementing and maintaining this interface must be demonstrated and approved by the University’s BAS Coordinator before issuing or commencing any work instruction.



General BAS Requirements Upgrade Path Q 02.02

Any system proposed must have a guaranteed and proven software and firmware upgrade path to ensure that advances in BAS technology are available well into the future. Any available software and firmware upgrades to the system must be provided free of charge for two years from the date of practical completion.



General BAS Requirements Point Schedule Q 02.03

For any BAS design, consultants must provide comprehensive point schedules detailing point descriptions, locations, functions, types and any special requirements. Passing this responsibility to competing contractors when tendering is not acceptable as it is difficult to manage and compare competing submissions and opens the door for interpretation. A typical point schedule is described in Section Q: Appendix - Item Q1

Section Q: Appendix - Building Automation Systems - Item Q1



General BAS Requirements BAS Networks Q 02.04.01

Any new BAS installation must be connected to the University’s Ethernet IT network. The University has developed a three tier BAS architecture, as follows: - Tier 1: Central server and databases - Tier 2: BACnet/IP BAS router controllers, high level interfaces and other third party router - Tier 3: BACnet/MSTP University approved DDC controllers.




For new projects an IP address and associated configuration details will be provided by the BAS Coordinator upon submission of the new BAS device application. New data point requirements must be lodged with the project Manager / Coordinator. Ethernet data points are provided either by the University’s IT department or in some projects by the data installation contractor. However in both cases, the data points patching process is managed by the University’s IT department. The relevant BAS subnet details are provided by the BAS Coordinator. All BACnet/MSTP tier cabling is the responsibility of the BAS supplier.




To ensure systems operate at optimum speed and reliability with the ability for expansion, the number of controllers on a network must not exceed 60 DDDc per MSTP network




All alarms, control programs and logging must be done on the associated field controller within the local MSTP network, and must not rely on the Monash Ethernet network to function. The Monash Ethernet network is to be used to transfer data to the front end and database, for system monitoring and storage and system interrogation and must not become congested due to high unnecessary communications traffic flow. System functionality must not rely on high level Ethernet communication.



General BAS Requirements BAS Networks Q 02.04.05 The proposed BAS network topology must be approved by the BAS

Coordinator before the start of the physical installation.




The following equipment must be connected to the BAS as a minimum (where practicable): - Mechanical equipment (chillers, boilers, fans, pumps, VSDs, AHU’s, FCU’s, VAV’s, VRV’s, etc.); - Electrical equipment (meters, power factor correction, UPS, etc.); - Lighting controls; - Generator and ATS (status and alarms); - Fire panel via high level interface; - Research freezes - Other special equipment.


93









feedback




Energy & Water Conservation Q 02.05

The BAS must be capable of implementing Conservation Management programs including: - time programmed start/stop - optimum start/stops - supply air reset - economy cycle - lighting control where appropriate - occupancy control - energy calculations - adjustable temperature dead band settings for heating and cooling set points in summer and winter - Variable Speed Drives and CO2 sensors where appropriate. - Adjustment of temperature bandwidths based on load and conditions. - Optimum plant operation. For example, ventilation to lecture theatres being controlled on air quality level. Occupancy sensors must be used. - load shedding - Any other monitored points which may assist in producing energy saving or energy consumption statistics. - water consumption - Gas consumption.




Occupancy Detector Requirements

Q 02.06Spaces not used to a fixed time schedule must be fitted with approved motion detectors, for example lecture theatres, teaching spaces, areas of infrequent use. The motion detectors must be connected to the building’s BAS system to control lighting and air conditioning in the affected areas.



General BAS Requirements Safety Q 02.07.01 No combination or sequence of operations of the BAS relays must cause a

condition which is unsafe, unhealthy or liable to cause damage to equipment.



General BAS Requirements Safety Q 02.07.02

Functionality which is essential for safe operation must be mechanically interlocked. Design consideration must be given to a controller failure, for example, fire / smoke mode of HVAC plant, dampers and fans. Heating hot water (HHW) pumps must be fitted with mechanical run-on timers connected to the boiler status or HHW temperature, rather than relying on the control device to run the pump for a period of time after the boiler stops.



General BAS Requirements Trend Logging Q 02.08.01

The BAS system must use the BACnet standard logging object and have the ability to store logged data, including all input / output points, in memory on a long-term basis. Trend data must be easily retrievable for export to an Excel spreadsheet.




Each point must have individual time scales for system reporting. The time scale must be adjustable in one minute increments. It must also be possible to register the start/stop sequence of any selected plant using the trend log. The system must have the facility for printing out any display log.




The system must be capable of logging all inputs and outputs on the system without the need for additional hardware or memory at a later stage. The intention is for all logging associated with a particular piece of equipment to be undertaken within the same controller that is controlling that piece of equipment.



General BAS Requirements BAS Alarms Q 02.09.01

All alarms will be generated by standard BACnet Standard compliant enrolments and notifications. Alarms must be generated and report to a specified BACnet Standard compliant Workstation or Workstations and the alarm messages must be displayed on that Workstation or Workstations; simultaneously a SMS and an email must be generated where an urgent, critical response is required. The BAS must prioritise alarm groups. Critical areas must have fail-safe alarms in the event of power failure. Text within the Enrolments will clearly define the object in alarm and the purpose of the alarm.




The University is responsible for providing the required information for alarm action requests, message descriptions and details for recipients of alarms and messages for coordination by the contractor for programming. The contractor is responsible for providing and programming alarm signals in coordination with the University’s nominated representative.




All BAS products must support BACnet alarming and must be able to integrate alarms into a designated BACnet alarm viewing device that is currently being used at the time of installation (Continuum Alarm Viewer for Andover Continuum and Alerton Envision and Tridium alarm viewer for Niagara Framework based systems).




The system must be capable of alarming all inputs and outputs on the system without the need for additional hardware or memory at a later stage. All alarm limits must be user adjustable on a user friendly graphical tool without the need access BMS programs (i.e. filter and temperature alarm set points must be adjustable from the BMS graphic).




BACnet Open Communication Protocol

Q 02.10.01

The University has adopted the BACnet standard of communications protocol and any new installation must be capable of a full and transparent interface. All configuration files, bindings, graphics, etc. must be able to be edited or amended by the University or its appointed BAS Services Provider from the main system BAS terminal or associated web interface.





Q 02.10.02 No system will be accepted that relies solely on locally connected or proprietary software to interface with or make system program changes.





Q 02.10.03Any software, protocols, passwords, dongles and training required to use, change or program the system must be provided to the University as part of the completed system handover.


94









feedback





Q 02.10.04BACnet MSTP network details and device instance address ranges are supplied by the BAS Administrator, this instruction must be strictly adhered to. Failure to adhere to assigned device instances could cause conflicts within devise and could cause critical system malfunction.





Q 02.10.05Device naming standards must be followed, a guide to the standard can be found in Section Q: Appendix - Item Q2 Building Automation Device Naming Examples






Q 02.10.06 BBMD (BACnet broadcast management device) configuration/re-configuration must be strictly supervised by the BAS Coordinator.





Q 02.10.07Newly introduced BACnet/IP level devices must be updated on the main BAS network diagnostic menu, and Critical alarms (fail safe) must be set up for the device offline condition.





Q 02.10.08 ACnet devices from different manufacturer's must not be mixed in a single MSTP network





Q 02.10.09 Accepted protocols are BACnet/IP and BACnet/MSTP. BACnet/Ethernet is not acceptable.




Temperature Monitor Q 02.11.01

Space or accessible return air temperature sensors must be fitted in as many zones as are independently controlled by the heating/cooling system. In the case where a zone covers several rooms, sensors must be installed in each “typical” area and the average temperature must be used to modulate the heating/cooling valve.




Temperature Monitor Q 02.11.02

A supply air duct temperature sensor must be fitted immediately after any heating/cooling coil, (before a humidifier), to provide the BAS with diagnostics for valve operation/status feedback etc.




Temperature Monitor Q 02.11.03 For economy cycle applications, mixed air and return air temperature sensors

must be included before any heating/cooling coil.



General BAS Requirements Status Monitor Q 02.12.01

Status must be verified, for example, “Positive Feedback” status of fans and pumps and actuator, etc must be provided. This must be achieved by using application appropriate devices such as differential pressure switches, pressure sensors, flow switches. Status / fault via HLI must not be used as the only method to verify or alarm the operation of a piece of equipment. This verification must be accompanied by use of a low level input directly wired to the BMS controller.



General BAS Requirements Status Monitor Q 02.12.02

Sufficient statuses must be provided to the controller to allow the function of the system to be monitored and diagnosed. Where the BAS controls a chiller or a boiler, all other associated parameters such as status, alarm, water flow and return temperatures, pump status, etc., shall be monitored.



General BAS Requirements Status Monitor Q 02.12.03 Fire panel status, indicating fire mode shutdown of the plant, must be

provided to the controller as a status input.



General BAS Requirements Critical Equipment Q 02.13.01

Any control of plant and equipment critical to the building operation, e.g. laboratory temperature and pressure conditions, must be connected directly to the BAS and not rely on a high level interface from third party equipment. Single points of failure must be negated by either default conditions or redundant equipment serving critical areas. Third party high level interfaces are acceptable for monitoring only.



General BAS Requirements Critical Equipment Q 02.13.02

DDC controllers connected to critical systems/equipment must have an internal alarm flag to indicate it’s offline status. Disconnection of critical equipment must raise a failsafe off-line alarm.




Set Point Adjustments Q 02.14.01

It is preferable for chiller and boiler operating temperature to be controllable externally via the BAS. This setting must be provided to the BAS controller, with appropriate safety measures mechanically incorporated. Where this is not possible, boilers and chillers may be fitted with internal set points where this is appropriate for the design and safe and efficient operation of the device.




Set Point Adjustments Q 02.14.02

Occupants of a space must not be provided with the facility to vary the set point but system Coordinator and maintenance department must have access to setpoints, time schedules, alarm configuration, logging and manual override of outputs. Dual setpoints to be utilised where possible for summer/winter control.




Mechanical Air Delivery Q 02.15 Local temperature control should not be provided, unless controlled

temperature space e.g. incubation room.




Mechanical Ceiling Fans Q 02.16 Allow for local user control of ceiling/wall fans and consider linking to

occupancy detection sensors that are in place for lighting.


95









feedback



General BAS Requirements Liaison Q 02.17

The Consulting Engineer must liaise with the nominated BAS Engineer, Project or Maintenance Manager from the University Facilities and Services Division, on BAS design, requirements and obtain information on the existing BAS systems before commencing the initial design phase.



General BAS Requirements Labelling Q 02.18.01

All items of equipment associated with the BAS must be suitably identified with traffolyte labels. Control panels, field controllers, VAV boxes, valves, dampers, and sensors must be labelled with identification that matches the relevant item programmed on the graphical interface.



General BAS Requirements Labelling Q 02.18.02

All works must be adequately documented so that every wire can be subsequently identified by wire number, colour code or termination frame location. All wires must be numbered individually, multi-core cables must be terminated according to the standard colour code.



General BAS Requirements Commissioning Q 02.19.01

The BAS installation must be commissioned and fully operational at the practical completion stage of the project. Commissioning procedures must be carried out at the end/field equipment device to verify correct operation of equipment. Once completed, all alarms, system operation and interfaces must be demonstrated fully to the satisfaction of the University.




A commissioning process standard must be followed and proven to have been used, such as AIRAH’s Design Application Manual for Building Management and Control Systems (DA28) or CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls.




Any third party interfaces must be demonstrated to the University BAS Coordinator end to end, i.e. from end device though gateway to BAS monitoring terminal to ensure full seamless integration with BAS.




All commissioning / test reports are to be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manual and provided to the BAS Coordinator, Facilities and Services Division.



General BAS Requirements System Tuning Q 02.20.01

Once the system is fully operational and building occupied, full system tuning must be conducted to ensure control loops are operating effectively, parameters and setpoints are tuned to improve performance of building ensuring that no hunting is occurring and design conditions are achieved. All settings and changes are to be documented.



General BAS Requirements System Tuning Q 02.20.02

Network tuning must also be provided to ensure that minimal traffic and data transfer across IP and MSTP networks is achieved, in order to provide stable communications and prevent network interruption across a shared building automation network. This relates to smart programming and the correct configuration of points and change of value settings.




As-Built Drawings, Operating & Maintenance Manuals

Q 02.21.01 Full programming documentation and system manuals must be provided, sufficient to allow full user modification and maintenance of the system.





Q 02.21.02

The Contractor must provide one (1) suitably bound hard copies and two (2) soft copy of a comprehensive Operation and Maintenance Manual, covering all aspects of the work of the contract, at the completion of the work. As a minimum the manual must include the following: - Index - General description of the system. - A complete set of “as installed” drawings, with a complete and correct drawing schedule. - Complete details of all component parts of the installation. Note: this must include a list of the manufacturer's of all items of equipment and contacts for service and spares. - Operational descriptions and sequencing for all systems and equipment. - Comprehensive circuit / wiring diagrams for all equipment as relevant - Controller point schedules. - List of available spare points by controller. - Communications schematic drawings. - Installation, Operating and Maintenance instructions for all items of equipment provided under this contract. - Commissioning reports for all equipment and details of the settings for all such equipment. - A detailed report on the set up and commissioning of the control systems. - Commissioning and test results for all items. - A set of normal operating and maintenance instructions for the major plant items, in the form of simple, A4 size, sheets with “point by point” procedures for normal starting, stopping and operation of the plant.





Q 02.21.03Schematic of BAS system showing controllers and the connections to Monash IT network, HLI interfaces for Modbus, lighting control system, 3rd party BACnet devices, connections to paging & SMS, showing alarming to terminals in boiler house and engineering and WEB connection.





Q 02.21.04Soft Copies of drawings and manuals must be in an editable format, e.g. AutoCAD, Visio, Word, to enable future changes and additions to be incorporated.





Q 02.21.05 Finalised soft copy of the total O&M manual package must be uploaded on BAS server and linked on the relevant building front end main graphic menu.


96









feedback



General BAS Requirements System Handover Q 02.22.01

After completion and full system witnessing by the Consulting Engineer a final system handover must be provided to the Monash University nominated Project Manager / Coordinator. It is expected that the system will be fully tested and functional at this time so that it is in a state to be accepted by the University.



General BAS Requirements System Handover Q 02.22.02

If this is not the case the system will not be accepted and a defect list will be created and rectification managed by the Consulting Engineer. The system will not be deemed to be completed until handed over to the satisfaction of Monash University Facilities and Services Division.



General BAS Requirements Training Q 02.23.01

The specification must require the BAS Contractor to instruct relevant University personnel and its nominated Contractors in the operation of the system.




Training must be provided to allow the University staff to perform future alterations and additions to the system without dependence upon the controls supplier.




A training course must be conducted on site to enable operators to operate the system on a day to day basis, understand the operation of the system, and perform programming procedures including the following: - View building control parameters such as setpoints, PID settings, time schedules, manual overrides and control strategies. - Acknowledge and alter alarm settings - Select and alter system programs and point settings - Turn on and off controlled points manually - Log trend data - Create reports - Identify and test field equipment including controllers, end devices interfaces and communications.




The amount of training and number of attendees to be trained is project specific and should be agreed with the University Facilities and Services Maintenance Manager prior to completing and finalising tender documents.



General BAS Requirements Training Q 02.23.05 On project completion, a further 1 day (or as appropriate) must be spent on-

site, with specific training on the system as installed.




Six months into the Defects Liability Period, or at a time nominated by the University staff, a further 1 full day on site training must be provided if and when requested by the University. Such training must concentrate on higher level functioning and control of the system.



Hardware Requirements Input / Output Q 03.01

All interfacing with control devices must conform to the following standards: - Binary input: voltage-free contact - Binary output: voltage-free contact - Analogue input: 0 - 10V, 0 - 5V, 4 - 20 ma constant current, current device sensor, resistance device sensor, voltage device sensor - Analogue output: 0 - 10V, 4-20 ma - Service meters (gas, water, electricity): smart meter for electricity, gas and water consumption - Control relays must operate at 24V AC. - Transformers must be oversized to enable 30% future expansion.Note: Other interfacing standards are only acceptable in unusual circumstances, where sensors and devices conforming to the above standards are not available.



Hardware Requirements

Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) Q 03.02.01

The field Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) must support the BACnet communications standard and have BTL certification. Must operate as a completely independent stand-alone unit with all firmware and software to maintain control on an independent basis.





The Controllers must receive various analogue and digital input signals and consequently provide analogue and digital output signals to perform specific functions. It must have a range of standard software programs to suit all normal heating, ventilation and air-conditioning control and energy management requirements.




Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) Q 03.02.03 The Plant Controllers must be enclosed in panels of similar construction to

that specified for switchboards.





The system must allow various controllers and sub-controllers to be networked and have the flexibility to readily permit modifications and additions of the control functions. Should one controller in a network fail, it must not affect the performance and functionality of any others. DDCs losing communication with either the peer DDCs or the relevant controller router/master controller/global controller must not affect the system functionality. Router level device losing BAC/IP level communication must not affect the functionality of the system. This is to ensure the robustness and also network communications traffic is reduced by selecting a controller with the correct number of inputs and outputs for a specific application.





The input and output of a control loop must be on the same controller and not rely on the communications network to function. E.g. pressure sensor input and variable speed drive output signal must be on the same controller.


97









feedback





BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) must be used as plant field controllers, capable of data sharing, alarm and event management, scheduling, trending, and device and network management without the need to rely on the building network controller for these functions. Any deviation to this must be approved by the BAS Coordinator.




Direct Digital Controllers (DDC) Q 03.02.07 Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC) are subject to approval.





A minimum of 10% spare capacity for expansion should be included for each type of hardware I/O point, at each main controller location and 30% free space within each panel enclosure, i.e. switchboard / panel location not necessarily every VAV and small point controller.




Front End and Associated Equipment

Q 03.03.01The computer terminal interface must be a Microsoft Windows compatible PC with current Windows software and an LCD monitor. The specifications must be confirmed with the Project Manager /Coordinator to ensure adherence to the current University’s IT and BAS versions and standards.





Q 03.03.02The BAS server must provide access to web pages that must be accessed locally using a web browser over an intranet, WAN, etc., with remote access over the Internet.





Q 03.03.03

The BAS software (client and server) must be an operating system and hardware system that is able to run on the current and the last version of Windows operating system. The intent of the thin-client architecture is to provide the operator(s) complete access to the BAS system via a web browser. The thin-client web browser Graphical User Interface (GUI) must be a browser and operating system that is capable of supporting Microsoft Explorer / Google Chrome/Mozilla Firefox Browsers.





Q 03.03.04

The web browser GUI must provide a completely interactive user interface dependant on adequate password access level and must offer the following functionality as a minimum: - Trending - Scheduling - Real time ’live’ Graphic Programs - Tree Navigation - Parameter change of properties - Set point Adjustments - Alarm/Event information - Configuration of operators




Temperature Sensors Q 03.04.01

Temperature sensors must be resistance, voltage or current device types with ranges selected to suit particular applications and, having an error of no more than 0.3°C. In critical temperature controlled environments accuracy must be no more than 0.1°C





Sensors must not require regular re-calibration and must be protected in a neat plastic or metal casing so that access to terminal strips and cabling can easily be achieved by removal of a cover.





Sensors must not normally be locally adjustable. Where two or more sensors are provided for one zone, an average signal must be used. Sensors must be mounted such that effects of radiation from heating / cooling sources (e.g. direct sunlight, heat generating equipment, draughts, etc.) are minimised.



Hardware Requirements Humidity Sensors Q 03.05.01

Humidity sensors must be suitable for the location and environment in which they are used including allowance for functions, cleaning, etc. which occur in laboratory applications.



Hardware Requirements Humidity Sensors Q 03.05.02

Humidity sensors must include the following features: - Ultra fast response polymer capacitance type. - Not affected by condensation, fog, high humidity or contaminants. - Accuracy of ± 3% or better and not require regular re-calibration. - 0-5v or 0-10v output signal



Hardware Requirements Pressure Switches Q 03.06.01 Pressure switches must have adjustable switching setpoints to suit the

application.



Hardware Requirements Pressure Switches Q 03.06.02 Pressure switches must be sensitive enough (as low as 20 pa if necessary) to

ensure correct monitoring of small fans.




Air Pressure Sensors Q 03.07.01

All filters are to have a differential pressure sensor installed with sensing points both sides and the ability to run a dirty filter report and raise an alarm to maintenance staff.




Air Pressure Sensors Q 03.07.02

Pressure sensors must be selected with a range to suit the application, the mechanical contractor to advise of equipment pressure settings, e.g. dirty and clean filter differential pressures.


98









feedback



Hardware Requirements Damper Actuators Q 03.08

Damper actuators must be controlled by an electrical signal, 0-10V DC, capable of operating the dampers fully against the system pressure. For critical applications dampers must incorporate spring return facility so that in the event of power failure, they will ’fail safe’ in either the normally open or normally closed position to suit the application. Mounting must be rigid without distortion during operation. Linkages must be securely fixed to shafts without the risk of slipping on the shaft. Operation to be confirmed through an algorithm using actuator input (0-10V) and downstream change of condition/status. Critical applications to include blade operated limit switches.



Hardware Requirements Valve Actuators Q 03.09

Valve actuators must have sufficient power to ensure tight sealing against working pressure. Operating voltage must be 0-10V DC. Valve actuators must be linear in operation fitted with a manual override such that, in the event of a power failure, manual operation can be achieved. Visual indication of the status of each valve must be provided. Operation to be confirmed through an algorithm using actuator input (0-10V) and downstream change of condition/status.



Hardware Requirements Control Valves Q 03.10

Control valves must be two or three way to suit application. Valves must be linear of the equal percentage type and have a characterised plug. Ball and rotary shoe valves are not acceptable. Operation to be confirmed through an algorithm using actuator input (0-10V) and downstream change of condition/status.




Variable Speed Drives Q 03.11.01

Variable Speed Drives must be of the HVAC type incorporating fire interlock where required and IP 54 enclosure. Approved suppliers are Danfoss and ABB. Any alternatives require approval from the University Maintenance Manager. (Refer Section”I” HVAC).




Variable Speed Drives Q 03.11.02

Control of VSD’s can be either via a direct analogue input & associated output connection on a BMS field controller or via a direct input into the VSD’s own PID control loop. must the latter operation be used, the VSD must be able to accept a control setpoint from the BMS via HLI. VSD’s HLI’s are only acceptable for transfer of information must not be used to control the drive.



Hardware Requirements Wiring Q 03.12.01

The wiring for data communication between sensors, controllers, valve and damper actuators must be shielded so as not to be susceptible to electrical or magnetic interference.




All works must be adequately documented so that every wire can be subsequently identified by wire number, colour code or termination frame location. All wires shall be numbered individually, multi-core cables shall be terminated according to the standard colour code.



Hardware Requirements Wiring Q 03.12.03 All MSTP wiring must conform to BACnet standards in relation to termination

and shielding.



Hardware Requirements Wiring Q 03.12.04 All MSTP wiring must be installed in accordance with BACnet wiring

standards and must not contain star point segments.




All MSTP network wiring must only contain controllers and field devices of the same manufacturer, mixing of devices from different manufactures on a single MSTP network is not allowed.

This provides isolation between different manufactured devices on a MSTP network level preventing common issues and incompatibilities that sometimes arise between different vendors.




Connection at the Mechanical Services Switchboard

Q 03.13.01Controls must be designed so that the equipment will work safely and without risk to University staff or property in the event of a loss of power from the BAS controller.





Q 03.13.02 Control cabling must be wired to mechanical switchboards and be terminated in terminal strips provided in each board.





Q 03.13.03

All control wiring for enabling plant must pass through Auto-Manual-Off switches, mounted on the Mechanical Services switchboard. These switches must conform to the University's usage, and must be provided with indicator lamps as follows:RED: ALARM, or device in FAULT.GREEN: Device switched ON (either manually or remotely).





Q 03.13.04

In general, controllers must be segregated, but close to a Mechanical Services Switchboard which must supply the necessary power to the controllers. Note: all cabling passing through a mechanical services switchboard must conform to appropriate standards (e.g. 500V insulation), but the controller must be limited to extra low voltages (less than 35V), and data cable must be rated accordingly.





Q 03.13.05 Demonstrate that the power supply to the controllers is from the same supply as the plant that it is monitoring.




Uninterruptable Power Supply – Essential Services

Q 03.14.01The BAS is to be supported with an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) which must be capable of supporting all memory and clock for a minimum of 200 hours if the controller power supply is interrupted.


99









feedback





Q 03.14.02To prevent serious damage to control equipment from power surges, RFI, electronically induced spikes, etc., suitable power quality protection must be provided.





Q 03.14.03Each controller must have ample on-board RAM AND EPROM memory for program, data and processing purposes. Volatile memory must be battery backed and sustained for a minimum of 48 hours under power loss.





Q 03.14.04Where essential equipment is controlled and alarms monitored by the BAS then the applicable control system must be powered from the same essential services supply. Transition between mains power and generator power must be done smoothly via a properly arranged UPS system.





Q 03.14.05 Mains power failure alarm, UPS failure alarm, Generator running alarms, Generator status mismatch alarm must be set in a fail safe manner.





Q 03.14.06 Ethernet network racks and hubs where BMS field equipment is connected must be UPS backed up to ensure end-to-end alarm delivery.



Software Requirements Set Points Q 04.01 Employ systems that measure temperature variations between internal air and external air to control the system.



Software Requirements Capabilities Q 04.02

The BAS software must perform the following functions:- Schedule start/stop- Optimum start/stop- Duty cycling- Automatic temperature control- Maximum demand control- Control mode selection i.e. P, PI or PID- Calculation point- Lighting control- Integration with scheduling programs (where applicable)- Integration with metering devices- Scanning and alarm processing- Alarm functions (via SMS and email)- Load shedding- Temperature set point reset algorithm- Graphics reporting- Trend logging- Global communication (including web functionality and remote access).



Software Requirements User Friendliness Q 04.03

The BAS software must be easy to operate and to program. Operators must be able to perform the following operations after a maximum of one day of training:- View building parameters;- Select relevant pages, systems and points;- Acknowledge alarms;- Turn on and off controlled points manually; and,- Log trend data.



Software Requirements Graphical Displays Q 04.04.01

Where required, Graphics must be included for ease of system operation. Graphical displays must comply with Monash University standards and must include but will not be limited to:- Chilled water plant schematic- Heating hot water plant schematic- Energy and water consumption data- Tabular information where appropriate - AHU & FCU Mechanical schematics- Main Campus Menu to contain Buildings and Remote Sites- Main Building Menu to contain submenus and standard navigation buttons- Separate AHU ,FCU Menu to be easy navigated by level- Floor Plans with room temperatures facing North in direction.- AHU Page graphic to have link to easy reference serving equipment.- AUTO Manual ON OFF sliders.



Software Requirements Graphical Displays Q 04.04.02

Graphics Standards including colours, symbols and links as per Monash University standard, examples shown in Section Q: Appendix - Item Q3 Sample Monash University BAS Graphical Displays. Approval of format proposed to be obtained by the Monash University BAS Coordinator before implementation.




Software Requirements Naming Convention Q 04.05

Points must be identified using the Monash University standard naming convention as follows- Campus- Building Number / Name- Location / Plant- Point / Device name- Controllers must not be configured until the naming and numbering convention has been approved by the Monash BAS Coordinator. A guide to naming convention can be found in Appendix D of Design Document Q


100









feedback



Software Requirements Dashboard Displays Q 04.06.01

If required, the system may need to be engineered using a commissioning dashboard. This is a basic graphic based format displaying values that will be properly labelled any logically located. The purpose of this will be to aid in project commissioning and the building of graphics in the chosen University format. The requirement of either graphics or dashboard will be to the discretion of the University BAS Coordinator.



Software Requirements Dashboard Displays Q 04.06.02

The Dashboard application must not be supplied from a third party where this application is not compatible with BAS. The application must be either a part of the BAS application package or a plugin that is fully compatible with the BAS application. All Hardware devices must be BTL certified.



Software Requirements Communication Q 04.07.01

Any BAS installed on University properties must provide user interface functions to responsible staff via the University’s computer network. This will allow the relevant staff to: - Program remote controllers from the central BAS control room; - Receive alarm messages, automatically process and convey them to the Facilities and Services Division via the University's IT network; and, - View live and historical trend data from the remote stations.



Software Requirements Communication Q 04.07.02

Within each of the particular networks, the controller must have the ability to broadcast data, to transmit input/output points as global points onto the network for use by other controllers, which are able to capture data for internal processing. If one controller fails, it must not affect the other controllers’ performance.



Software Requirements Reporting Q 04.08.01 The BAS software must display live and trend data on demand.



Software Requirements Reporting Q 04.08.02 The software must allow the operator to select points, groups of points, and mechanical systems through user friendly graphics functionality.



Software Requirements Reporting Q 04.08.03

Reports must include: - Current set points - Measured values - Equipment status, - Metering and logging information - Alarm history - Equipment hours run times - PID parameters - Maintenance instructions - Points disabled or manually overridden - Out of hours operation



Software Requirements Reporting Q 04.08.04 The software must provide graphic pages for all relevant building functions.



Software Requirements Audit Trail Q 04.09The workstation software must automatically log and timestamp every operation that a user performs at a workstation, from logging on and off a workstation to changing a point value, modifying a program, manually overriding an object, viewing a report, modifying a schedule etc.



Software Requirements User Accounts Q 04.10

The same user accounts must be used for the browser interface and for the operator workstations. Operators must not be forced to have separate passwords. All commands and user activity through the browser must be recorded in the system‘s activity log which can be later searched and retrieved by user, date or both. New user account creation must be strictly through the BAS Coordinator.



Software Requirements Trend Logging Q 04.11.01

The BAS must have the ability to store logged data both locally in the controller, (ie: B-AAC controller) and be sent to the nominated SQL database on the University’s server farm database, including all input/output points, for a minimum period of two years without manual data handling. Trend data must be easily retrievable for export to Excel spread sheet. The BACnet Standard approved Logging Object must be used for this.



Software Requirements Trend Logging Q 04.11.02Each point must have individual time scales for system reporting. The time scale must be adjustable in one minute increments. The system must be capable of logging all inputs & outputs on the system without the need for additional hardware /memory at a later stage.



Software Requirements Trend Logging Q 04.11.03It must also be possible to register the start/stop sequence of any selected plant using the trend log, such as: main plant, floor/zone manager, services settings, water temperatures, etc.



Software Requirements Trend Logging Q 04.11.04 Trend logging functions must be easy to query, manipulate trend periods, and adjust from the same graphics page.



Software Requirements Trend Logging Q 04.11.05 The system must have the facility for printing out any display log.


101









feedback



Software Requirements Trend Logging Q 04.11.06

During commissioning the following logs must be configured and graphed as a minimum, other points logged as required for project based on system criticality: - Sensors e.g. temperature and humidity – 15 minute intervals - Change of state of plant e.g. fans, pumps, chillers. - Filter differential pressure – monthly - Energy meters – 15 minute intervals - Hours run of all main plant - monthly



Software Requirements BAS Alarms Q 04.12.01

Whenever abnormal conditions arise, alarms must be generated and the alarm messages must be displayed on a nominated Workstation / Terminal and have the capability to simultaneously generate SMS and email messages, as appropriate to the application. When an alarm condition is generated, the relevant computer terminals on the system must beep continuously until the alarm is acknowledged or muted.




Alarm signals must be sorted and printed out at relevant printers with clear action messages. Alarms to be prioritised by their importance, there are four levels of alarms; critical, high, medium and low. These priorities are based on risk, implications of failure and required response time and rectification times.

Priority 1 – Critical, serious implications, instant response time expected. Critical areas must have fail-safe alarms in the event of power failure. Examples are fire alarm, emergency eyewash activation, power failure in a building, transfer switch operation, generator running, generator failure, chiller or boiler failure on a building that must have closely controlled temperatures such as IT the Data Centre, research laboratories, critical equipment and storage. Alarm to be sent via SMS to site ESO and appear on ESO alarm page. This alarm must associate with the relevant controller off line alarm as well RED.

Priority 2 – High, very important, could develop into a critical alarm if not rectified within the four hour response time expected. Must identify fault and take appropriate action to get rectified urgently. Examples Constant temperature rooms, Laboratory equipment , -80’C freezers, steam supply failure for sterilizer & washer equipment, temperature or humidity issues for animal research areas, room pressures not being maintained (i.e. NANO clean rooms, DHW temperature failure, central plant failure not defined as critical, sump pump high alarm. Chilled water temperature alarm, condenser water alarm, SMS to ESO and appear on ESO alarm page ORANGE.

Priority 3 – Medium, important, a five day rectification time expected. Must identify fault and take appropriate action to get rectified within this time. Examples are main plant failure on a non-critical building such as teaching or administration buildings. Alarm mismatch associated with fan run and fan status mismatch. appear on ESO alarm page only BLUE.

Priority 4 – Low, information only, a fourteen day response time expected. Must identify fault and take appropriate action to get rectified within this time period are dirty filters, fan or pump failed where a standby / reserve unit is available and has been initiated. Hours run alarms for maintenance. appear on ESO alarm page only BLACK.

Return to normal GREEN.



Software Requirements BAS Alarms Q 04.12.03Energy and water Alarm: The energy alarm category is to alert University’s Engineering & Sustainability department that a system has exceeded the expected KPIs in terms of energy and water usage. These will be delivered to a nominated workstation or a user profile.




The system must be capable of alarming all inputs & outputs on the system without the need for additional hardware /memory at a later stage. All alarm limits must be user adjustable without the need access BMS programs (i.e. filter and temperature alarm setpoints must be adjustable from the BMS graphic.)




As a minimum the following alarms must be setup at the time of commissioning: - Each temperature sensor must set up with alarm information, (Monash will advise on the initial set point i.e. in many instances this may be set to > 99’c this enables flexibility later must an alarm be required). - Mismatch alarms for fan/pump status as follows a) if fan is stopped and time schedule is on and b) if the fan is running and the time schedule is off. - Differential pressure alarms for filters, chilled water and heating hot water systems. - Mismatch alarms for chiller system, a) chiller is enabled and there is no current draw, alternatively b) there is chiller current draw and the chiller has not been enabled by the BMS. - Hours run alarms for all monitored equipment.



Software Requirements Utilities Monitoring Q 04.13Utility monitoring data must be exported real time to a SQL database so that it can be imported by 3rd party monitoring software the analysis and monitoring aspects.



Software Requirements Time Synchronisation Q 04.14

All BAS and Sub-controllers must have the ability to synchronise with the university’s central BAS time and must be the same throughout the various campus Building Automation Systems. This is required for accurate alarming and logging.



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.01Meters must communicate (via an appropriate BTL listed controller router) with the existing University BAS systems via native BACnet/IP. The controller router must utilise the university’s Ethernet network.


102









feedback



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.02 Any devices communicating over the University’s ethernet network must only communicate via BACnet/IP.



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.03New meters must have the flexibility to be updated on any of the university’s BAS systems (Andover, Alerton, Tridium), using a university appointed BAS service contractor.



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.04 Metering networks must be connected to BAS via a dedicated controller router, and must not be shared with other building controls such as HVAC.



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.05 Electricity meters must be connected by High Level Modbus or BACnet outputs.



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.06 Fluid meter (Gas, water, flow and temperature) must provide pulse low level interface.



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.07

Device names and metering values must be named using the Monash University standard naming convention: Campus, Building Number/Name, Location/Plant, Point/Device name, all BACnet points must follow the University’s BAS naming conventions as described in the University BAS standards.




Trend logs and graphics must be setup for all new metering. Meter reporting must be capable of reporting all meters types on a single graph i.e. electricity meter vs gas meter vs water meter. Reporting must be able to display meter trend logs vs plant trend logs. i.e. mechanical meter vs VSD speed. Reporting must be able to display at least 5 trend logs on the same graph with each trend log assigned a selectable colour and graph scale. Unlimited time period must also be selectable. Graphs and reporting to be user configurable.



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.09At least 30 days of data must be stored at local controller router level, with extended logging exported to an open SQL database, providing at least 2 years FIFO. Using maximum 15 minute intervals of logged values.



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.10Following installation all meters must be empirically calibrated and all relevant measurements including CT ratios, kWh/pulse and meter programs forwarded to the university BAS Coordinator.



Software Requirements Metering Q 04.15.11 Single line diagrams of the installed metering network must be generated and forwarded to university BAS Coordinator.




Where building energy display screens are required, a scrolling display must be provided. 4 pages displaying live building electricity, gas and water consumption and a page highlighting environmental initiatives such as rain water harvesting. Each page must compare current period to an older period i.e. this week's consumption vs last week's consumption and/or this month's consumption compared to last month's consumption.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security General R 01

The building security concept must be established during the early stages of a project. The Design Team must develop a complete security system design relevant to the project. The Project Architect must consult with the Project Manager and the Security Systems Manager on security issues affecting a project at the design stage to ensure minimum security department requisites are covered. Related Security policies include the Monash University:- Access Control (Electronic) Policy- Access to Controlled Areas Policy- Security Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Policy- Key Policy

Monash University Access Control (Electronic) Policy

Monash University Access to Controlled Areas Policy

Monash University Security Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Policy

Monash University Key Policy

Electrical Engineer

R - Security General Design Principles R 01.01.01

The following is a general list of functions of particular concern that require security consideration: - Store rooms containing radioactive material or dangerous chemicals - Computer laboratories, with 24-hour access- Study areas, with 24-hour acess- Animal houses - Lecture theatres - Areas of substantial intellectual or monetary value (e.g. computer software design, saleable medical research etc.) - Places handling substantial quantities of money - Areas in which critical administrative functions are carried out (e.g. office of The Vice Chancellor, Information Technology Services) - General administration offices. - Sensitive waste storage- Carparks- Lifts


103









feedback

Electrical Engineer

R - Security General Design Principles R 01.01.02

Design principles relevant to security to be included: - Incorporation of disabled electronic access control facilities into the design (i.e. to select the most suitable bi-parting electrically operated doors); - Passenger lift control functions; - Design of the shell of the building; - Design of internal User areas; - Security of accessible low-level windows etc. - Combining all high-security functions to one area of a building; - External lighting design

Electrical Engineer

R - Security General Closed Circuit

Television (CCTV) R 01.02CCTV must meet the specifications outlined in Section R: Appendix - Security - Item R1. The University Security Systems Manager must be contacted to ensure specification included is the most up to date.

Section R: Appendix - Security - Item R1

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Electronic Security Systems R 02

The Tecom (Now Interlogix) V10 Challenger intruder detection and building access control system must be specified for electronic security intruder detection and access control to University buildings.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Building Access Control Design Criteria R 03.01.01

The microprocessor based control unit must be a fully redundant system (that must remain in operation if the FORCEFIELD network is offline) with a distributed processing network topology.

Electrical Engineer


Whilst operating, the system must grant or deny access through a door to a cardholder based on the presentation of a properly encoded card to an authorised card reader at a valid time of day, day of week and card status.

Electrical Engineer


Each individual card transaction, both through entry or egress card readers, must log as a separate identity at each door, i.e. entry shall be distinguishable from egress at the same door.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Building Access Control Design Criteria R 03.01.04 The system must be wired on a dedicated security local area network (LAN).

Electrical Engineer


Battery backup must be provided to maintain all memory and the real time clock calendar for not less than 12 hours should mains power fail. The battery must be automatically recharged when mains power is applied.

Electrical Engineer


Challenger Management software must be programmed by the Security Contractor to control the functions of the various devices, maintain the database, and control access through all doors equipped with card readers and exit doors.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Building Access Control Installation R 03.02.01

In general, electronic security must be installed by a specialist University approved Security Contractor who is FORCEFIELD accredited. See Requirement R1.5

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Building Access Control Installation R 03.02.02 The University prefers that the Security Contractor must be a direct

subcontractor to the Builder - not to the Electrical Contractor.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Building Access Control Installation R 03.02.03

Electronic security must be installed by a specialist University approved Security Contractor, as determined by the University Security Systems Manager. Approved Security Contractors include:

ADR Security Solutions 52 Roseman Rd Chirnside Park Ph: 03 9777 0050

Chubb Electronic Security Business Development Executive87 Racecourse Road North Melbourne Ph. 9241 5708

Diebold Security 12 International Square Tullamarine 3043 Ph. 8318 4000

ACES (Access Controlled Engineering Systems)Mr. Brett Saxon51 Grove Street Eltham Ph. 0418 557 052

SNP Security 3/297 Ingles St Port Melbourne Ph. 9647 9200

Electrical Engineer

R - Security System Training R 04 The specification must require the major Security Contractor to instruct

University personnel in the operation of the system.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

As Built Drawings, Operation & Maintenance Manuals

R 05 As-built drawings, operating and maintenance manuals are to be provided by the contractor. (Electronic Copy)

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Notice of Completion Commissioning R 06.01

The Security Contractor is to ensure that the security system is completed and commissioned prior to practical completion. This process should not be considered complete until the Security Systems Manager, or his/her designate, has signed off that he/she is satisfied with the installed system and it is ready to operate.


104









feedback

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Notice of Completion Witness Testing R 06.02

The Consultant must be responsible for the witnessing of testing and final acceptance certification of the completed installation. On satisfactory completion of the project the Consultant must forward a completed Notice Of Completion formand Alarm Verification Record (Section R: Appendix - Security - Item R2) to the University Project Manager/Coordinator and the Security Systems Manager.

Section R: Appendix - Security - Item R2

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security External Lighting R 07.01.01 The main external entrance to a building must be well lit after dark. External

lighting must be controlled by a photoelectric cell not by a time clock.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security External Lighting R 07.01.02

Where it is intended to install digital recording CCTV cameras, the location or placement of light fittings are more critical. The security lighting from the building must extend to the appropriate Campus Security Light Corridor.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security External Lighting R 07.01.03

Perimeter doors and other ground level points of potential access must be well illuminated by security lighting after dark as per the Australian Standards (AS/NZS 1158.3.1).

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security Building Facade R 07.02 In principle, all people entering and leaving a building must pass through the

same access point. If possible, public access must be limited to one door.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security Main Entry Doors R 07.03

Where double doors are installed, the inactive leaf must be secured with a lockable Orb panic bolt of no less than 300 mm on the bottom of the door and a Dalco panic bolt no less than 400 mm on the top of the door. Alternatively another Orb lockable panic bolt could be installed at the top of the door no less than 500 mm in length, keyed to the external master key system. The Consultant must arrange for the University Locksmith to install the correct cylinder prior to installation.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security Type A Door (Full

Access Control) R 07.04

Type A door (full access control) must have the following hardware/features: - Entry: Proximity card reader installed on the unsecured side of the door- Egress: Proximity card reader installed on the secured side of the door - Break glass door release unit on all auto doors. - Electric door strike, electric mortice lock or magnetic lock - Local door alarm sounder (for DOTL and Forced Door alarms) - Reed switch door monitoring - Orb lockable deadbolt on fixed leaf (where applicable) - Ad! Or other University approved Blocker plate installed (where applicable)- Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security

Type B Door (Partial Access Control)

R 07.05

Type B Door (Partial Access Control) must have the following hardware/features: - Entry: Proximity card reader installed on the unsecured side of the door- Egress: Utilise micro switch in door lock. Electric door strike, electric mortice lock or magnetic lock or door furniture on the secure side to be free handle egress - Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks.- Break glass door release unit on all auto doors. - Local door alarm sounder (for DOTL and forced door alarms) only if requested or replacing existing. - Reed switch door monitoring Orb lockable deadbolt for fixed door leaf (where applicable) - Ad! Or other University approved Blocker plate installed (where applicable)

Electrical Engineer


Type C Door (Controlled/Monitored)

R 07.06.01

Type C Door (Controlled/Monitored) must have the following hardware/features: - Electric door strike, electric mortice lock or magnetic lock - Local door alarm sounder (for DOTL and forced door alarms) only if requested or replacing existing. - Break glass door release unit, not required if free handle to exit - Reed switch door monitoring - Orb lockable deadbolt for fixed door leaf (where applicable)- ADI or other University approved Blocker plate installed (where applicable)- Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks.

Electrical Engineer



R 07.06.02Each access controlled, controlled/monitored door must have a unique address in the system, which must allow separate programming and control of the door

Electrical Engineer



R 07.06.03 The function of arming/disarming all doors must be carried out individually via time zones.

Electrical Engineer



R 07.06.04 All doors must be individually monitored for alarms.

Electrical Engineer



R 07.06.05 All Full and Partial Access Controlled doors must be controlled by Tecom (Interlogix) Intelligent 4-door controllers.

Electrical Engineer



R 07.06.06 Entry/Egress card transactions at each door must log as separate individual items in the security system.

Electrical Engineer



R 07.06.07Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks. University Security Systems Manager will need to approve non Electric Strike Doors

Electrical Engineer



R 07.06.08All Access Controlled/Monitored Doors must be cabled such that a future upgrade to a type B door must not require any cabling between the "intelligent 4-door Controller" and the future Egress Proximity card reader.


105









feedback

Electrical Engineer


Type D Door (24 Hour emergency exit door)

R 07.07

Type D Door (24 Hour emergency exit door) must have the following hardware/features: - Electric door strike, electric mortice lock or magnetic lock - Local door alarm sounder (for DOTL and forced door alarms). Orb lockable dead bolt for fixed leaf (where applicable) - No external door furniture; - Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks. University Security Systems Manager will need to approve non Electric Strike Doors - All door furniture must allow for "hands free" operation; - Reed switch door monitoring - Doors must be hung to open out; - Custom signage - Ad! Or other University approved Blocker plate installed (Where Applicable)

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security Type E Door

(Monitored Door) R 07.08.01

Type E Door (Monitored Door) must have the following hardware/features: - Electric door strike, electric mortice lock or magnetic lock - Break glass door release unit (where applicable) - Local door alarm sounder - Reed switch door monitoring - AD! Or other University approved Blocker plate installed (Where Applicable) - Electric Strikes to be used unless there is a specific requirement to use Magnetic locks or Electric Mortice Locks. University Security Systems Manager will need to approve non Electric Strike Doors

Electrical Engineer


(Monitored Door) R 07.08.02Each 24-hour emergency door must have a unique address in the security system, which must allow separate monitoring, programming and control of the door. The status of each individual door must be displayed on the main system computer.

Electrical Engineer


(Monitored Door) R 07.08.03 Entry/egress through these doors must be restricted at all times.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security Electro-

Mechanical Doors R 07.09.01The selection of the correct door actuator is vital. Where electronic access control is installed, the system must be programmed to lock/open the main entry doors on the basis of a User defined time schedule.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security Electro-

Mechanical Doors R 07.09.02 Proximity card readers must allow access outside normal business hours.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security Peripheral Security Door Actuator

Criteria R 07.10.01

The door actuator must provide: - 240 volt operator - Constant rated 5 kg torque capacitor start and run squirrel cage motor. - Continuously rated motor - Self-lubricating planetary gearbox with spiral bevel drive - Microprocessor control with a programmable feature that incorporates solid state switching of the motor. - The microprocessor must have a non-volatile memory, which remains intact during a power failure. - Automatic reversing if obstructed during closing sequence with fully adjustable sensitivity setting. - Automatic stop and retry after adjustable delay if obstructed during opening sequence. - Safety "creep" speed facility allowing doors to reduce speed before reaching location of previously detected obstruction. - Chain drive with average tensile strength of 1950 kg. - Dual sets of safety PE beams - Audible alarm at the door (for DOTL and forced door alarms) - Battery backup for a minimum of 50 operations in the event of mains power failure. - In the event of an electrical power failure, the battery backup system would keep the doors locked and secure. - The ability to physically monitor the doors when open and closed - Installation of a separate electric lock or rotor lock - The ability to monitor the status of the electric lock; - Fail safe mode - Entry radar detector - Exit radar detector - K2 two position spring return key switch keyed to the building master key system (IN) - K4 four position key switch (auto/exit/open/locked) keyed to the building master key system (OUT)

Electrical Engineer


Criteria R 07.10.02The Consultant must arrange for the University Locksmith to install the correct cylinder in the K2 (IN) & K4 (OUT) key switches prior to installation. At Clayton Campus all external doors are fitted with the designated Lockwood Twin profile cylinder units.

Electrical Engineer


Criteria R 07.10.03 The inverter system must allow 50 cycles of the door under a power failure condition.

Electrical Engineer


Criteria R 07.10.04

The door operator must provide separate individual alarms to the Forcefield Security Management System and CAMS - Alarm Monitoring System when: - There is a 240 volt power failure at the door - Low battery voltage is detected at the door - There is a fault with the battery charger - All alarms must simultaneously communicate direct to the University Security Control Room and appear on the. CAMS - Alarm Monitoring System - All alarms are to duel report to both the Forcefield and CAMS systems - Data network connection to provide Communication on the University network

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Electronic Intrusion Alarm System R 08

The University is equipped with a TECOM (GE) based intrusion alarm system. The system is monitored from the Security Control Room (Building 61).


106









feedback

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Electronic Intrusion Alarm System

Communication Mode with Network Master

R 08.01.01

The majority of Challenger panels are connected to security network via digital dialler and are fully monitored. All Challenger panels should be programmed to have a daily test signal to the CAMS - Alarm Monitoring System. A CAMS Central Station software package controls the Network Master database.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 08.01.02 The TS 0898 TCP/IP computer interface must be used on all new projects and must be programmed for event driven data transfer.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 08.01.03 All challenger RAS must be the eight area TS 080/ unless specified by the University Project Manager or the Security Systems Manager.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security


After Hours Alarm Notification R 08.02.01 Alarms must simultaneously communicate direct to the Central Control, alarm

locally at each door and have the ability to print out to a networked printer.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security


After Hours Alarm Notification R 08.02.02 All alarms must be a minimum of four-state.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Electronic Intrusion Alarm System Alarm Line R 08.03.01

The Consultant/Project manager must arrange for an Austel Licenced Contractor to install a mode 3-telephone socket adjacent to the challenger panel and connect into the university telephone network to facilitate dialler monitoring on CAMS.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Electronic Intrusion Alarm System Alarm Line R 08.03.02

The Consultant/Project Manager must also arrange for an Austel Licenced Contractor to install a data point adjacent to the Challenger Panel to facilitate connection back to the Forcefield Headend via the University's data network. Note: It is also required to liaise with the I.T.S Department for all network connection and advice.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Electronic Intrusion Alarm System Battery Back-Up R 08.04

Security intruder detection systems must be fully supported by battery backup for a minimum period of 12 hours, should normal mains power fail to a satellite alarm panel. The Forcefield system must be programmed for weekly auto battery check.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware)

Door Strikes, Electric Locks, and Magnetic Locks

R 09.01.01

Padde ES2000/ES9000 Electric Strike Electric door strikes must be specified as PADDE ES 2000 complete with dead-latch facility or other University-approved. Door guards must be specified to prevent tampering with Padde electric strikes. Each door strike must be complete with: - Keeper security status monitoring (i.e.: wired for both N/O & N/C) - Door lock tongue monitoring (i.e.: wired for both N/O & N/C) Each Padde strike must be configured for fail-safe mode. - Electric Strikes to be used as the preferred Electronic Hardware unless a Strike cannot be installed due to unsuitable door/door frame structure.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.01.02

Electric mortice dead latches must be specified as LOCKWOOD 357.:1AM2R/L--SC or other University-approved keyed to the University Master key system. (Please note that the Lockwood deadlatch is not suitable for all applications). Cable transfer devices must be specified as Seadan SSE 4000 or SE4050 stainless steel flexible conduit each with overall lengths of 295mm and 590mm respectively.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.01.03Magnetic locks must be specified as PADDE FR1200B 24 VDC/250 MA or LOCKNETICS range or other University-approved. (The Consultant must obtain permission from the Project Coordinator/Security Systems Manager prior to specifying magnetic locks.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.01.04All new control panels must be Tecom TS 0816 Challengers. Challengers attached to the FORCEFIELD access control system must also have an 8 Meg IUM. Firmware version to be 8120 and above

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.01.05 All Intelligent User Modules (IUM) attached to the FORCEFIELD system must be Tecom TS 0884.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.01.06All door controllers must be Tecom TS 0867 Intelligent 4 door controllers with the Tecom TS 0329 enclosure. Door controllers attached to the Forcefield Access Control System must also have an 8 Meg IUM.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.01.07All lift controllers must be Tecoll1 TS 0869 Intelligent 4 lift controllers with the Tecom TS 0329 enclosure. Door controllers attached to the Forcefield Access Control System must also have an 8 Meg IUM.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.01.08 All Data Gathering Panels (DGP) must be Tecom TS0820.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.01.09All building perimeter doors must have a minimum of “Type C” configuration and connected to the campus wide remote lock down function which is driven by the Security Management System (Forcefield).

Electrical Engineer

R - Security


Access Cards, Card Readers and Exit Devices

R 09.02.01All Access cards shall be Mifare Smartcard technology and be compatible with the campus security system. The contracted University supplier is Unicard Systems Pty LTD. Not required to be supplied by contractor unless specified by Project Manager/coordinator

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.02.02

Mifare 26 bit wiegand contactless card readers must be used on all new installations. If the installation is part of an existing Andover card reader system then the Security Systems Manager will supply a separate specification. The contracted University supplier is Unicard Systems Pty LTD who can supply HID i-class readers with the Monash Encoded key

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.02.03

Break glass release units shall be double-pole resetable type (non-glass) University approved. They must be installed in a suitable location adjacent to the secure side of the door. If the glass is broken in an emergency, the controlled door must: - Open automatically (I pole) - Initiate alarms (2nd pole)


107









feedback

Electrical Engineer

R - Security



R 09.02.04Where required the Consultant must specify Stainless Steel Infrared Touchless type for all request-to-exit push buttons Button must illuminate Green/Red in Colour for all doors.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware) Duress Buttons R 09.03.01

Duress Hold-up button (hardwired): Where required, the Consultant must specify Dual Action stainless steel type complete with 2 spare keys or similar University approved. (Preferred Option)

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware) Duress Buttons R 09.03.02

Duress Hold-up button (wireless): Where required, the Consultant must specify from the Inovonics Monitored range of equipment or similar University approved. Must be dual action.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware) Door Monitoring R 09.04.01

SENTROL 1078 1 "Reed switches must be specified for all doors connected to the access control or intruder detection systems. Each encapsulated reed switch must be operated by individual magnets and installed in the door leaf and doorjamb adjacent to the leading edge. Each switch and end of line circuitry must be mounted in each doorjamb head. The magnet to operate the reed switch must be concealed by recessing into the door leaf and the gap between the reed switch and magnet must not exceed 4.0 mm.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware) Door Monitoring R 09.04.02

Door status indicators must be specified for all Interlocking doors. Each door status indicator must consist of: - Clipsal series 2000 plate - Green LED (engraved - Door Available). - Red LED (engraved - Door Unavailable).The Consultant must specify custom mounting brackets where required.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware) Door Monitoring R 09.04.03 All local door sounders must be RS 626-141 or other University approved.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware) Cabling R 09.05.01

All cabling on challenger LAN (Local Area Network) equipment must be Belden 8723 or equivalent with a separate earth wire (2.5mm2 Green/Yellow) OR 4MM2FOR LONGER DISTANCES

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware) Cabling R 09.05.02 The cabling from the door controllers to the readers must be shielded 7core

(14/0.20mm2).

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware) Cabling R 09.05.03 Figure 8 cable (Rating 24/0.20mm2) must be used on electric locks.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security

Security Equipment (Hardware) Cabling R 09.05.04

All Break Glass Units, Egress Buttons, Duress Buttons, Reed Switches, Sonarlearts, PIR's and Door Status Indicators must use 4-core (14/0.20mm2) cable

Electrical Engineer

R - Security


DC Emergency Power Supplies R 09.06

12-volt/24 volt DC battery backup regulated power supply and battery system must be specified to maintain power to the electric locks and security system for a 12 hour period should normal "mains" power be disrupted. The backup power supply system must be fully monitored by the FORCEFIELD and CAMS systems

Electrical Engineer

R - Security


240-Volt Power Supplies R 09.07.01 All security panels and other devices must be wired on circuits dedicated to

security.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security


240-Volt Power Supplies R 09.07.02 A Lock-dog must be installed on each associated circuit breaker.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security


Passive infra-Red Detectors R 09.08 Where required the Consultant must specify from the Aritech/OPTEX range of

PIR's, or other University approved intruder detectors.

Electrical Engineer

R - Security


Communication Systems R 09.09

Where required the Consultant must specify from the DALLAS DELTA range of equipment (Must check with the Project Manager/ Coordinator to identify if VOIP units are required)

Architect S - Retail General S 01

All retail tenancies must comply with:- the Monash Retail Design and Fitout Guidelines- Monash Design and Development Controls - Interiors (DDCI)Tenancies must submit concepts and ongoing design development for approvals - no signage is to be installed wihtout prior approvals.

Monash Retail Design and Fitout Guidelines

Monash Design and Development Controls - Interiors (DDCI)

Architect S - Retail Retail Tenancies Cleaners Sink S 02.01

Architects to include provisions for cleaners sinks where retail tenants or food operators are planned. Hot and cold water, and connection to silt traps or sewer to be provided.

Architect S - Retail Retail Tenancies Bin Wash S 02.03

Bin washing facilities must be provided for food tenancies. This area to have hot and cold water provision through a common outlet with a hose connection for washing of bins. The bin wash must be located on an impervious surface graded and drained to sewer via an approved interceptor.

Architect S - Retail Retail Tenancies Food Safety S 02.04.01

Retail food premises shall comply with Australian Standard for the design, construction and fitout of Food Premises (AS4674 –2004).The design and construction of food premises must – (a) be appropriate for the activities for which the premises are used;(b) provide adequate space for the activities to be conducted on the food premises and for the fixtures, fittings and equipment used for those activities;(c) permit the food premises to be effectively cleaned and,(d) as far as practicable – (i) exclude dirt, dust, fumes, smoke and other contaminants;(ii) not permit the entry of pests; and(ii) not provide harbourage for pests.


108









feedback


Prior to undertaking any works at a proposed food premises or at an existing food premises, approval should be obtained from the relevant Local Council's Public Health Unit. When submitting plans for approval, they should include:- (i) Details of the proposed layout of the premises showing the position of all benches, appliances, equipment, counters and other fixtures. (ii) Specifications which list all materials to be used, finishes to floors, walls, ceilings, cupboards and work benches and details/descriptions of all equipment to be used. (iii) Information relating to the types of food involved, the nature of work to be carried out in each area and the number of proposed employees. (iv) Where mechanical ventilation is required additional plans must be submitted which include: - (a) a fully dimensional drawing showing end and front elevation - (b) details relating to the filter capacity, rated motor power and provision for make up air - (c) details showing the flue and flue height


Food premises must have sufficient natural or mechanical ventilation to effectively remove fumes, smoke, steam and vapours from the food premisesMechanical exhausts systems are required for most cooking equipment (ie. stoves, deep fryers,ovens rotisseries etc.) and dishwashers or other washing equipment that vents steam which islikely to cause condensation on walls and ceilings i.e. commercial dishwasher.These systems shall be installed in accordance with'Australian Standard 1668.2 - The use of mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning in buildings,Part 2. Mechanical ventilation for acceptable indoor-air quality.Provisions must also be made for adequate make-up air (replacement air for air drawn out by theexhaust system). In cases where inadequate make up air is provided the system will not operatecorrectly resulting in a vacuum affect which can cause either fume problems and/or doors beingdrawn in. This will lead to both pest and draft problems..


Food retail premises must use potable water for all activities that use water that are conducted on the food premises.Food premises must have a sewage and wastewater disposal system that –- will effectively dispose of all sewage and waste water; and- is constructed and located so that there is no likelihood of the sewage and wastewaterpolluting the water supply or contaminating food.Water efficient cooking appliances shall be installed. For example water efficient waterless woks, which use less than 80% cooling water than conventional wok cookers.


Grease traps should be installed as required to prevent solids and greasy waste from entering the sewerage system. They are to intercept and retain silt, sand, oil, grease, sludge and other substances. The grease traps protects both the internal pipes as well as sewerage infrastructure. Locating grease traps in food preparation areas can result in contamination problems when the traps are emptied or in the event of overflow, and should therefore be located outside the food preparation area and preferably outside the building. Adequate provision for the storage of used cooking oil must be provided to enable third party off-site recycling of this material.


Food premises must have facilities for the storage of garbage and recyclable matter that: - adequately contain the volume and type of garbage and recyclable matter on the food premises; -enclose the garbage or recyclable matter, - keep pests and animals away from it, and - are designed and constructed so that they may be easily and effectively cleaned.

Bin storage areas must be provided with washing facilities as per local bylaws,to enable effective cleaning of all waste storage containers and to discharge waste water to sewer via approved trade waste treatment apparatus. The bin storage and wash facility must be:- Large enough to store all garbage and waste matter, including dump masters if used- Provided with hot and cold water through a common outlet with a hose connection,- Graded and drained to a silt trap and/or connected to a grease trap, prior to sewer discharge- Capable of containing all waste water as a result of the cleaning process,- If the floor area of the bin wash facility is greater than 20m2, then it must be undercover as per trade waste agreement requirements.

1611103 - master copy - engineering & sustainability ...€¦ · 1611103 - master copy -...

Documents